Electronic Call Systems

9 8 7 5 3
4
2
7a
8a
9a
ELECTRONIC
CALL
11 SYSTEMS
TEC H N IC AL
MAN U AL
2012
ECHOS
EXHITO
COMPACT
STUDIO
9 8 7 5 3
4
2
7a
INTRODUCTION Notice to the installer and user
This edition contains helpful information on the operation and installa- Check the integrity of the product after removing it from the packing.
tion of Farfisa video intercoms systems.
Packing materials (such as plastic bags, cardboard, polystyrene
In order to make the systems work properly it is necessary to install only foam, etc.) must be kept out of the reach of children.
Farfisa equipment, keeping strictly to the items referred to in each
diagram. The manufacturer cannot be held responsible for possible damages
caused by improper, erroneous and unreasonable use.
Read all the notes carefully, (even the small ones) in each installation
scheme and the working instructions of the system given in the The cable runs of any intercom and video-intercom system must be
following pages. kept separate from the mains or any other electrical installation as
required by International Safety Standards.
For the sake of clarity, please notice that the sequence of the terminals
of each article has not been followed. Only the terminal code (letter and/
or number) is valid not the graphic sequence. WARNINGS
The items may have more terminals than the ones in the installation An all-pole mains switch with a contact separation of at least
diagrams. The excess terminals must not be used. 3mm in each pole shall be incorporated in the electrical installa-
tion of the building.
Before connecting the unit, make sure its data correspond to

those of the mains.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
For correct operation make sure that ventilation or heat dissipa-

tion openings are not obstructed.
Do not open or tamper with power supply or video intercom

apparatus when they are ON. There is high voltage inside.
Avoid bumping and hitting the video intercom apparatus, it

could break of the CRT with consequent projections of frag-
mented glass.
For installation or maintenance refer only to qualified person-

nel.
European Mark of conformity to the EEC Mark of VDE a German Testing and Certi-
Directives. fication Institute.
CE MARK
ERTIFIC
MC A
TE
Quality assured firm.
TI
S
ON
SY
The CE mark ensures that the product complies with the requirements of the
European Community Directives in force; in particular, Electrical Safety LVD73/23,
ISO
Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC89/336 and Telecommunication Terminals 00

SGS
9
1
R&TTE99/5 Directives.
As set forth by the Directives, the technical documentation and Conformity Decla-
rations are available in the Company’s offices for verifications and controls by
competent Authorities.
Italian Association of Electrotechnical and

Electronic Industries
TECHNICAL MANUAL
11 2012 edition
INDEX Page
General characteristics 2
Intercom/videointercom systems with reduced wires technology 3

- Internal stations 4
- External door stations 16
- Power supplies and service modules 47
- Installation instructions 51
- Installation diagrams 53
- intercoms 54
- intercommunicating intercoms 65
- videointercoms 68
- intercommunicating videointercoms 88
Traditional intercoms and videointercoms 93

- Internal stations 94
- External door stations 113
- Power supplies and service modules 141
- Installation instructions 146
- Installation diagrams 151
- intercoms 152
- intercommunicating intercoms 164
- videointercoms 185
- additional diagrams 219
Product List 230
1
(MT11 - Gb2012)
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
The Farfisa electronic call system with reduced • Intercom systems same apartment or between different apart-
wires technology allows for the realisation of It is the simplest of the installations. It provides ments with private conversation to other users
intercom, video intercom and intercommuni- bidirectional audio communication between or external stations.
cating systems. intercoms and external door stations with door- - Control switching ON. The user can enable
The modularity of Farfisa indoor and outdoor opening function. the system, switch ON his/her own video inter-
devices allows for system extension to satisfy com and monitor the area framed by the cam-
The following variants of the basic installation era. Additional wires and activation buttons
the most diverse user’s requirements, from
are possible: are needed in case of multiple entrances.
individual houses to apartment buildings, from
simple intercoms to complete videointercoms. - intercommunicating service. It allows for
communication between different intercoms • Mixed systems (intercoms/videointer-
Selecting the system of the same apartment or between different coms/intercommunicating systems)
The first choice to be made is the preferred apartments with private conversation to other All intercom and video intercom systems can
type of system. users and to external stations be combined according to the user’s require-
• Analog system with reduced number of - private conversation. By adding a board to ments.
conductors (1+1 intercoms: 1 common each intercom you can restrict the communi-
wire +1 wire for each user; 4+1 videointer- cation between internal and external user to Selecting the articles
coms: 4 common wires +1 wire for each the called user. The other users do not hear When choosing the article and type of installa-
user). the conversation in progress when they lift the tion, you should consider:
• traditional analog system (4+1 intercoms: handset. • user’s requirements
4 common wires +1 wire for each user; 7+1 • number of users
videointercoms: 7 common wires +1 wire • Videointercom systems • installation possibilities
for each user + coaxial cable). Apart from audio communication and door-
• possible location of articles
opening function, video intercom systems pro-
The Farfisa electronic call system allows for the vide visual control of the entrance. The following options are possible for external
realisation of different types of installation.
The typical characteristics of video intercom door stations and internal stations:
• Intercom systems with 1 or more main systems are: • External door stations:
entrances and with or without secondary - Timed operation. The video intercom of the - Agorà series
entrances called user is enabled for about 100 seconds. - Profilo series
• Videointercom systems with 1 or more Picking-up the handset the enabling time will - Matrix series (steel push-button panels)
main entrances and with or without second- be doubled; hanging up the handset the sys- - Mody series
ary entrances tem switches back to the stand-by mode. - UP series
• Intercommunicating systems Systems which are using the power supply-
• Internal stations:
• Mixed systems (intercoms/videointer- timer art.1181E and 1281E switch back to the
- Echos series
coms/intercommunicating systems) stand-by mode only when the enabling time
- Exhito series
expires.
- Compact series
- Private conversation. Video intercom sys-
- Studio series
tems allow for audio communication only for
- Project series
the called user. The other users do not hear
the conversation in progress when they lift the
handset. Table for the selection of house’s devices
- Intercommunicating service. This service and door stations according to the
allows for audio communication between dif- performances of the system (see paragraph
ferent intercoms or video intercoms of the “Selecting the system”)
Graphic symbols VIDEO-

INTERCOMS INTERCOMS
The following symbols are used in the installation diagrams:
Series 1+1 4+1 4+1 7+1
Speaker Electric door lock Internal stations

Echos *
Microphone Exhito
Coaxial cable
Compact
Studio
Button Optional wire (usually control switch- Project
ing ON, door release button or inter-
communicating calls) External door stations
Resistance
Dashed line (for schematic purposes Agorà
Lamp the first and last monitors are shown in Profilo
the multi-family systems. Required Matrix
additional monitors can be inserted in Mody *
Diode such dashed line to complete the in- UP **
stallation).
SR41 Electronic buzzer * For audio compatibility we do not suggest to
connect door stations MODY series with
xn
x2
Call wires (second and last) internal devices ECHOS series.
Additional speaker ** Series for up to 2 calls
2
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERCOMS AND VIDEOINTERCOMS SYSTEMS
REDUCED WIRES TECHNOLOGY
INDEX Page
Internal stations 4
- Echos series videointercoms 4
- Exhito series videointercoms 9
- Exhito series intercoms 11
- Compact series videointercoms 14
- Compact series intercoms 15
- Project series intercoms 15
External door stations 16

- Agorà series push-button panels 16
- Profilo series push-button panels 22
- Matrix series push-button panels 31
- Mody series push-button panels 38
Power supplies 47
Service modules 47
Installation instructions 50
Working instructions 52
Installation diagrams 53
3
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS ECHOS SERIES
VIDEOINTERCOMS How to select the function for buttons from 1 to 6

1+1 INTERCOMS
16
5
/8” Buttons from 1 to 6 can be used for several functions, that is:
- intercommunicating calls;
- control switching ON of the video intercom when more than one
external door station or extra surveillance cameras are present on
the system;
103 - free voltage contacts for supplementary functions.
4 1/16”
ATTENTION. The common contacts of the buttons are only two: one
*
for the buttons 1 and 2, the other for the buttons 3,4,5 and 6, so at
4+1
least only two of the three possible different operations described

before can be achieved at the same time. When the buttons are used
208 26 for intercommunicating calls or videointercom control switching ON
VIDEOINTERCOMS
8 3/16” 1” the terminals 1C and 2C must remain unconnected.
EH9161CT. Hands Free Colour Videointercom with audio-video

privacy, 3 types of calls, 5 differentiated programmable ring tones, Functions of buttons according to the position of jumpers J11 and
audio, contrast, and brightness adjustment. Metallized grey colour. J12
Complete with 10 keys for monitor control switching-on, door lock Push-buttons Jumpers Position Function
opening, intercom calls and supplementary services. It can be installed
on the wall by using the back box art.9083 or wall adaptor WA9100T. 1-2 intercommunicating calls
1, 2 J12 2-3 (*) control switching ON
EH9161CW. Hands-free videointercom with same features as free free contacts (common 1C)
above, in white colour finish. It can be installed on the wall by using the
back box art.9083 or wall adaptor WA9100W. 1-2 intercommunicating calls
3, 4, 5, 6 J11 2-3 (*) control switching ON
Technical characteristics free free contacts (common 2C)
Power supply: 18÷24Vdc
Operating current: 0.4A (*) Factory setting
Screen: 3.5" LCD
Television standard: PAL
Horizontal frequency: 15625Hz
Vertical frequency: 50Hz
1-2
Intercommunicating calls
Band width: >5MHz
Video signal: balanced
Starting up time: 1 second
Number of bell rings: 2 (programmable) 2-3
Operating temperature: 0°÷+50°C Control switching ON
Maximum admissible humidity: 90%RH
Terminals
X Balanced negative video signal input Free
Y Balanced positive video signal input Free contacts -
F Ground commons 1C and 2C
H Positive voltage input (18-24Vdc)
10 Call, audio reception/transmission, door releasing
4 Control switching ON (button )
9R Electronic call input from other intercommunicating devices Supplementary functions
A1 Electronic floor call input
L+ LED for open-door signalling or other functions Floor call
V+ Positive voltage input for intercommunicating devices (15÷18Vdc) For floor call feature make the connection as reported on page 87.
1C Common contact for buttons P1 and P2
P1 - P2 Service buttons (max 50mA) Door-open’s warning and other functions
E 2C Common contact for buttons P3, P4, P5 and P6
P3 ÷ P6 Service buttons (max 50mA)
For door-open’s warning or other similar functions connect a normally
closed contact (NC) of a sensor or a relay between the terminal L+ of the
C C Electronic call input for intercommunicating calls (common contact
for buttons P1÷P6 determined by the position of the jumpers J11
videointercom and terminal X of power supply 1181E .
and J12)
H Orange
O
L+ X
S F
EH9161 1181E
Closed contact the orange LED is ON.

Open contact the orange LED is OFF.
4
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
1+1 INTERCOMS
Flush mounted version
9083. Back-box for video intercoms 46

EH9161CT and EH9161CW. 1 /16”
13
92
3 5/8”
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
192
7 9/16”
4 - Plug-in back the terminal blocks on the video intercom paying
attention to their position and direction in order to avoid degradation
of the system.
4’ 11”
1 - Wall-up the back box art.9083 at an height of about 1.5 meters above
the floor.
5 - Remove the two frontal plastic frames to approach the two fixing
points of the video intercom.
2 - Unplug the terminal block from the video intercom.
E
C
H
3 - Make the connections as required by the elec- O
tric diagram to wire. If the system provides for
the use of the buttons from 1 to 6, move the
jumpers J11 and J12, located on the back of
S
the video intercom, according to the required 6 - Fix the video intercom to the back box using the two screws supplied
function (see table on page 4). with the product.
5
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
1+1 INTERCOMS
Table version
TA9160 . Table adapter for Echos videointercoms. Complete with

junction box and 2.4m connection cable with 20 wires.
WA9100T/W
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
7 - Re-insert the two frontal plastic frames to the video intercom.

TA9160
Surface mounted version
WA9100T. Wall adaptor for the EH9161CT videointercom.

WA9100W. Wall adaptor for the EH9161CW videointercom.
Junction box
X
Yellow Y
- Fix the wall adaptor

WA9100T or WA9100W
to the table adaptor using
the supplied nuts.
- Insert the cable in the
proper hole of the adaptor
F H Y X
and fix it.
- Make the connection on EH9161..
1 - Fix the adapter to the wall with 4 expansion plugs at approx. 1.5m the videointercoms
from the floor. terminal boards and write
down the correspondence between terminals and wire’s colour on the
label on the junction box.
- Fix the videointercom as shown in the figure 2 of this page.
Display adjustment
To optimize the angle of view of the display it can be adjusted up and
down for about 15°.
E
C
H
O
S
2 - Fix the video intercom to the wall adaptor using the two screws
supplied with the product.
6
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
1+1 INTERCOMS
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Characteristics
conversation with an external door station state it is necessary to install to the door a
1 Image brightness adjustment .
or another intercommunicating equipment; proper sensor whose contacts must be a
- the videointercom is in programming op- normally closed type (see page 4).
2 Loudspeaker. It allows to hear the conver- eration mode when it is continuously lit-up.
sation and to receive the calls from the 14 3.5" Colour LCD Display.
external door station, from other intercom- 9 Audio communication button . It al-
municating equipments or from local door lows to enable the audio communication
station. 15 Jumpers for programming buttons 1 to
with the door station or another intercom 6.
after receiving a call or a control switching
3 Call and communication volume adjust- ON operation ( ). The audio communi-
ment . 16 Microphone sensitivity adjustment
cation is end pressing again the button or if
MIC.SENS.
the communication time expires.
4 Microphone. It allows to talk with the door
station or with other intercommunicating 10 Buttons 3,4,5 and 6 are available for supple-
17 Colour adjustment .
equipments mentary services. After positioning prop-
erly the jumper J11 they can be used for: 18 Contrast adjustment .
5 Green LED. The LED shows: - intercommunicating calls;
- a communication in progress when it - control switching ON function for multiple Adjustment of the microphone ampli-
lights up continuously; entrance systems;
fier .
- an intercommunicating call when it flashes. - as free voltage contacts (max 50mA).
These four buttons, having a shared com-
mon contact (terminal 2C), can be only
6 Control switching ON button . It al-
used for one of the functions listed above at
lows to power ON the video intercom and time.
monitoring the entrance.
15 16 17 18 19
11 Lock release button . It allows to oper-
7 Mute button . It allows to:
ate the electric lock release either with the
- enable/disable the audio (microphone)
video intercom in ON or OFF state.
to the door station during a conversation;
- enable/disable the bell rings if pressed
for less then 2 seconds after receiving a
call or making a control switching ON func-
12 Buttons 1 and 2 are available for supple-
mentary services. After positioning prop-
E
tion;
- enter/exit the programming mode if
erly the jumper J12 they can be used for:
- intercommunicating calls; C
pressed for more than 2 seconds. - control switching ON function for multiple
entrance systems; H
- as free voltage contacts (max 50mA).
8 Red LED. The LED shows:
- temporary disabling of audio when it con-
O
tinuously lights-up. If audio is enabled again
the LED recover the previous operating
mode;
time. S
- bell rings disabling. The LED flashes
when a call is received and during the 13 Orange LED. The LED lights-up when at
the terminal L+ is connected a positive
voltage (8÷12Vdc). To signal an open-door
7
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
ADJUSTMENTS
1+1 INTERCOMS
-If required the communication the audio is OPERATIONS

intermittent or distorted it is advisable to
Brightness adjustment.
adjust the microphone sensitivity by acting Call from the door station
With the video intercom switched ON, press
on the trimmer MIC.SENS. located on the Making a call from the door station the video
left and right the button to adjust the back of the video intercom. intercom will ring (according to the
brightness of the image. To store the current -Attention. For a better setting of the audio programming) or the red LED starts flashing
setting press the button . The pressure of levels on the video intercom adjust the if the bell rings has been disabled; on the
this button switches OFF the video intercom. microphone sensitivity of the door station to display appears the image of the calling
the minimum value and the loudspeakers station. To start the communication press the
*
Colour and Contrast adjustment. volume to an intermediate value. button . If it is desired to disable the audio
The trimmers are located on the back of the -If there are intercommunicating devices
4+1
to the door station, but continuing hearing the

video intercom and can be operated by adjust also their audio levels.
audio from the door station press shortly the
means of a small screwdriver. To adjust the button ; in this status the red LED will light
trimmers is required:
VIDEOINTERCOMS
up continuously. To restore the audio to the

- dismount the video intercom from the wall to PROGRAMMING
door station press again the button ; the
accede to the adjustment points;
- power ON the video intercom; In programming mode it is possible to select red LED will recover the previous status. To
- insert the screwdriver in the hole marked the duration and the ringer tone among 5 end the communication and switch OFF the
with the symbol of the adjustment required; different possibilities. video intercom press the button . The
- rotate the screwdriver clock or anti-clock To enter the programming mode it is required: video intercom switches OFF automatically
wise to find the desired image quality; -to switch ON the video intercom pressing the when the communication time expires or if
- fix again the video intercom to the wall. button . from the door station a call to another user is
-to keep pressed for more than 2 seconds the made.
Enabling, disabling and volume of the buttons ; a beep will confirm the correct
ringing sound. operation and the red LED lights up. Control switching ON
When you receive a call from the door station The button and the buttons numbered
or from another intercommunicating Number of rings of the bell (external and from 1 to 6, if present and correctly
equipment it is possible to adjust the level of intercommunicating calls) programmed (see table on the page 4), allow
the ringing sound pressing left and right the After entering the programming mode it is to display the images (without audio) of the
button . To store the current setting press necessary: entrances presents in the system. To get also
the button . - to press the button to verify the number the audio it is sufficient to press the button
To disable the ringing sound it is necessary, of the rings currently programmed; . Press it again to switch OFF the video
during a receiving call, to press momentarily - to press left and right the button to intercom.
the button ; the red LED flashes during the respectively increase or decrease the Control switching ON is allowed only when the
call and the conversation. number of rings. After each pressure of the system is in stand-by mode (no running
The status (enabled or disabled) and the level button the selected number of rings will be communications); if, pressing the control
of the ringing sound are stored and they are heard; switching ON buttons, the video intercom
used for next calls. If the ringing sound is - please keep the button pushed for more doesn’t switch ON a communication between
disabled during a receiving call or during a than 2 seconds or wait for the end of the another user and the door station could be
communication the red LED will flash to programming time in order to make the active.
indicate this status, but no LED indication will changes confirmed and exit from the op-
be present in stand-by mode.After connecting eration. Door lock release
a positive 15÷18Vdc to the terminal V+ it will To operate the electric door lock release
be possible to have the LED indication of the Ringer tone selection (call from door station) press the button independently if the
disabled ringing sound also with the video Once entering into programming mode, it is video intercom is switched ON or OFF.
intercom in stand-by mode. necessary: If the system has more door stations the
- to push the button in order to check the electric door lock release of the door station
Setting of the audio volume from which the last call has been made or to
ringer tone now programmed;
- With the video intercom switched ON, press which a control switching ON has been
- to push laterally (left or right side) the directed will be activated.
the button to enable the communication.
button to select the previous or next ringer
E To set the receiving audio level (loudspeaker)
press left and right the button . To store
tone;
- after having selected the favorite ringer
C the selected level press the button
pressure of this button switches OFF the
. The tone, keep the button pushed for more
than 2 seconds or wait for the end of the
H video intercom.
- To set the amplifier’s level of the microphone
programming time to make the changes
confirmed and exit from the operation.
O it is necessary to adjust the trimmer on
the back of the videointercom.
S - In case of incorrect automatic switching of
the video intercom between talk and listening
function decrease the level of the preferred
function and increase the other one by
acting on the button or on the trimmer
of the videointercom.
8
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS EXHITO SERIES
VIDEOINTERCOMS WB3161. Wall bracket for EX3100C, EX3160 and EX3160C video
1+1 INTERCOMS
intercoms with terminal boards for connection to the system and an
electronic circuit to convert the video signal from coax cable to a
62 211 balanced twisted pair.
2 7/16" 8 5/16"
Terminals
X Balanced negative video signal input
Y Balanced positive video signal input
F Ground
H Positive voltage input (+18-24Vdc)
10 Call, audio reception/transmission, door releasing
218 4 Control switching ON (button )
*
8 9/16"
A1 Electronic call input from other intercommunicating devices
1C Common contact for P1, P2, P3 (P2-P3 only for EX3160, EX3160C)
4+1
P1 Service button (max 0.3A)
P2 ÷ P5 (*) Service buttons (max 0.3A)
2C (*) Common contact for buttons P4 and P5
VIDEOINTERCOMS
L1+ (*) Positive power supply input for red Led (+12Vdc)
L1- (*) Negative power supply input for red Led
L+ Not connected
(*) Not connected in EX3100C videointercom.
EX3160. White Flat videointercom with pri-
vate audio-video function, electronic micro- Wall version
phone, differentiated double electronic ringing
sounds (modulated and continuous) and termi-
nal board for the connection to the wall bracket.
Equipped with led's and 2 buttons for camera
control switch ON and door-open. Together
with the videointercom there are 5 extra buttons
which can be assembled in the proper slots
(see page 10).
The videointercom can be fixed to the wall
(flush-mounted) with the WB3161 bracket.
Technical data
Power supply 12÷15Vdc
Operating current 0.4A
Monitor 4" FLAT CRT
TV standard CCIR-625 lines
Line frequency 15625Hz
Frame frequency 50Hz
Bandwidth >5MHz
Video signal on 75Ω 0.8÷1.5Vpp - This area has to be free; remove possible present cables.
Switching ON time 2 seconds
Operating temperature 0°÷+50°C
Maximum permissible humidity 90%RH Fix the wall bracket by using 3 expansion plugs.
Don't shut the 3 screws of fixing if the wall is irregular.
EX3160C. Version of EX3160 videointercom It is suggested to use a wall box to contain the extra wires.
with colour LCD.
EX3100C. It is dif-
ferent from the model
EX3160C because
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
of the lack of LED’s
and for the reduced
number of buttons
(only 3 for electrical
lock release, monitor-
ing and supplemen-
tary functions).
E
Technical data X
Power supply
12÷15Vdc
H
Screen
TV standard
4" LCD
PAL
Plugging in of videoin-
I
Frame frequency
Bandwidth
50Hz
>5MHz
tercom connectors to
the terminal boards of T
Video signal on 75Ω 0.8÷1.5Vpp wall bracket.
Switching ON time
Operating temperature
1 second
0°÷+50°C
Installation of videointer- O
com onto the wall bracket.
Maximum permissible humidity 90%RH
9
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
1+1 INTERCOMS
Table version
TA3160. Table adaptor with weighted base, junction box and 2.4m connection cable
with 20 wires.
Installation of video-
intercom onto the
*
wall bracket.
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Assembling of extra buttons to the

videointercom EX3160 and EX3160C
Taking out of button caps
Junction box
Y
Remove the cover to the junction box and
Y
connect wires to the terminals matching the Yellow X
colour of wire with that of the label. Write in
the proper space the code of the connec-
4
tion. 10
Y
X
F
H
A1
P1
1C
WB3161
Mounting of the additional buttons
Choosing the private conversation or intercommunicating service
1-2 = Video intercom with-

out audio privacy
E
2-3 = Video intercom with
X audio privacy
H
I
T
O
10
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERCOMS
Wall version
1+1 INTERCOMS
62 65
2 7/16" 2 9/16"
172.5
*
218 6 13 /16"
9
8 /16"
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
EX311. White electronic intercom with two
push-buttons, spiral cord, electronic micro-
phone and possibility to insert an additional
EX301 push-button and a SR41 or SM50 mod-
ule. Wall-mountable with expansion plugs or
wall box.
Terminals
172.5
1 audio line, bell and door release control
6 13 /16"
3 ground
6 output electronic bell *
7 ground. Connected to terminal 3 with
jumper W1 *
A1 floor call or intercommunicating call input
P service push-button
C common contact for P push-button
* terminals to be used when installing the pri-

vate conversation module SM50 in the inter-
com.
Accessories
EX301. Single button module for Exhito

intercoms. Maximum contact current is 0.1A.
For higher currents use a relay. EX301
Note. For easier reference the 2 terminals of
the module are defined as C and P, but they
have no polarity and can be inverted.
EX304. Additional loudspeaker module

(*). SR41 or
RL36 or E
RL 36. Relay module (*). SM50 or
EX304 X
SM50. Private conversation module (*).
H
SR41. Electronic buzzer module (*).
(*) for the connections and the characteristics

P C
33
I
7 1
of the modules refer to page 13. 6 A
1
T
O
11
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERCOMS
1+1 INTERCOMS
172,5
6 13/16"
83.5
3 1/4 "
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Table version
TA320. Table adaptor with weighted base, junction box and 2.4m
connection cable with 20 wires.
EX321. White colour intercom for 1+1 inter-

com systems and intercommunicating systems
connected to 1 or more external door stations.
Complete with spiral cord, electronic micro-
phone and 2 buttons extendable to 8 by adding
the EX301 single button module.
Possibility of inserting modules EX304, EX332,
SR41, RL36 and SM50.
Wall-mountable with expansion plugs or wall
box or on the desk using the table adaptor
TA320.
Terminals
Junction box
3 ground
6 output electronic bell * 1
7 ground. Connected to terminal 3 with
jumper W1 * 1
A1 floor call or intercommunicating call input Yellow 3
P service push-button
C common contact for P push-button Remove the cover of the junction
box and connect wires to the termi-
* terminals to be used when installing the nals matching the colour of wire with
P C 3 3 7 1 6 A1
private conversation module SM50 in the inter- that of the label. Write in the proper
com. space the code of the connection.
EX321
Wall version
Accessories
EX301. Single button module for Exhito in-

tercoms. Maximum contact current is 0.1A. For
higher currents use a relay.
E Note. For easier reference the 2 terminals of the
module are defined as C and P, but they have no
X polarity and can be inverted.
H
I
T
O
12
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
EX304. Additional loudspeaker. It allows RL 36. Relay module. When installed inside SR41. Electronic buzzer module. In the
1+1 INTERCOMS
to receive calls with off-hook handset, or in intercoms it allows to activate additional bells. intercoms can be added for having a further call
systems with 2 calls, with 1 single call and 1 call Maximum switching current is 1A (24V). signal.
in common to other intercoms.
To install the module the last module holder on Terminals Terminals
the intercom base must be removed (see draw- C common terminal of relay 4 power supply input
ing). The article NA normally open contact of relay (13Vac-70mA; 9÷20Vdc-15mA)
takes the space NC normally closed contact of relay 3 ground
of 2 modules and - ground
therefore re- 13Vac/dc voltage input
EC relay activation input (ground command)
duces the num-
*
ber of additional Wires
buttons to 4.
4+1
9 electronic call in-
NA NC
put without resis- 9
tive load
VIDEOINTERCOMS
3 ground
EC
EX332. Module with 3 LED. C SM50. Private conversation module.
To have complete audio privacy between us-
ers it is necessary to add to each intercom the
private conversation module.
The intercom can communicate with the out-
side (for an unlimited period) only after having
received the call. The intercom becomes
disactived when there is a call from another
intercom or the door release push-button is
pressed.
Terminals
C audio line receiver
B audio line transmitter
- ground
Note
B and C terminals are unused in an 1+1 intercom
system.
L1, L2, L3 EX311 + SM50

CT
EX321 + SM50
terminals input + / - : max 13Vac / 24Vdc C 1 1
Additional bell connection B 6 6
If the ringing volume is not sufficient or if you 2
ST703 . Ringing volume adjustment R1 3 3
need to chime the call in a different place, you 7
W1
switch. can add an additional bell enabled by a relay.
9 C A1 Notes
6 In each intercom EX311 or EX321 it is neces-
P
sary:
1
- to cut the jumper (W1) that links the termi-
3
nals 3 and 7;
7 - to make the connection between terminal 7 of
P = audio and call conduc-
tor the intercom and the - (minus) of the private
= ground conductor EX321 conversation module.
In all SM50 private conversation modules cut
Note
Do not use this connection
the resistance R1. E
in intercoms where is
already installed the module intercom
X
SM50. terminals
13÷48Vac/dc
H
I
OFF MED. MAX.
T
3 levels to adjust ring-
ing volume (off, me-
O
dium and maximum)
13
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS COMPACT SERIES
VIDEOINTERCOMS
1+1 INTERCOMS
Installation
88 201
3 /16"
7
7 /16"
15
229
9"
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Fix the wall bracket by using 4 expansion plugs
140 ÷ 150 cm
4 7" 4 11"
aaaaaaaaaaaaa
KM8111W. White flat video intercom with
two buttons, one for control switch ON and one
for door lock release, audio-video privacy, elec-
tronic microphone, electronic modulated call
note, terminal board for the connection to the Plugging in of videointer-
wall-bracket. It can be installed on the wall (with com connectors to the ter-
no built-in) by using the art.WB8111. minal boards of wall
bracket.
KM8111CW. Version with colour LCD.
WB8111. Wall-bracket for the KM8111W

and KM8111CW video intercoms. It includes a Installation of videointer-
terminal board for connection to the system. com onto the wall
bracket.
Technical data
Power Supply 18÷24Vdc
Video tube (KM8111W) 4" FLAT CRT
Screen (KM8111CW) 4" LCD
Television standard (KM8111W) CCIR-625 lines
Television standard (KM8111CW) PAL
Horizontal frequency 15625Hz
Vertical frequency 50Hz
Bandwidth >5MHz
Video signal balanced
Starting up time (KM8111W) 2÷4 seconds
Starting up time (KM8111CW) 1 second Dismounting of videointer-
Operating temperature 0°÷+50°C com from the wall bracket.
Max. permissible humidity 90%RH
C Terminals
H Positive power supply input 18÷24Vdc-0.5A Choosing the private conversation
O F Ground
X and Y Video signal input
A
M 10 Call, audio reception/transmission, door re-
leasing X
1 2 3 J1
4 Control switch ON - button Y
P A1 Floor call input

PC - P Service push-buttons (max 0.3A)
A1
F
F
3
2
1 J1
B
1-2 = Videointercom with-
out audio privacy
A H
10
4
1 2 3 J1
P 2-3 = Videointercom with

C PC
audio privacy
T
14
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS COMPACT SERIES PROJECT SERIES
INTERCOMS INTERCOMS
1+1 INTERCOMS
65 86 72 77.5
2 9 /16" 3 3 /8 " 2 13/16" 3 1 /16"
214
211
*
8 1 /16"
8 5 /16"
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
PT511EW. White electronic intercom with 1
push-button, spiral cord, electronic microphone
and possibility to insert SR41 or SM50 module
KM811W. White electronic intercom with 1 (description and characteristics of the mod-
push-button, spiral cord, electronic microphone ules on page 13). Wall-mountable with expan-
and possibility to insert an additional ST701 sion plugs or wall box.
push-button and a SR41 or SM50 module
(description and characteristics of the mod- Terminals
ules on page 13). Wall-mountable with expan- 1 audio line, bell and door release control
sion plugs or wall box. 3 ground
7 ground. Connected to terminal 3 with jumper
Terminals
W1 *
A1 floor call input
3 ground
* terminals to be used when installing the private
7 ground. Connected to terminal 3 with jumper
conversation module SM50 in the intercom.
W1 *
A1 floor call input
* terminals to be used when installing the private

conversation module SM50 in the intercom.
Mounting of the additional button ST701.
182
ST 7 3 /16"
70
1
83
3 1 /4"
K
M
-
P
T
15
(MT11 - Gb2012)
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS AGORA' SERIES
External door station
1+1 INTERCOMS
Surface mounting Door Stations

1
30
/316 " with reduced width and thickness. AG20. Blank module
997 / 8"
3
Installation is easy and quick
because no recessed box is AGL20. Light grey version.
required. Front plate is in extruded
anodized aluminium. Name plates
are backlighted with blue LED’s
for a better reading even in dark
places. Reduced dimensions and AG21. Single button module with name plate
*
surface mounting features make holder.

208
the product particularly suitable
4+1
8 3/16" for the installations on the entry AGL21. Light grey version.
gate’s post.
VIDEOINTERCOMS
AG222. Double button unit with name plate

holder.
AGL222. Light grey version.

AG100A. Audio Door Station composed of an
ABS box for surface mounting, front plate in alu-
minium and electronic board with diodes and LED’s
for lighting the nameplates. Suitable for the AG30ED
door speaker and maximum 4 AG21 single push-
buttons or 4 AG222 double push-buttons. AG30ED. Audio Door Speaker to fit inside
the Door Stations AG100A and AGL100A.
AGL100A. Light grey version.
Terminals
x1 A Alternated power supply input for audio and
x4 name-plate Led (13Vac-0.1A)
x1 - Ground
1 Reception-transmission / door releasing / call
S Electric lock
AG100V. Video Door Station composed of an

ABS box for surface mounting, front plate in alu-
minium and electronic board with diodes and LED’s
for lighting the nameplates. Suitable for AG40CED
colour camera with door speaker and maximum 2
AG21 single push-button or 2 AG222 double push-
AG40CED. Colour camera with integrated door speaker to fit
buttons. inside the Door Stations AG100V and AGL100V.
AGL100V. Light grey version. Technical data

x1 Video power supply 18÷24VDC-0.21A
x2 Audio power supply 13VAC-0,15A
x1 Video signal output balanced
Video signal standard PAL
Minimum lighting 2.5 Lux
LED's 4 white
Sensor CCD 1/3"
AG100T. Push-buttons Door Station com- Number of pixel 291,000
posed of an ABS box for surface mounting, front Lens 3.6mm
A plate in aluminium and electronic board with diodes
and LED’s for lighting the nameplates. Suitable for
Focusing 0.6m ÷ ∞
Horizontal/vertical sweep ±10°
8 AG21 single push-button or 8 AG222 double Operating temperature -10° ÷ +40°C
G Push-buttons. Maximum permitted humidity 80% RH
AGL100T. Light grey version. Terminals

O H Positive voltage input for camera (18÷24Vdc)
x2 F Ground
R x8 X Balanced negative video signal output
Y Balanced positive video signal output
A Alternated power supply input for audio and name-plate Led (13Vac)
À - Ground
1 Reception-transmission / door releasing / call
S Electric lock
16
(MT11 - Gb2012)
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS
Installation and Assembly of AGORA’ door stations.
1+1 INTERCOMS
AG100V AG100A
1 2a 2b
AGL100V AGL100A
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
AG30...
AG40...
3a AG100V 3b AG100A 3c AG100T

AGL100V AGL100A AGL100T
max.8
max.4
max.2
A
G
O
R
À
17
(MT11 - Gb2012)
1+1 INTERCOMS
4a
4b
The wires of connection

*
cable must be connected

to the calling terminal (not
4+1
to the common terminal).

VIDEOINTERCOMS
Cut and keep insulated not

used wire.
5a 5b
"E" terminal.
Cut the red wire to get "E"
terminal only if required by
the installation diagram.
Adjustments AG30ED and AG40CED

Adjustments are carried out in the factory; should any be
Transmitter adjustable
necessary they can be re-adjusted from the outside with a volume (microphone)
screwdriver with the trimmers identified by the symbols
" " and . Receiver adjustable
±10° volume (loudspeaker)
Adjustment of volume
Rotate trimmer to change the volume of the receiv- Anti-feedback (Larsen
effect) adjustment
ing channel (loudspeaker).
Rotate trimmer to change the amplification of
transmitting channel (microphone).
A 1 S AG30ED
A Anti-feedback adjustment
- Make a call from the door station and pick up the handset
of one of the videointercoms.
G - Remove the microphone from its housing inside the
Anti-feedback (Larsen
effect) adjustment
push-button panel, place it on the loudspeaker of the
O electric door answering system and adjust the
trimmer until the feedback stops (Larsen effect). Transmitter adjustable
volume (microphone)
- Replace the microphone in its housing.
R Sweeps ±10°
If necessary, you can manually change the camera framing Receiver adjustable
À by adjusting the horizontal and vertical levers in the de-

sired direction (see figure).
volume (loudspeaker)
AG40CED
HF XYA 1 S
18
(MT11 - Gb2012)
ASSEMBLY MODULE SEQUENCE 7a 8a
1+1 INTERCOMS
AG100V AG100V
AGL100V AGL100V
AG100A AG100A
AGL100A AGL100A
AG20
*
AG21
AG222
Insert the Push-buttons or blank modules starting
4+1
from the top of the frontal plate
VIDEOINTERCOMS
AG21
AG222
AG100T
AG100T AG100T AGL100T
AGL100T AG20 AGL100T
AG21
7b AG222 9b
8b
11 12
10
A
G
O
R
À
19
(MT11 - Gb2012)
1+1 INTERCOMS
ASSEMBLING DOOR STATIONS SIDE BY SIDE

AG100V AG100T
AGL100V AGL100T
AG100A
AGL100A
*
Remove the side plastic caps

4+1
(only from the interested side)

to insert the spacers.
VIDEOINTERCOMS
AG100V
AG100T AGL100V
AGL100T AG100A
AGL100A
AG100T
AGL100T
A
G
O AG100V
AGL100V
R AG100A
AGL100A
20
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Composition of door stations and requested quantities of modules
1+1 INTERCOMS
1 ROW VIDEOINTERCOM push-button panels 2 ROW VIDEOINTERCOM push-button panels
N. buttons AG100V AG40CED AG100T AG20 AG21 N. buttons AG100V AG40CED AG100T AG20 AG222
1 1 1 - 1 1 2 1 1 - 1 1
2 1 1 - - 2 4 1 1 - - 2
3 1 1 1 7 3 6 1 1 1 7 3
4 1 1 1 6 4 8 1 1 1 6 4
5 1 1 1 5 5 10 1 1 1 5 5
6 1 1 1 4 6 12 1 1 1 4 6
7 1 1 1 3 7 14 1 1 1 3 7
8 1 1 1 2 8 16 1 1 1 2 8
*
9 1 1 1 1 9 18 1 1 1 1 9
10 1 1 1 - 10 20 1 1 1 - 10
4+1
11 1 1 2 7 11 22 1 1 2 7 11
12 1 1 2 6 12 24 1 1 2 6 12
13 1 1 2 5 13 26 1 1 2 5 13
VIDEOINTERCOMS
14 1 1 2 4 14 28 1 1 2 4 14
15 1 1 2 3 15 30 1 1 2 3 15
16 1 1 2 2 16 32 1 1 2 2 16
17 1 1 2 1 17 34 1 1 2 1 17
18 1 1 2 - 18 36 1 1 2 - 18
19 1 1 3 7 19 38 1 1 3 7 19
20 1 1 3 6 20 40 1 1 3 6 20
21 1 1 3 5 21 42 1 1 3 5 21
22 1 1 3 4 22 44 1 1 3 4 22
23 1 1 3 3 23 46 1 1 3 3 23
24 1 1 3 2 24 48 1 1 3 2 24
25 1 1 3 1 25 50 1 1 3 1 25
26 1 1 3 - 26 52 1 1 3 - 26
27 1 1 4 7 27 54 1 1 4 7 27
28 1 1 4 6 28 56 1 1 4 6 28
29 1 1 4 5 29 58 1 1 4 5 29
30 1 1 4 4 30 60 1 1 4 4 30
31 1 1 4 3 31 62 1 1 4 3 31
32 1 1 4 2 32 64 1 1 4 2 32
33 1 1 4 1 33 66 1 1 4 1 33
34 1 1 4 - 34 68 1 1 4 - 34
1 ROW INTERCOM push-button panels 2 ROW INTERCOM push-button panels

N. buttons AG100A AG30ED AG100T AG20 AG21 N. buttons AG100A AG30ED AG100T AG20 AG222
1 1 1 - 3 1 2 1 1 - 3 1
2 1 1 - 2 2 4 1 1 - 2 2
3 1 1 - 1 3 6 1 1 - 1 3
4 1 1 - - 4 8 1 1 - - 4
5 1 1 1 7 5 10 1 1 1 7 5
6 1 1 1 6 6 12 1 1 1 6 6
7 1 1 1 5 7 14 1 1 1 5 7
8 1 1 1 4 8 16 1 1 1 4 8
9 1 1 1 3 9 18 1 1 1 3 9
10 1 1 1 2 10 20 1 1 1 2 10
11 1 1 1 1 11 22 1 1 1 1 11
12 1 1 1 - 12 24 1 1 1 - 12
13 1 1 2 7 13 26 1 1 2 7 13
14 1 1 2 6 14 28 1 1 2 6 14
15 1 1 2 5 15 30 1 1 2 5 15
16 1 1 2 4 16 32 1 1 2 4 16
17 1 1 2 3 17 34 1 1 2 3 17
18 1 1 2 2 18 36 1 1 2 2 18
19 1 1 2 1 19 38 1 1 2 1 19
20 1 1 2 - 20 40 1 1 2 - 20
21
22
1
1
1
1
3
3
7
6
21
22
42
44
1
1
1
1
3
3
7
6
21
22 A
23 1 1 3 5 23 46 1 1 3 5 23
24
25
1
1
1
1
3
3
4
3
24
25
48
50
1
1
1
1
3
3
4
3
24
25 G
26 1 1 3 2 26 52 1 1 3 2 26
27
28
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
-
27
28
54
56
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
-
27
28 O
29 1 1 4 7 29 58 1 1 4 7 29
30
31
32
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
6
5
4
30
31
32
60
62
64
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
6
5
4
30
31
32
R
33 1 1 4 3 33 66 1 1 4 3 33
34
35
1
1
1
1
4
4
2
1
34
35
68
70
1
1
1
1
4
4
2
1
34
35
À
36 1 1 4 - 36 72 1 1 4 - 36
21
(MT11 - Gb2012)
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS PROFILO SERIES
Push-button panels in extruded aluminium and Module frames complete with back box
1+1 INTERCOMS
steel push-buttons made up of modular ele-

ments. Suitable for the most diverse installa-
tion requirements. The careful selection of
modules allows for multiple application oppor-
tunities; from one-way installations to blocks of
flats; from intercom to video intercom installa-
tions.
The optimized size of modules allows for easy
installation on the gage jamb.
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
PL 71 PL 72 PL 73
Hood covers
PL 81 PL 82 PL 83 PL 84 PL 86 PL 89
Rain shelters with module frames
P
R
O
F
I PL 91 PL 92 PL 93 PL 94 PL 96 PL 99
L
O
22
(MT11 - Gb2012)
PROFILO push-button panel
1+1 INTERCOMS
Modules with integrated door speaker Video modules with integrated door speaker
PL10PED PL11PED PL12PED PL40PED PL41PED PL42PED
*
without call buttons with 1 call button with 2 call buttons without call buttons and with 1 call button and B\W with 2 call buttons and
4+1
with B\W camera camera B\W camera
PL40PCED PL41PCED PL42PCED
VIDEOINTERCOMS
colour version colour version colour version
PL 50 PL 20 For specifications see page 24.

number module blank module
Push-button modules
PL 21 PL 22 PL 23 PL 24 PL226 PL228
with 1 call button with 2 call buttons with 3 call buttons with 4 call buttons with 6 call but- with 8 call but-
tons (2 row) tons (2 row)
Access control modules Technical characteristics and terminal boards of the button modules
PL21 PL22 PL23 PL24 PL226 PL228 PL50
A A A A A A A AC power supply input for nameplate
(25mA) (50mA) (0.1A) Led (13Vac)
- - - - - - - Ground
FC 52PL FP 52PL C C C C C/C2 C/C2 Call push-buttons common
Keypad module Proximity reader for P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 Call push-button
for access control access control (see P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 Call push-button
(see characteris- characteristics on
P3 P3 P3 P3 Call push-button
tics on page 25). page 25).
P4 P4 Call push-button
P5÷P7 P5÷P7 Call push-buttons (C2 common)
P8 Call push-button (C2 common)
Technical characteristics and terminal boards of the audio-video modules

PL10PED PL11PED PL12PED PL40PED PL41PED PL42PED
PL40PCED PL41PCED PL42PCED
1 1 1 1 1 1 Reception-transmission; electric lock release; call
E E E E E E Reception-transmission; electric lock release
S S S S S S Electric lock
P
A
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
DC power supply input for door speaker and name-plate Led (13Vac-70mA)
Ground
R
C
P1
C
P1
C
P1
C
P1
Call push-buttons common
Call push-button
O
P2 P2 Call push-button F
X X X Negative video signal output
Y Y Y Positive video signal output I
H H H Positive voltage input for camera (18÷24Vdc)
F F F Video ground L
L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ DC power supply input for service Led (12Vdc)
O
23
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Video modules with integrated door speaker Testing and adjustments

1+1 INTERCOMS
Adjustments are carried out in the factory; should

any be necessary they can be readjusted from
the outside with a screwdriver with the trimmers
identified by the symbols " " and .
Volumes adjustment
To adjust the volume of microphone and loud-
speaker, turn the trimmers and .
*
Antilocale adjustment
PL40PED. Modules complete with: 241DMA. Module with diodes for 4 users. In case of "feedback" (Larsen effect) in the
4+1
- CCD color camera with autoiris and fixed It allows for the use of the button modules PL21, external unit it is necessary to operate as fol-
3.6mm lens. PL22, PL23, PL24, PL226 and PL228 in the 1+1 low:
- amplified speaker unit with volume intercom systems and 4+1 video intercom sys- - make the call from the door station and lift the
VIDEOINTERCOMS
adjustment of 2 channels (reception and tems. It is fixed on the back of the button modules handset of an intercom or videointercom
transmission) using the 2 supplied screws. Connect the conduc- (press for Echos series);
- aluminium front plate with transparent tors of the diode module to the corresponding
- adjust the trimmer until the whistling stops
screen terminal on button module; if modules with a re-
(Larsen effect).
- horizontal and vertical adjustments duced number of Push-buttons are used (PL21,
- red operation LED PL22, PL23, PL226) do not connect and insulate
the excess of wires.
PL40PCED. Receiver Transmitter
Colour version of the PL40PED model. adjustable volume adjustable volume
PL41PED. Cut a portion of the metal terminals to connect the

conductors to the terminal board of push buttons
Same as PL40PED, with 1 call button and PL40P...
modules.
name plate panel with transparent screen
and green LED backlighting.
S L+ Y X F H
Anti-feedback
PL41PCED. (Larsen effect)
Colour version of the PL41PED model. adjustment
PL42PED.
Same as PL40PED, with 2 call buttons
and name plate panel with transparent
screen and green LED backlighting.
PL42PCED. Receiver Transmitter

Colour version of the PL42PED model. adjustable volume adjustable volume
PL21 PL23 PL226 PL10P...

PL22 PL24 PL228
S L+
Anti-feedback
(Larsen effect)
adjustment
Technical data PL40PED-PL41PED- PL40PCED-PL41PCED-

PL42PED PL42PCED
Camera power supply 18÷24Vdc-0.3A 18÷24Vdc-0.4A Adjustments

Audio power supply 13Vac-0.07A 13Vac-0.07A You can manually change the camera framing
Video signal output balanced balanced by unloosening and adjusting the horizontal
Video signal standard CCIR PAL and vertical screws in the desired direction.
Minimum illumination 2 Lux 2.5 Lux
P White balanced
Led's
-
6 infrared
auto
6 white ±15°
R Sensor
Number of pixels
CCD 1/4" B/W
291,000
CCD 1/3" colour
291,000
O Horizontal frequency
Vertical frequency
15,625Hz
50Hz
15,625Hz
50Hz
Lens 3.6mm 3.6mm
F Focus
Autoiris
0.1m ÷ ∞
electronic
0.6m ÷ ∞
electronic
I Horizontal adjustment
Vertical adjustment
± 15°
± 15°
± 15°
± 15°
L Operating temperature
Maximum permissible humidity
-10°÷+40°C
80%RH
-10°÷+40°C
80%RH
O
24
(MT11 - Gb2012)
PROXIMITY READER FOR ACCESS ACCESS CONTROL KEYPAD INSTALLATION
1+1 INTERCOMS
CONTROL
PL42PED PL12PED
*
4+1
FP52PL. FC 52PL.
This article allows for the activation of 2 relays Access control keypad with 12 digits and 2
relays for lock release. 4 programmable ac-
VIDEOINTERCOMS
by means of keytags or electronic ISO cards
based on transponder technology. cess codes for each relay. Programmable door
Programmable activation time from 1 to 63 opening time from 1 up 99 sec. for each relay
seconds for every relay. 4 user cards and 1 (or bistable operation of relay 1). Acoustic and 5 5"
master card supplied with the product. Acoustic visual confirmation for entered keys, accepted
and visual control signals and 3-digit display to programming and for wrong codes.
view numbers and codes during set-up and PL24 PL24
operation. Technical data
Power supply: 12Vac/dc ±10%
Technical data Stand-by current: 0.06A
Power supply 12Vac/dc ±10% Maximum current consumption: 0.15A
Stand-by current 0.1A Contact ratings: 12Vac-2A
Maximum current consumption 0.25A Numbers of codes for relays 1: 12 or direct
Contact ratings 24Vac - 2A activation
Max. number of cards 490 Numbers of codes for relays 2: 12 or direct
Max. number of Master cards 10 activation
Number of relays 2 Activation time for each relay: from 1 to 99 sec.
Relay time 1 to 63 sec. (or bistable relay 1)
Minimum recognition distance 3 cm Operating temperature: 0° ÷ +40°C Place the push-button panel back box at a
Maximum recognition time 1 sec. Maximum permissible humidity: 85% RH height of about 1.65m (5' 5") from the floor
Operating temperature 0° ÷ +40°C keeping the front edges flush-mounted and ver-
Maximum permitted humidity 85% RH Terminals tical to the finished plaster.
NC2 normally closed contact of relay 2 Position the camera in such a way that
Terminals NA2 normally open contact of relay 2 sunlight or other direct or reflected light
+/A positive or alternate current input C2 common contact of relay 2 sources with high intensity do not hit the
-/A ground or alternate current input NC1 normally closed contact of relay 1 camera lens.
PB door open button NA1 normally open contact of relay 1
NC2 normally closed contact of relay 2 C1 common contact of relay 1
NA2 normally open contact of relay 2 ground or alternate voltage input
C2 common terminal of relay 2 positive or alternate voltage input Assembling modules side by side
NC1 normally closed contact of relay 1 P2 activation of the relay 2; if momentarily
NA1 normally open contact of relay 1 connected to ground it allows the acti-
C1 common terminal of relay 1 vation for the programmed time
P1 activation of the relay 1; if momentarily
connected to ground it allows the acti-
vation for the programmed time
Card recognition LED. It turns ON dur-

ing card recognition. P
Relay activation LED. It indicates relay
deactivation (red) or activation (green).
R
Program LED. It turns ON during system
programming.
O
Card cancellation and system setup F
LED. It turns ON during Master or user
card cancellation and system setup. I
Insertion of spacers between back boxes. L
Spacers and cable bushing (not supplied with
the products) must be inserted before brick O
work.
25
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Rain shelter
1+1 INTERCOMS
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Openings for cables.
Fix lower part of the

frame to the back box
and make the electri-
cal connections.
frame to the rain shelter
and make the electrical
connections.
Flush mounting and cables plac-

ing.
Fixing of module frames to the upper side by
Fixing of module frames to the upper side by the the 2 small screws included in the rain shelter.
2 small screws included in the back boxes.
P
R
O
F
I Mounting of
Fixing of frame to back box.
Align the frame before tighten-
Fixing of frame to rain shelter.
Align the frame before tighten-
L module. ing the screws. ing the screws.
O
26
(MT11 - Gb2012)
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS 1 row push button
1 ROW PUSH BUTTON PANELS Examples of compositions in intercom systems
1+1 INTERCOMS
1 call button
*
2 call 4 call 6 call 8 call 10 call 11 call buttons 14 call buttons 17 call buttons 20 call buttons
buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
22 call buttons 25 call buttons 28 call buttons 30 call buttons 31 call buttons
Composition board of Profilo push-button panels.

N° Dimensions Door speaker Button, blank or informa- 4 diode Back box and Rain
calls module (ampl.) tion modules module module frame shelters
1 100x142x19 1 PL11PED - - - 1 PL71 (**) 1 PL91
(3 15/16" x 5 9/16" x 3/4")
2 1 PL12PED - - - 1 PL71 (**) 1 PL91
4 100x253,5x19 1 PL10PED 1 PL24 - 1 241DMA 1 PL72 (**) 1 PL92
(3 15/16" x 10" x 3/4")
6 1 PL12PED 1 PL24 - 1 241DMA 1 PL72 (**) 1 PL92
8 100x365x19
1 PL10PED 2 PL24 - 2 241DMA 1 PL73 (**) 1 PL93
10 (3 15/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL12PED 2 PL24 - 2 241DMA 1 PL73 (**) 1 PL93
11 200x253,5x19 1 PL11PED 2 PL24 1 PL22 3 241DMA 2 PL72 (**) 1 PL94
(7 7/8" x 10" x 3/4")
14 1 PL12PED 3 PL24 - 3 241DMA 2 PL72 (**) 1 PL94
17 1 PL11PED 4 PL24 1 PL20 (*) 4 241DMA 2 PL73 (**) 1 PL96
200x365x19
20 (7 /8" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
7 1 PL12PED 4 PL24 1 PL22 5 241DMA 2 PL73 (**) 1 PL96
22 1 PL12PED 5 PL24 - 5 241DMA 2 PL73 (**) 1 PL96
25
28
400x253,5x19
1 PL11PED 6 PL24 1 PL20 (*) 6 241DMA 4 PL72 -
P
(15 3/4" x 10" x 3/4") 1 PL10PED 7 PL24 - 7 241DMA 4 PL72 -
30 1 PL12PED 7 PL24 - 7 241DMA 4 PL72 - R
34
300x365x19
(11 13/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL12PED 8 PL24 - 8 241DMA 3 PL73 (**) 1 PL99
O
38 1 PL12PED 9 PL24 2 PL20 (*) 9 241DMA 4 PL73 -
F
40 400x365x19 1 PL10PED 10 PL24 1 PL20 (*) 10 241DMA 4 PL73 -
42
(15 3/4" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL12PED 10 PL24 1 PL20 (*) 10 241DMA 4 PL73 - I
46 1 PL12PED 11 PL24 -
(*) or PL50
11 241DMA 4 PL73 -
It replaces
L
(**) If requested the hood covers can be added (see
on page 22) PL71, PL72 or PL73
O
27
(MT11 - Gb2012)

1+1 INTERCOMS
*
6 call 8 call 14 call 16 call 20 call buttons 24 call buttons 32 call buttons 36 call buttons 40 call buttons
buttons buttons buttons buttons
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

N° Dimensions Door speaker Button, blank or information 4 diode Back box and Rain
calls module (ampl.) modules module module frame shelters
(3 15/16" x 10" x 3/4")
8 1 PL10PED 1 PL228 - 2 241DMA 1 PL72 (**) 1 PL92
14 100x365x19 1 PL10PED 1 PL228 1 PL226 4 241DMA 1 PL73 (**) 1 PL93
(3 15/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
16 1 PL10PED 2 PL228 - 4 241DMA 1 PL73 (**) 1 PL93
(7 7/8" x 10" x 3/4")
24 1 PL10PED 3 PL228 - 6 241DMA 2 PL72 (**) 1 PL94
200x365x19
36 (7 7/8" x 14 3/8" x 3/4") 1 PL10PED 3 PL228 2 PL226 10 241DMA 2 PL73 (**) 1 PL96
40 1 PL10PED 5 PL228 - 10 241DMA 2 PL73 (**) 1 PL96
48 1 PL10PED 6 PL228 1 PL20 (*) 12 241DMA 4 PL72 -
400x253,5x19
52 (15 3/4" x 10" x 3/4") 1 PL10PED 5 PL228 2 PL226 14 241DMA 4 PL72 -
P 56
60
1 PL10PED
1 PL10PED
7 PL228
6 PL228
-
2 PL226
14 241DMA
16 241DMA
4 PL72
3 PL73 (**)
-
1 PL99
R 62
300x365x19
(11 13/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4") 1 PL10PED 7 PL228 1 PL226 16 241DMA 3 PL73 (**) 1 PL99
64 1 PL10PED 8 PL228 - 16 241DMA 3 PL73 (**) 1 PL99
O 72 1 PL10PED 9 PL228 2 PL20 (*) 18 241DMA 4 PL73 -
F 78
80 400x365x19
1 PL10PED 9 PL228 1 PL226 1 PL20 (*) 20 241DMA 4 PL73 -
1 PL10PED 10 PL228 1 PL20 (*) 20 241DMA 4 PL73 -
I 82
(15 3/4" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL10PED 8 PL228 3 PL226 22 241DMA 4 PL73 -
88 1 PL10PED 22 241DMA 4 PL73 -
L (**) If requested the hood covers can be added (see on
11 PL228 -
(*) or PL50 It replaces
O page 22) PL72 or PL73
28
(MT11 - Gb2012)
1 ROW PUSH BUTTON PANELS Examples of compositions in videointercom systems
1+1 INTERCOMS
1 call button
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

N° Dimensions Camera and door Button, blank or informa- 4 diode Back box and Rain
calls speaker module tion modules module module frame shelters
1 100x142x19
1 PL41PED - - - 1 PL71 (**) 1 PL91
2 (3 15/16" x 5 9/16" x 3/4") 1 PL42PED - - - 1 PL71 (**) 1 PL91
4 100x253,5x19
1 PL40PED 1 PL24 - 1 241DMA 1 PL72 (**) 1 PL92
6 (3 15/16" x 10" x 3/4") 1 PL42PED 1 PL24 - 1 241DMA 1 PL72 (**) 1 PL92
8 1 PL40PED 2 PL24 - 2 241DMA 1 PL73 (**) 1 PL93
100x365x19
10 (3 15/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4") 1 PL42PED 2 PL24 - 2 241DMA 1 PL73 (**) 1 PL93
11 200x253,5x19
1 PL41PED 2 PL24 1 PL22 3 241DMA 2 PL72 (**) 1 PL94
14 (7 7/8" x 10" x 3/4") 1 PL42PED 3 PL24 - 3 241DMA 2 PL72 (**) 1 PL94
200x365x19
20 (7 7/8" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
22 1 PL42PED 5 PL24 - 5 241DMA 2 PL73 (**) 1 PL96
25
28
400x253,5x19
(15 3/4" x 10" x 3/4")
1 PL41PED
1 PL40PED
6 PL24
7 PL24
1 PL20 (*)
-
6 241DMA
7 241DMA
4 PL72
4 PL72
-
-
P
30 1 PL42PED 7 PL24 - 7 241DMA 4 PL72 - R
34
300x365x19
(11 13/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL42PED 8 PL24 - 8 241DMA 3 PL73 (**) 1 PL99 O
38
40 400x365x19
1 PL42PED
1 PL40PED
9 PL24
10 PL24
2 PL20 (*)
1 PL20 (*)
9 241DMA
10 241DMA
4 PL73
4 PL73
-
-
F
42
(15 3/4" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL42PED 10 PL24 1 PL20 (*) 10 241DMA 4 PL73 - I
46 1 PL42PED 11 PL24 - 11 241DMA 4 PL73 -
(**) If requested the hood covers can or PL40PCED, (*) or PL50 It replaces
L
be added (see on page 22) PL41PCED, PL71, PL72 or PL73
PL42PCED O
29
(MT11 - Gb2012)

1+1 INTERCOMS
*
6 call 8 call 14 call 16 call 20 call buttons 24 call buttons 32 call buttons 36 call buttons 40 call buttons
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

N° Dimensions Camera and door Button, blank or information 4 diode Back box and Rain
calls speaker module modules module module frame shelters
(3 15/16" x 10" x 3/4")
8 1 PL40PED 1 PL228 - 2 241DMA 1 PL72 (**) 1 PL92
14 100x365x19
16 (3 15/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4") 1 PL40PED 2 PL228 - 4 241DMA 1 PL73 (**) 1 PL93
(7 7/8" x 10" x 3/4")
24 1 PL40PED 3 PL228 - 6 241DMA 2 PL72 (**) 1 PL94
200x365x19
36 (7 7/8" x 14 3/8" x 3/4") 1 PL40PED 3 PL228 2 PL226 10 241DMA 2 PL73 (**) 1 PL96
40 1 PL40PED 5 PL228 - 10 241DMA 2 PL73 (**) 1 PL96
48 1 PL40PED 6 PL228 1 PL20 (*) 12 241DMA 4 PL72 -
400x253,5x19
52 (15 3/4" x 10" x 3/4") 1 PL40PED 5 PL228 2 PL226 14 241DMA 4 PL72 -
P 56
60
1 PL40PED
1 PL40PED
7 PL228
6 PL228
-
2 PL226
14 241DMA
16 241DMA
4 PL72
3 PL73 (**)
-
1 PL99
R 62
300x365x19
(11 13/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4") 1 PL40PED 7 PL228 1 PL226 16 241DMA 3 PL73 (**) 1 PL99
64 1 PL40PED 8 PL228 - 16 241DMA 3 PL73 (**) 1 PL99
O 72 1 PL40PED 9 PL228 2 PL20 (*) 18 241DMA 4 PL73 -
F 78
80
400x365x19
1 PL40PED
1 PL40PED
9 PL228 1 PL226 1 PL20(*) 20 241DMA
10 PL228 1 PL20 (*) 20 241DMA
4 PL73
4 PL73
-
-
(15 /4" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
3
I 82 1 PL40PED 8 PL228 3 PL226 22 241DMA 4 PL73 -

88 1 PL40PED 11 PL228 - 22 241DMA 4 PL73 -
L (*) or PL50 It replaces
O (**) If requested the hood covers can be added (see on page 22)
PL72 or PL73
30
(MT11 - Gb2012)
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS MATRIX SERIES
1+1 INTERCOMS
Stainless steel (AISI 316L) anti-vandalism push- Module frames complete with back box
button panels especially studied to withstand
burglary, penetration of solids and water jets (IP
45 protection degree against the penetration of
external solids and water; IK09 against shocks).
The Matrix push-button panels include back boxes,
module frames, die-cast aluminium decorative
frames, button modules, and modules with built-in
speaker unit (with or without camera).
*
The careful selection of modules allows for multiple
application opportunities; from one-way
4+1
installations to blocks of flats; from intercom to
video intercom installations.
The push-button elements have been developed
VIDEOINTERCOMS
to allow both for horizontal and vertical
configuration.
MA 71 MA 72 MA 73
Notice! To maintain the brilliance of
door station plates, periodic cleaning Front frames
with specific products for stainless steel
is required.
MA 61 MA 62 MA 63
MAS 61 MAS 62 MAS 63
Rain shelters with module frames
M
A
T
R
I
X
MA 91 MA 92 MA 93
31
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Testing and adjustments
AMPLIFIED DOOR STATIONS CAMERAS Adjustments are carried out in the factory;
1+1 INTERCOMS
should any be necessary they can be re-ad-

justed from the outside with a screwdriver with
the trimmers identified by the symbols " "
and .
Volume adjustment
To increase the volume from the amplifier in
the transmission mode, turn the trimmer “ "
in a clockwise direction.
MAS43ED.
*
B/W camera module for 4+1 video systems Antilocale adjustment

4+1
without coaxial cable, including: In case of "feedback" (Larsen effect) in the

- solid-state CCD camera, with auto iris, 3.6mm external unit it is necessary to operate as
MAS10PED . Audio module without fixed optics and 6 infrared LED’s; follow:
VIDEOINTERCOMS
push-buttons. Complete with amplified door - stainless steel front plate complete with trans- - make the call from the door station and lift the
speaker in two channels and control of volume parent anti-temper screen, steel call button handset of an intercom or videointercom
of "receiver", stainless steel front plate and red with corresponding name plate holder; (press for Echos series);
operation LED. - horizontal/vertical adjustment; - adjust the trimmer until the whistling
- red operation LED; stops (Larsen effect).
MAS11PED. They are different from the - amplified door speaker.
Feedback Receiver adjustable
previous model for the presence of a calling adjustment volume
push-button and nameplate, realized with van- MAS43CED.
dal proof polycarbonate and backlighted with Colour version of the MAS43ED model.
green LED’s.
Terminals
A Supply 13VAC-70mA
MAS12PED. Module with 2 call buttons. - Ground P1 P2 C E L+ A 1 S
1 Reception-transmission; electric lock re-
Terminals lease; call
A Supply 13VAC-70mA S Electric lock
- Ground E Reception-transmission; electric lock release
1 Reception-transmission; electric lock release; P Call push-button
call C Call push-button common
S Electric lock L+ DC power supply input for service Led MAS10PED MAS11PED MAS12PED
E Reception-transmission; electric lock release Y Positive video signal output
P1-P2 Call push-buttons F Ground
C Call push-buttons common X Negative video signal output
Receiver adjustable Feedback
L+ DC power supply input for service Led H Positive power supply input 21Vdc volume adjustment
L+ E 1 S A F HY X PC
P1 P2 C E L+ A 1 S L+ E 1 S A F HY X PC
MAS43ED MAS43CED
Adjustments
Technical data MAS43ED MAS43CED You can manually change the camera framing
by unloosening and adjusting the horizontal
Power supply 18÷24Vdc 18÷24Vdc and vertical screws in the desired direction.
Operating current 0.3A 0.4A
Video signal output balanced balanced
M Video signal standard CCIR PAL (±15°)
A White balanced
Sensor
-
CCD 1/4" B/W
auto
CCD 1/3" colour
T Number of pixels
Horizontal frequency
291,000
15,625Hz
291,000
15,625Hz
Vertical frequency 50Hz 50Hz
R Lens 3.6mm 3.6mm
Focus 0,1m ÷ ∞ 0,6m ÷ ∞
I Autoiris
Horizontal adjustment
electronic
± 15°
electronic
± 15°
X Vertical adjustment
± 15°
-10°÷+40°C
± 15°
-10°÷+40°C
Maximum permissible humidity 80%RH 80%RH MAS43ED
MAS43CED
32
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Push-button modules ACCESS CONTROL KEYPAD
1+1 INTERCOMS
FC52MAS. Electronic keypad with 12 keys
and 2 relays for lock release and access control
of door stations. 12 programmable access codes
for each relay. Programmable door opening time
from 1 up 99 sec. for each relay (or bistable
operation of relay). Acoustic and visual confirma-
tion for entered keys, accepted programming
and for wrong codes.
*
MAS20. Blank module in stainless steel. Technical data
4+1
MAS22. Module with 2 call buttons and name plate panel with Stand-by current: 0.02A
breakproof transparent screen and green LED backlight. Max. current consumption: 0.1A
Contact ratings: 12Vac - 2A
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Numbers of codes for relay 1: 12 + direct activation
MAS24. With 4 call buttons. Numbers of codes for relay 2: 12 + direct activation
Activation time for each relay: from 1 to 99 seconds (or bistable)
Operating temperature: 0° ÷ +40°C
Maximum permissible humidity: 85% RH
Degree of protection IP 45
241DMA. Module with diodes for 4 users. Terminals
It allows for the use of the button modules MAS22 and MAS24 in the 1+1 normally closed contact of relay 2
intercom systems and 4+1 video intercom systems. It is fixed on the 2 normally open contact of relay 2
back of the button modules using the 2 supplied screws. Connect the common contact of relay 2
conductors of the diode module to the corresponding terminal on normally closed contact of relay 1
MAS24 module; if MAS22 module is used do not connect P3 and P4 1 normally open contact of relay 1
conductors and properly insulate them. common contact of relay 1
ground or alternating voltage input
positive or alternating voltage input
P2 activation of the relay 2; if momentarily connected to ground it allows the
activation for the programmed time
RL2 RL1
P2 P1
Max 2A Max 2A
load load
For direct activation

of RL1 and RL2
Power Power
supply supply
Technical characteristics of MATRIX modules terminal boards
MAS10PED MAS11PED MAS12PED MAS22 MAS24 MAS43ED

MAS43CED
1 1 1 1 Reception-transmission; electric lock release; call

E E E E Reception-transmission; electric lock release
S S S S Electric lock
A
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
A
-
Alternated power supply input for door speaker and name-plate Led (13Vac-70mA)
Ground
M
C
P1
C
P1
C
P1
C
P1
C
P
Call push-button
A
P2 P2 P2 Call push-button
Call push-button
T
P3
P4 Call push-button R
X Negative video signal output
Y Positive video signal output I
H Positive voltage input for camera (18÷24Vdc)
F Video ground X
L+ L+ L+ L+ DC power supply input for service Led (12Vdc)
33
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INSTALLATION
1+1 INTERCOMS
Assembling modules side by side
Flush mounting and cables plac-

ing.
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Insertion of spacers between back

boxes. Spacers and cable bushing
Place the push-button panel back box at a (not supplied with the products) must
height of about 1.65m (5' 5") from the floor be inserted before brick work.
keeping the front edges flush-mounted and
vertical to the finished plaster.
Position the camera in such a way that
sunlight or other direct or reflected light
sources with high intensity do not hit
the camera lens.
Mounting modules.
M
A
T Openings for cables.
For easier connection to the electrical system, it is
recommended to insert the metal plate supplied
R with the product in the back box opening, as
shown in the figure. The plate is used to hook the
I frame with pre-assembled modules.
Leave the plate in the box to reuse it for
maintenance operations.
X
34
(MT11 - Gb2012)
1+1 INTERCOMS
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Fixing of frame to module frame.
Connection of wires to module terminal boxes.
Rain shelters
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Fixing of frame to back
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
box.
Align the frame before
tightening the screws. aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
M
A
Align the frame before tightening
T
* Long screws can be used to anchor
the screws.
R
the frame during wire connection tp
modules. I
Apply the protection gaskets supplied with the product
on the internal part of the frame openings.
X
35
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Examples of compositions in intercom systems
1+1 INTERCOMS
1 call button 3 call buttons 7 call buttons

*
2 call buttons 4 call buttons 6 call buttons 6 call buttons 8 call buttons 9 call buttons 10 call buttons 10 call buttons
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
12 call buttons 14 call buttons 16 call buttons 19 call buttons 22 call buttons 30 call buttons
31 call buttons 34 call buttons 40 call buttons 46 call buttons
Composition board of Matrix push-button panels.

N° Module with 4 diode Button and blank modules Front Back box and Rain
Dimensions
calls door speaker module frames module frame shelters (*)
1 140x140x19 1 MAS11PED - - - 1 MAS61 1 MA71 1 MA91
(5 1/2" x 5 1/2" x 3/4")
2 1 MAS12PED - - - 1 MAS61 1 MA71 1 MA91
3 1 MAS11PED 1 241DMA 1 MAS22 - 1 MAS62 1 MA72 1 MA92
140x256x19
4 (5 /2" x 10 1/16" x 3/4")
140x374x19
9 (5 /2" x 14 3/4" x 3/4")
1
1 MAS11PED 2 241DMA 2 MAS24 - 1 MAS63 1 MA73 1 MA93
12 280x256x19 1 MAS12PED 3 241DMA 2 MAS24 1 MAS22 2 MAS62 2 MA72 -
(11" x 10 1/16" x 3/4")
14 1 MAS12PED 3 241DMA 3 MAS24 - 2 MAS62 2 MA72 -
280x374x19
19 1 MAS11PED 5 241DMA 4 MAS24 1 MAS22 2 MAS63 2 MA73 -
M 22
(11" x 14 3/4" x 3/4")
1 MAS12PED 5 241DMA 5 MAS24 - 2 MAS63 2 MA73 -
A 27
30
560x256x19
(22 1/16" x 10 1/16" x 3/4")
1 MAS11PED
1 MAS12PED
7 241DMA
7 241DMA
6 MAS24
7 MAS24
1 MAS22
-
4 MAS62
4 MAS62
4 MA72
4 MA72
-
-
T 31 420x374x19
(16 9/16" x 14 3/4"x 3/4")
1 MAS11PED 8 241DMA 7 MAS24 1 MAS22 3 MAS63 3 MA73 -
R 38 1 MAS12PED 9 241DMA 9 MAS24 2 MAS20 4 MAS63 4 MA73 -
I 40
43
560x374x19
(22 1/16" x 14 3/4" x 3/4")
1 MAS10PED
1 MAS11PED
10 241DMA
11 241DMA
10 MAS24
10 MAS24
1 MAS20
1 MAS22
4 MAS63
4 MAS63
4 MA73
4 MA73
-
-
X 46 1 MAS12PED 11 241DMA 11 MAS24 - 4 MAS63 4 MA73 -
(*) Rain shelters are used in replacementof back boxes
36
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Examples of compositions in video intercom systems
1+1 INTERCOMS
3 call buttons 7 call buttons
*
1 call button 3 call buttons 5 call buttons 5 call buttons 7 call buttons 9 call buttons 9 call buttons
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

N° Dimensions Camera 4 diode Front Back box and Rain
Button and blank modules
calls module module frames module frame shelters (*)
1 140x140x19 1 MAS43ED - - - - 1 MAS61 1 MA71 1 MA91
(5 1/2" x 5 1/2" x 3/4")
3 140x256x19
1 MAS43ED 1 241DMA 1 MAS22 - - 1 MAS62 1 MA72 1 MA92
5 (5 1/2" x 10 1/16" x 3/4") 1 MAS43ED 1 241DMA 1 MAS24 - - 1 MAS62 1 MA72 1 MA92
7 140x374x19
1 MAS43ED 2 241DMA 1 MAS24 1 MAS22 - 1 MAS63 1 MA73 1 MA93
9 (5 1/2" x 14 3/4" x 3/4") 1 MAS43ED 2 241DMA 2 MAS24 - - 1 MAS63 1 MA73 1 MA93
11 280x256x19 1 MAS43ED 3 241DMA 2 MAS24 1 MAS22 - 2 MAS62 2 MA72 -
(11" x 10 1/16" x 3/4")
13 1 MAS43ED 3 241DMA 3 MAS24 - - 2 MAS62 2 MA72 -
15 1 MAS43ED 4 241DMA 3 MAS24 1 MAS22 1 MAS20 2 MAS63 2 MA73 -
17 280x374x19 1 MAS43ED 4 241DMA 4 MAS24 - 1 MAS20 2 MAS63 2 MA73 -
(11" x 14 3/4" x 3/4")
19 1 MAS43ED 5 241DMA 4 MAS24 1 MAS22 - 2 MAS63 2 MA73 -
21 1 MAS43ED 5 241DMA 5 MAS24 - - 2 MAS63 2 MA73 -
23 1 MAS43ED 6 241DMA 5 MAS24 1 MAS22 1 MAS20 4 MAS62 4 MA72 -
27
560x256x19
(22 /16" x 10 1/16" x 3/4")
1 1 MAS43ED 7 241DMA 6 MAS24 1 MAS22 - 4 MAS62 4 MA72 -
M
29
31
1 MAS43ED
1 MAS43ED
7 241DMA
8 241DMA
7 MAS24
7 MAS24
-
1 MAS22
-
-
4 MAS62
3 MAS63
4 MA72
3 MA73
-
-
A
420x374x19
33 (16 9/16" x 14 3/4"x 3/4")
1 MAS43ED 8 241DMA 8 MAS24 - - 3 MAS63 3 MA73 - T
37 1 MAS43ED 9 241DMA 9 MAS24 - 2 MAS20 4 MAS63 4 MA73 -
39 1 MAS43ED 10 241DMA 9 MAS24 1 MAS22 1 MAS20 4 MAS63 4 MA73 - R
560x374x19
41
43
(22 1/16" x 14 3/4" x 3/4") 1 MAS43ED
1 MAS43ED
10 241DMA
11 241DMA
10 MAS24
10 MAS24
-
1 MAS22
1 MAS20
-
4 MAS63
4 MAS63
4 MA73
4 MA73
-
I
45 1 MAS43ED 11 241DMA 11 MAS24 - - 4 MAS63 4 MA73 X
or MAS43CED (*) Rain shelters are used in replacementof back boxes
37
(MT11 - Gb2012)
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS MODY SERIES
1+1 INTERCOMS
Module frames complete with back box

124 64 Push-button panels in extruded aluminium made up
4 7 / 8" 2 / 2"
1
of modular elements. Suitable for the most diverse
installation requirements.
395
15 / 16 "
9
MD71. 72. 73. 74. Plastic back boxes complete
with module frames.
304.5
12 " MD81.82.83.804.84.86.808.89.812. Alu-
minium hood covers. To be added to MD71.72.73.74
back boxes.
*
213
8 3 / 8"
4+1
MD91.92.93.904.94.96.908.99.912. Anod-
ized aluminium rain shelters with module frames.
121.5 Used for wall mounting.
4 13 / 16"
VIDEOINTERCOMS
19
MD 71 MD 72 MD 73 3
/4"
MD 74
Hood covers 151 276

5 15 /16" 10 7 / 8"
414.5 16 5 /16"
323 12 11 /16"
231.5 9 1 / 8"
140
5 1 / 2"
MD 81 MD 82 MD 83 MD 804 MD 84 MD 86 MD 808
Rain shelter with module frames 401 40

15 13 /16" 1 9 /16"
151
5 15 /16"
414.5 16 5 /16"
414.5 16 /16"
5
323
12 11 /16"
323 12 /16"
11
231.5 9 1 / 8"
140
5 1 / 2"
25
MD 89 MD 812 1"
MD 91 MD 92 MD 93 MD 904
276 401 80
10 7 / 8" 15 13 /16" 3 1 / 8"
M 414.5 16 5 / 16"
O 323 12 11 / 16"
D
231.5
Y 9 /8 "
1
65
2 9 /16"
MD 94 MD 96 MD 908 MD 99 MD 912
38
(MT11 - Gb2012)
1 row push-button modules
1+1 INTERCOMS
CAMERA
124 52
Modules for electric door speaker (amplifier) 4 7 /8" 2 1 /16"
90
3 9 /16"
MD10ED MD11ED MD12ED
*
without call buttons 1 call button 2 call buttons 19
3
/4"
4+1
Button modules MD 41D.
B/W camera module for 4+1 video systems
VIDEOINTERCOMS
without coaxial cable, including:
- solid-state CCD camera, with auto iris, 3.6mm
fixed optics and 6 infrared LED’s;
- front plate in anodized aluminium with break-
proof transparent screen;
MD 21 MD 22 MD 23 MD 24 - horizontal/vertical sweep.
1 call button 2 call buttons 3 call buttons 4 call buttons
Technical data
Power supply 21±3Vdc
2 row push-button modules Operating current 0.3A
Output of balanced video signal
Minimum illumination 2 lux
Sensor CCD 1/4 B/W
Pixel number 291000
Horizontal frequency 15625Hz
Vertical frequency 50Hz
Lens 3.6mm; F5
MD 222 MD 224 MD 226 MD 228 Adjustable focus 0,1m ÷ ∞
2 call buttons 4 call buttons 6 call buttons 8 call buttons Auto-iris electronic
Horizontal adjustment 15°
Vertical adjustment 15°
Operating temperature -10°÷+40°C
Modules: blank, number, access control and cameras Maximum permissible humidity 80%RH
50
Y
MD20 MD50 F
X
blank module number module H
Terminals
1 2 3 Y positive video signal output
4 5 6
F ground
7 8 9
X negative video signal output
A 0 B
H positive power supply input 21Vdc
FC52P . Keypad FP52 . Proximity MD41D . Black and

module for access reader for access con- white camera.
control (same fea- trol (same features of
tures of the model
FC52PL - see page
25).
the model FP52PL -
see page 25). M
O
D
Y
39
(MT11 - Gb2012)
1+1 INTERCOMS
AMPLIFIED DOOR STATIONS
124 52
4 7 /8" 2 1 /16" Dismounting and protection of name la-
bels
90
3 9 /16"
*
19
3
4+1
/4"
MD10ED. Module without call buttons, with Terminals

front plate in anodized aluminium, amplified A Supply 13VAC-70mA
VIDEOINTERCOMS
door speaker in two channels and control of - Ground

volume of "receiver". 1 Reception-transmission; electric lock
release; call
MD11ED. Module with 1 call button. S Electric lock
MD12ED. Module with 2 call buttons.. E Reception-transmission; electric lock release
P Call button Dismounting of name holder to insert name
label.
Testing and adjustments
Adjustments are carried out in the factory; should 241D. Module with diodes for 2 users.
any be necessary they can be readjusted from It allows for the use of the button modules
the outside with a screwdriver with the trimmers MD21, MD22, MD23, MD24, MD222, MD224,
identified by the words “antilocale” and “vol- MD226, MD228 in the 1+1 intercom systems
ume”( ). and 4+1 video intercom systems.
It is applied inside the button modules.
Volume adjustment
To increase the volume from the amplifier in the
transmission mode, turn the trimmer “ ” in a
clockwise direction. In any button module, in order to avoid the
dismounting of name holder, insert a 3MAx12
Antilocale adjustment screw in the holes shown in the picture for each
In case of "feedback" (Larsen effect) in the name plate to be blocked. Screws are not sup-
external unit it is necessary to operate as fol- plied by the manufacturer.
low: PEP
- make the call from the door station and lift the
handset of an intercom;
- adjust the trimmer “antilocale” until the whis-
tling stops (Larsen effect).
Adjustments
If necessary, you can manually modify the cam-
era position by means of the horizontal and
4.75.C091.01
1 2 vertical adjustments located on the back of the

camera.
PEP
To do this, you must:
- remove the upper screw of the push-button
4 3
PEP panel to access the back of the camera;
- loosen the screw of the horizontal or vertical
adjustment (or both screws, if you want to
PEP adjust the image in all the directions);
A 1S 4 - move the camera in the desired direction;
7 ANTILOCALE
- tighten the screw to block the camera in the
desired position;
PEP
- fix the push-button panel.
M 6 5 Horizontal (± 15°)
O 1
2
Lamp terminals
Button terminal board Vertical (± 15°)
3 Call buttons common (terminal C)
D 4
5
Stair light button terminals
External volume adjustment
Y 6
7
Feedback adjustment
Terminal board for audio/powering/electric lock
40
(MT11 - Gb2012)
1+1 INTERCOMS
*
4+1
5' 5"
VIDEOINTERCOMS
aaaaaaaaaa Openings for cables.
Place the push-button panel back box at a

height of about 1.65m from the floor keeping
the front edges flush-mounted and vertical to
the finished plaster.
sunlight or other direct or reflected light Mounting of button module.
sources with high intensity do not hit the
camera lens.
Assembling modules side by side
Flush mounting and cables placing.
M
O
(a)
D
Insertion of cable bush between back boxes.
The cable bushes must be inserted before
brickwork.
Lower fixing of the module frame on back box.
It is advised to insert a protection (a) between
Y
Lower fixing of the module frame. panel and wall while fixing.
41
(MT11 - Gb2012)
1+1 INTERCOMS
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Alignment of the panel.
Hood covers
Mounting of frame bottom and door speaker

(amplifier).
Modules insertion and wall fixing of rain shelter.
Fixing of the hood cover between the back box

and the module frame.
Rain shelter
M
O
D
Y
Top fixing of the panel. Dismounting of the frame top side from the rain Mounting of the frame top to the rain shelter.
shelter.
42
(MT11 - Gb2012)
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS 1 row push-button
Composition board of INTERCOM push-button panels.
1+1 INTERCOMS
N° Dimensions Module with 2 diode Button and info or Back box and Hood Rain
calls (mm / inches) door speaker module blank modules module frame covers shelters
1 124x121.5x19 1 MD11ED - - - - 1 MD71 1 MD81 1 MD91
(47/8"x 413/16"x 3/4")
2 1 MD12ED - - - - 1 MD71 1 MD81 1 MD91
4 124x213x19 1 MD10ED 2 241D 1 MD24 - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
(47/8"x 83/8"x 3/4")
6 1 MD12ED 2 241D 1 MD24 - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
7 124x304.5x19 1 MD10ED 4 241D 1 MD24 1 MD23 - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
(4 7/8" x 12" x 3/4")
10 1 MD12ED 4 241D 2 MD24 - - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
*
12 248x213x19 1 MD10ED 6 241D 3 MD24 - - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
4+1
(9 3/4" x 8 3/8" x 3/4")
14 1 MD12ED 6 241D 3 MD24 - - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
16 1 MD10ED 8 241D 4 MD24 - 1 * 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
248x304.5x19
VIDEOINTERCOMS
19 1 MD11ED 9 241D 4 MD24 1 MD22 - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
(9 3/4" x 12" x 3/4")
22 1 MD12ED 10 241D 5 MD24 - - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
24 1 MD10ED 12 241D 6 MD24 - 1 * 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
248x395x19
27 (9 3/4" x 15 9/16" x 3/4") 1 MD11ED 13 241D 6 MD24 1 MD22 - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
30 1 MD12ED 14 241D 7 MD24 - - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
32 372x304.5x19
1 MD12ED 15 241D 7 MD24 1 MD22 - 3 MD73 1 MD89 1 MD99
34 (14 5/8" x 12" x 3/4") 1 MD12ED 16 241D 8 MD24 - - 3 MD73 1 MD89 1 MD99
37 1 MD11ED 18 241D 9 MD24 - 2 * 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912
40 372x395x19 1 MD12ED 19 241D 9 MD24 1 MD22 1 * 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912
(14 5/8" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
42 1 MD12ED 20 241D 10 MD24 - 1 * 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912
46 1 MD12ED 22 241D 11 MD24 - - 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912
48 1 MD10ED 24 241D 12 MD24 - 3 * 4 MD74 - -
52 496x395x19 1 MD10ED 26 241D 13 MD24 - 2 * 4 MD74 - -
(19 1/2" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
57 1 MD11ED 28 241D 14 MD24 - 1 * 4 MD74 - -
62 1 MD12ED 30 241D 15 MD24 - - 4 MD74 - -
or MD74 or MD804 or MD904 * MD20 or MD50 or FC52P Optional It replaces-
MD71, 72, 73, 74
Example of Intercom push-button panel installations.
1 call button
2 call 4 call 6 call 7 call 10 call 14 call 12 call 14 call 16 call 19 call
buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons
M
O
D
Y
43
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Composition board of VIDEOINTERCOM push-button panels.

1+1 INTERCOMS
N° Dimensions Camera Module with 2 diode Button and info or Back box and Hood Rain
calls (mm / inches) module door speaker module blank modules module frame covers shelters
1 124x213x19 1 MD41D 1 MD11ED - - - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
2 (47/8"x 83/8"x 3/4") 1 MD41D 1 MD12ED - - - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
4 124x304.5x19 1 MD41D 1 MD10ED 2 241D 1 MD24 - - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
(4 7/8" x 12" x 3/4")
6 1 MD41D 1 MD12ED 2 241D 1 MD24 - - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
7 248x213x19 1 MD41D 1 MD10ED 4 241D 1 MD24 1 MD23 - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
(9 3/4" x 8 3/8" x 3/4")
*
12 1 MD41D 1 MD10ED 6 241D 3 MD24 - 1 * 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96

4+1
248x304.5x19
15 (9 3/4" x 12" x 3/4")
1 MD41D 1 MD11ED 7 241D 3 MD24 1 MD22 - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
VIDEOINTERCOMS

25 (9 3/4" x 15 9/16" x 3/4") 1 MD41D 1 MD11ED 12 241D 6 MD24 - - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
(14 5/8" x 12" x 3/4")
36 1 MD41D 1 MD12ED 17 241D 8 MD24 1 MD22 1 * 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912
372x395x19
38 (14 /8" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
5 1 MD41D 1 MD12ED 18 241D 8 MD24 2 MD22 - 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912
45 1 MD41D 1 MD11ED 22 241D 10 MD24 2 MD22 2 * 4 MD74 - -
50 496x395x19 1 MD41D 1 MD12ED 24 241D 11 MD24 2 MD22 1 * 4 MD74 - -
(19 1/2" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
54 1 MD41D 1 MD12ED 26 241D 13 MD24 - 1 * 4 MD74 - -
58 1 MD41D 1 MD12ED 28 241D 14 MD24 - - 4 MD74 - -
or MD74 or MD804 or MD904 * MD20 or MD50 or FC52P Optional It replaces
MD72, 73, 74
Example of Videointercom push-button panel installations.
1 call button 2 call 4 call 6 call 10 call buttons 7 call 10 call 12 call buttons 15 call buttons
M 18 call buttons 20 call buttons 23 call buttons 26 call buttons 28 call buttons 30 call buttons
O
D
Y
44
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Composition board of INTERCOM push-button panels.
1+1 INTERCOMS
N° Dimensions Module with 2 diode Button and info or Back box and Hood Rain
calls (mm / inches) door speaker module blank modules module frame covers shelters
124x213x19
8 1 MD10ED 4 241D 1 MD228 - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
(47/8"x 83/8"x 3/4")
14 (4 7/8" x 12" x 3/4") 1 MD10ED 7 241D 1 MD228 1 MD226 - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
16 1 MD10ED 8 241D 2 MD228 - - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
18 124x395x19 1 MD10ED 9 241D 2 MD228 1 MD222 - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
*
(4 7/8" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
248x213x19
4+1
24 (9 3/4" x 8 3/8" x 3/4") 1 MD10ED 12 241D 3 MD228 - - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
26 1 MD10ED 13 241D 3 MD228 1 MD222 1 * 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
VIDEOINTERCOMS
32 248x304.5x19 1 MD10ED 16 241D 4 MD228 - 1 * 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
(9 3/4" x 12" x 3/4")
40 1 MD10ED 20 241D 5 MD228 - - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
248x395x19
50 (9 3/4" x 15 9/16" x 3/4") 1 MD10ED 25 241D 6 MD228 1 MD222 - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
56 1 MD10ED 28 241D 7 MD228 - - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
(14 5/8" x 12" x 3/4")
64 1 MD10ED 32 241D 8 MD228 - - 3 MD73 1 MD89 1 MD99
76 372x395x19 1 MD10ED 38 241D 9 MD228 1 MD224 1 * 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912
(14 5/8" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
88 1 MD10ED 44 241D 11 MD228 - - 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912
MD71, 72, 73, 74
Example of Intercom push-button panel installations.
8 call 10 call 12 call 14 call 16 call 18 call 20 call 24 call 24 call buttons 28 call buttons
buttons buttons buttons button buttons buttons buttons buttons
30 call buttons 34 call buttons 40 call buttons 46 call buttons 50 call buttons 56 call buttons 60 call buttons
M
O
D
Y
45
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Composition board of VIDEOINTERCOM push-button panels.

1+1 INTERCOMS
N° Dimensions Camera Module with 2 diode Button and info or Back box and Hood Rain
calls (mm / inches) module door speaker module blank modules module frame covers shelters
(4 7/8" x 12" x 3/4")
124x395x19
12 (4 7/8" x 15 9/16" x 3/4") 1 MD41D 1 MD10ED 6 241D 1 MD228 1 MD224 - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
(9 3/4" x 8 3/8" x 3/4")
*

4+1
24 248x304.5x19
1 MD41D 1 MD10ED 12 241D 3 MD228 - 1 * 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
26 (9 3/4" x 12" x 3/4") 1 MD41D 1 MD10ED 13 241D 3 MD228 1 MD222 - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
VIDEOINTERCOMS

38 248x395x19 1 MD41D 1 MD10ED 19 241D 4 MD228 1 MD226 1 * 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
(9 3/4" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
52 372x304.5x19 1 MD41D 1 MD10ED 26 241D 6 MD228 1 MD224 - 3 MD73 1 MD89 1 MD99
(14 5/8" x 12" x 3/4")
372x395x19
68 (14 /8" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
MD72, 73, 74
Example of Videointercom push-button panel installations.
M 26 call buttons 30 call buttons 32 call buttons 38 call buttons 42 call buttons 48 call buttons 52 call buttons
O
D
Y
46
(MT11 - Gb2012)
POWER SUPPLIES AND SERVICE MODULES
1+1 INTERCOMS
Timed power supply Transformers Service module
74 65 65
2 15/16" 2 9 /16" 2 9 /16"
*
140 70 70
89 89
5 1/2 " 2 3 /4" 2 3 /4"
4+1
89
3 1 /2" 3 1 /2"
3 1/2 "
VIDEOINTERCOMS
1181E. Timed supply for videointercoms, PRS210ED. RL37D.
CCD cameras, electric lock and name-plate Transformer with electronic bell used to power When installed in 1+1 intercom and 4+1 video
lights, etc. the 1+1 intercom system with electronic call. intercom systems with electronic call, it pro-
vides a supplementary input for external calls,
Technical data Technical data enables supplementary video power supply
Input voltage: 127 or 220-230Vac Input voltage 127 or 220-230Vac and provide a second ringer for floor calls.
Frequency: 50/60Hz Power: 15VA
Power: 48VA Output voltage: 13Vac Technical data
Switch-ON time: 100 sec. Ringing frequency: 450Hz modulated Power supply: 13Vac
Ringing frequency: 450Hz modulated Maximum load: 0.6A Stand-by current: 40mA
Housing: DIN 8 modules A Maximum of intermittent load: 1A Max. switching current: 1A (24V)
Weight: 0.95Kg. Housing: DIN 4 modules A Housing: DIN 4 A modules
Approved by: VDE according to the safety Weight: 0.42Kg Operating temperature: 0° ÷ 50°C
standard EN60065 Operating temperature: 0°÷40°C Max. permissible humidity: 90% RH
Operating temperature: 0°÷40°C Maximum permissible humidity: 90%RH
Maximum permissible humidity: 90%RH Terminals
Output terminals A 13Vac alternate voltage input
Output terminals A Output voltage 13Vac for: - ground
A Output voltage 13Vac for: -name plate light, exchangers and climatized H timed positive continuous voltage input
-name plate light, exchangers and climatized camera (continuous service 0.6A) 21Vdc
camera (continuous service 0.6A) -electric door lock and bells (intermittent IV supplementary power supply enabling
-electric door lock and bells (intermittent service 1A) C common contact of relay
service 1A) - Ground NA normally open contact of relay
- Ground for AC power supply C- Negative electronic bell output 10Vpp-0.25A NC normally closed contact of relay
F Ground for DC power supply 1P electronic call input
H Continuous output 21Vdc-1A (timed op- 1M electronic call output enabled from termi-
eration) PRS210. nal 1P
C- Electronic bell output for external calls 0.25A It can replace PRS210ED in all the applica- CP electronic call output
4 Control switch-ON input from monitors tions where the electronic call generation is not
X Positive voltage output not stabilized 12Vdc- required. Used to power 13Vac devices; Note: Remove the cover and move jumper J2
0.2A supplementary amplified door stations, name to change the sounds of electronic ringer.
3+ Stabilized positive voltage output 8Vdc- plate light, additional door locks, etc. Position 1-2: modulated note
0.1A Position 2-3: continuous note
Technical data
Input voltage 127 or 220-230Vac IV
Power: 15VA H
Output voltage: 13Vac A
Maximum load: 0.7A CP
Maximum of intermittent load: 1A

1P 1M
Housing: DIN 3 modules A
Notes for power supplies and transform- NC
Weight: 0.42Kg
ers Approved by: VDE according to the safety NA
- The power supplies and the transformers standard EN60065 C
are not provided with fuses, but all of its Operating temperature: 0°÷40°C
outputs are protected against overloading Maximum permissible humidity: 90%RH
and short circuiting by temperature sen-
sors. To reset the power supply, pow-er Output terminals
must be cut off for about one minute and / Output voltage 13Vac for:
can be restored after having eliminated the -name plate light, exchangers and climatized
defect. camera (continuous service 0.6A)
- The power supply must be installed in a dry -electric door lock and bells (intermittent
place and can be fixed on DIN bar or on a service 1A)
wall by using the expansion plugs.
47
(MT11 - Gb2012)
SERVICE MODULES
1+1 INTERCOMS
Switcher module for intercommunicating systems 4-contact analog exchanger
65
74
2 9 /16"
2 15/16"
*
107.5
140
4 1 /4" 89 5 1/2 "
4+1
89
3 1 /2" 3 1/2 "
VIDEOINTERCOMS
1443ED. Operating note 1473 .

It can be mainly used in videointercom systems The switch between door station or Used in systems with 2 or more door stations to
4+1 or intercom systems 1+1 were the intercom- intercommunicating devices is automatic automatically switch audio lines and door lock
municating functions, within the same apartment after receiving a call (from door station or release on the calling station.
from another intercommunicating device)
or between different apartments, are required. Both 3-4 terminals and 11 (side b) or 5-6 terminals
or by pressing the button “ ” from video-
Privacy is guaranteed while intercommu- and 12 (side a) can be used to activate switching.
intercoms.
nicating, no privacy during communication with By pressing the button “ ” from inter- Can be fixed on DIN bar or screwed to the wall with
door station. coms or videointercoms electric look re- 2 expansion plugs.
lease is operated and automatically the
Technical characteristics system switches to the door station side. Technical data
Power supply: 13Vac During an intercommunicating conversa- Power supply: 13Vac; 15÷21Vdc
Stand-by current: 0.2A tion between two devices, it would be pos- Current consumption: 0.1A
Current with enabled bell: 0.4A sible from the external door station to call Number of exchanges: 4
Housing: DIN 6 modules A other apartments. Max. switching current: 5A (50V)
Operating temperature: 0° ÷ +50°C During an intercommunicating conversa- Housing: DIN 8 modules A
Maximum permissible humidity: 90% RH tion between two devices an incoming call Operating temperature: 0° ÷ 50°C
from the door station to one of the two Maximum permissible humidity: 90% RH
Terminals of connection devices will automatically switch the com-
1P Call, reception-transmission, electric lock munication to the door station. Terminals
release to external door stations All the devices with intercommunicating 1 Power supply 13Vac-0.1A
1M Call, reception-transmission, electric lock features, when they are in communication
release to internal stations 2 Ground
with the door station, do not have privacy 3 and 4 Driver to switch the relay to “b” position
4P Control switching ON to external door
between them. On the contrary, the privacy - ON position
stations or power supply
with other apartments is guaranteed. 5 and 6 Driver to switch the relay to “a” position
4M Control switching ON to videointercoms
HM Timed positive voltage output Installing several art. 1443ED in a multi - OFF position
HP Timed positive voltage input ways installations allows to have the inter- 7, 8, 9 and 10 Common contact of relays
A 13Vac power supply input communicating service between apart- 7a, 8a, 9a and 10a OFF position of the relay
- Ground ments with privacy towards the door sta- contacts
F Ground tion. 7b, 8b, 9b and 10b ON position of the relay
X 12Vdc-0,2A output power supply for At the end of a communication art.1443ED contacts
auxiliary services remains switched to the side from which the 11 Ground command to switch the relay to “a”
C- Modulated electronic call output last call has been originated.
position - OFF position
7 Continuous electronic call output for Red LED shows that the switching module:
12 Ground command to switch the relay to “b”
intercommunication - is switched to the side of door station
when it lights-ON position - ON position
- is switched to the intercommunicating side 13 Electronic call input
or there is no power when it lights-OFF.
1 7b 7a 8b 8a 9b 9a 10b 10a
Position of J1 jumper (inside the article) 2
3
4
J1= 2-3 J1 = 1-2 5
ON (b)
OFF (a)
MEMORY
- intercommunicating service - intercommunicating service

6
inside the same apartment between different apartments
(from factory) 11
12
13 7 8 9 10
48
(MT11 - Gb2012)
SERVICE MODULES
1+1 INTERCOMS
65 65 65
2 9 /16" 2 9 /16" 2 9 /16"
*
70 54 70
89 89 89
2 3 /4" 1
2 /8" 2 3 /4"
4+1
3 1 /2" 3 1 /2" 3 1 /2"
1471E. RELAY UNIT. 1471. RELAY UNIT. 1472. 2- CONTACT RELAY UNIT.
VIDEOINTERCOMS
It is used when it is not possible to actuate As 1471E, with lower number of terminals and As 1471E, with higher number of exchanges
commands directly. For example: in a small housing. and without terminals 9P and 9T.
- stair light switching ON,
- activation of additional bells, Technical data Technical data
- additional door lock release, etc. Power supply: 13Vac; 12÷24Vdc Power supply: 13Vac; 12÷24Vdc
Can be fixed on DIN bar or screwed to the wall Current consumption: 0.05A Current consumption: 0.05A
with 2 expansion plugs. Number of exchanges: 1 Number of exchanges: 2
Switching current: 5A (50V) Switching current: 1A (24V)
Technical data Housing: DIN 3 modules A Housing: DIN 4 modules A
Power supply: 13Vac; 12÷24Vdc Operating temperature: 0° ÷ 50°C Operating temperature: 0° ÷ 50°C
Current consumption: 0,05A Maximum permissible humidity: 90% RH Maximum permissible humidity: 90% RH
Number of exchanges: 1
Switching current: 1A (24V) Terminals Terminals
Housing: DIN 4 modules A 1 Alternate current input 13Vac-dc 1 Alternate current input 13Vac-dc
Operating temperature: 0° ÷ 50°C 2 Continuous current input 21Vdc 2 Continuous current input 21Vdc
Maximum permissible humidity: 90% RH 3 Negative half-wave input or ground 3 Negative half-wave input or ground
5 Common relay contact 5 Common contact of exchange 1
Terminals 6 Normally open contact of relay 6 Normally open contact of exchange 1
1 Alternate current input 13Vac-dc 7 Normally closed contact of relay 7 Normally closed contact of exchange 1
2 Continuous current input 21Vdc 11 Common contact of exchange 2
3 Negative half-wave input or ground 12 Normally open contact of exchange 2
5 Common contact of relay 13 Normally closed contact of exchange 2
6 Normally open contact of relay 1 6 9S Electronic call input with resistive load
7 Normally closed contact of relay - Ground
9P Electronic call input without resistive load 2 7
9S Electronic call input with resistive load
9T Electronic call input timed operation (1 sec.)
- Ground 6 7 12 13
3 5 1
2
9S
5 11
49
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1+1 INTERCOMS
- The cable runs of intercom and video inter- Wires Background noise
com installations must be kept separate from 1) For the correct operation of the intercom To avoid possible background noise over the
the mains or any other electrical installation and videointercom system you must choose speech line, it is advisable:
as required by the International Safety Stan- the correct type of cable. 5) not to lay intercom or telephone cables in the
dards and the entire installation must be 2) Wires must be dimensioned according to same runaway as the wires used to power
realized in compliance with the safety rules in the distance of the different devices and alternate current loads;
force in any specific Country. their current consumption. 6) to avoid using the same multi-core cable to
- It is necessary to provide a disconnecting 3) Do not connect wires in parallel to reach the transmit audio signals and alternate current
and safety switch before the power supply. required cross-section (for example multi- power supplies (lamps, amplified external
Use a single general switch in case of several pair telephone cables). Only use a single door stations, electrical door locks). Always
*
power supplies (also in multiple entrance). wire with suitable cross-section. When us- use separate wires for alternate current
- Before connecting the power supply make ing multi-core cables you must select them power supplies;
4+1
sure that its rating data corresponds to this of with low parasite parameters (low capaci- 7) for name-plate lamps, to use an additional
the mains. tance per meter, low inductance over Ohm). 12Vac transformer (PRS210 type) with suit-
- For electromagnetic reasons, all service 4) If the installation includes additional power able power (consumption is 75mA for each
VIDEOINTERCOMS
modules must be installed near their power supplies you must place them near the de- lamp) with 2 power supply wires separate
supply. vice to be powered. from audio wires;
8) in case of long distances between the exter-
nal door station and the last videointercom,
to place the power supply near by the exter-
nal door station.
WIRE CROSS SECTION
1 . 3 . C- . 7 . E A . S. (*) Intercom installation terminals

Distance
10 . 4 . 1 . C- . 7 . E . V+ F . H . A . S. (*) X.Y Videointercom installation terminals
m. feet mm² mm AWG mm² mm AWG mm² mm AWG

S Ø S Ø S Ø
50 165 0.5 0.8 20 0.75 1 18 0.35 0.6 22

100 330 0.75 1 18 1 1.2 16 0.35 0.6 22
200 660 1 1.2 16 2 1.6 14 0.35 0.6 22
Note. For distances longer than 100m (330ft)

max 200m (660ft) use twisted pair wire for
conductores X and Y.
X X
Y Y
For the video connection see page 51.
50
(MT11 - Gb2012)
VIDEO SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION WITH TWISTED PAIR CONNECTION WITH FLOOR DISTRIBUTORS
1+1 INTERCOMS
The video wires of each video intercom are insulated from the riser.
If the distance between the camera and the last video intercom in the Connections are made on the DV2D or DV4D floor video signal distribu-
system is lower than 200m (660ft), the connection can be made with tor box.
2x0.35mm² wires (Ø=0.6mm; AWG22) instead of the coaxial cable.
For distances from 100m (330ft) to 200m (660ft) a twisted pair must DV2D-DV4D. FLOOR VIDEO SIGNAL DISTRIBUTORS.
be used. They allow for the distribution of the video signal taken from the riser on
X X 2 or 4 outputs. They can be installed on the wall on a wall box, with
Y expansion plugs or it can be placed in the junction box.
Y
Technical data
*
For the connection of the video signal you can choose from: Power supply 15÷21Vdc
- connection with junction box Operating current 60mA
4+1
122 25
4 13 /16" 1"
- serial connection (input and output) Max. input video signal 2Vpp
- connection with floor distributors Insertion loss 0.8dB
Bandwidth >5MHz
VIDEOINTERCOMS
68
2 11 /16"
CONNECTION WITH JUNCTION BOX

All wires are distributed in the floor junction box.
Due to the signal loss introduced by each connection, the maximum 83
number of video intercoms that can be connected in serial mode is 20. 3 1 /4 "
X3 Y3 H F F H Y X F H Y2 X2
Two 75Ω resistances must be inserted between X and F and between

Y and F in the last video intercom. The maximum distance between the
video intercoms and the connector block is 2.5 metres. X4 Y4 H F F H Y X F H Y1 X1
Connection of the video signal on a single riser

Terminals X and Y of the last distributor must be terminated with the 75Ω
resistances supplied with the article. It is not necessary to terminate the
unused outputs.
SERIAL CONNECTION
Connections are made on the video intercom brackets, and not in the
junction box. Due to the signal loss introduced by each connection, the
maximum number of video intercoms that can be connected in serial
mode is 20. Two 75Ω resistances must be inserted between X and F
and between Y and F in the last video intercom. Connection of the video signal with distribution on several risers
In video systems with different risers you must use 1 or more video
distributors art. DV2D or DV4D.
unused outputs.
Example of connection on 8 risers
51
(MT11 - Gb2012)
WORKING INSTRUCTIONS
1+1 INTERCOMS
Videointercom systems Intercommunicating systems Intercom systems
Check that the connections of the system are The switch between door station or For all the intercom systems, simply lift the
carried out correctly. intercommunicating devices is automatic after handset to speak to the door station.
Put the system in use by connecting the power receiving a call (from door station or from The call is indicated by a sound signal on the
supply to the mains. another intercommunicating device) or by loudspeaker of the handset. If the handset of
By pushing a call button from the external push- pressing the button “ ” from video-intercoms. the intercom is not properly hung-up the sound
button panel, it activates the bell of the corre- By pressing the button “ ” from intercoms or is not reproduced.
sponding video intercom and it activates the videointercoms electric look release is oper- To activate the door release, press the push-
system for a time of about 100 seconds. The ated and automatically the system switches to button with the key symbol.
*
images appear on the video intercom a few the door station side. During an intercommuni-
In systems with two or more entrances the
seconds after the call. cating conversation between two devices, it
communication and door release are switched
4+1
If in the meantime another call occurs, the video would be possible from the external door sta-
tion to call other apartments. automatically on the entrance from which the
intercom shuts itself OFF and connects the last call is made while the other entrances are
call. The system switches OFF automatically During an intercommunicating conversation
isolated.
VIDEOINTERCOMS
after 100 seconds. between two devices an incoming call from the
door station to one of the two devices will
In case more calls occur simultaneously, a
automatically switch the communication to the
protection circuit against overloading and short Adjustments
door station.
circuiting is provided to disable the timer and All the regulations are carried out in the factory.
All the devices with intercommunicating
therefore to shut OFF the system. For possible corrections the intervention of a
features, when they are in communication with
In the absence of calls from the door station, specialized technician is advisable.
the door station, do not have privacy between
from any video intercom (if provided in the The Contrast, Colour and Brightness adjust-
them. On the contrary, the privacy with other
system) it is possible to control the entrance by ments, being subject to the environmental light-
pressing the button (control switch ON). apartments is guaranteed.
Installing several art. 1443ED in a multi ways ing conditions, are accessible from the under-
To work the electric door lock release press the neath by means of a screw driver.
button from video intercoms. installations allows to have the intercommuni-
In the two or more entrance systems all the cating service between apartments with pri-
audio and video communications and door vacy towards the door station.
lock release, from one entrance to the other, At the end of a communication art.1443ED
are automatically switched with the call or the remains switched to the side from which the
control switch ON. last call has been originated.
In these systems the control switch ON from the Red LED shows that the switching module:
- is switched to the side of door station when it
video intercoms can interrupt a running com-
lights-ON
munication, for this reason it is advisable to
- is switched to the intercommunicating side or
interrupt, by means of a relay. This function
there is no power when it lights-OFF.
when the video system is active, giving the
priority of the communication to the door sta-
tions for some examples from page 68 on-
wards.
52
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERCOMS AND VIDEOINTERCOMS
REDUCED WIRES TECHNOLOGY
INSTALLATION DIAGRAMS
Page
1+1 INTERCOMS 54
- Si 21MR/1 Intercoms connected to 1 external door station 55
- Si 21MR/2 Intercoms with private conversation connected to 1 external door station 55
- Si 22MR/1 Intercoms connected to 2 automatically switched external door stations 57
- Si 26MR/1 Intercom system with secondary door stations and 1 main common station (multiple entrance) 59
- Si 26MR/2 One-way intercom system with secondary door stations and 1 main common station (multiple entrance) 61
- Si 27MR/1 Intercom system with secondary door stations and 2 main common stations (multiple entrance) 63
- Si 211R/1 One-way intercom system 64
- Si 211R/5 One-way intercom system with intercommunicating service between 2 intercoms 64
- Si 212R/1 Two-way intercom system with intercommunicating service between 2 apartments 65
- Si 212R/3 Two-way intercom system with intercommunicating service in an apartment 65
- Si 214R/1 Multi-way intercom system with a door station and some apartments with intercommunicating service 67
4+1 VIDEOINTERCOMS 68
- Si 41MR/2 Multi-way mixed intercom and video intercom system connected to one external door station 69
- Si 41MR/28 Multi-way video intercom system connected to one external door station with surveillance camera 71
- Si 42MR/1 Multi-way video intercom system connected to two external door stations, one of which only audio 73
- Si 42MR/2 Multi-way video intercom system connected to two external door stations 75
- Si 46MR/1 Multi-way video intercom system with secondary video stations and 1 main common video station (multiple entrance) 77
- Si 46MR/2 Multi-way video intercom system with secondary door stations only audio and 1 main common video station (multiple 79
entrance)
- Si 46MR/9 One-way video intercom system with secondary video stations and 1 main common video station 81
- Si 46MR/15One-way video intercom system with secondary door stations only audio and 1 main common video station 83
- Si 47MR/1 Multi-way video intercom system with secondary video stations and 2 main common video stations (multiple entrance) 85
- Si 411R/1 One-way video intercom system 86
- Additional diagrams for systems NOT intercommunicating 87
- Si 411R/41 One-way videointercom system with intercommunicating service between 2 videointercoms 88
- Si 412R/18 Two-way videointercom system with intercommunicating service between 2 apartments 89
- Si 414R/8 Multi-way videointercom system with a door station and some apartments with intercommunicating service 91
Notes.
For a clearer understanding of the diagrams, the sequence of terminals in each individual article has not been followed. Only the
terminal code (letter and/or number) is valid, not the graphic sequence.
Terminals with the same letter or number have the same functions.
The items may have more terminals than the ones shown in the installation diagrams. The excess terminals must not be connected.
53
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 21MR/1-21MR/2
1+1 INTERCOMS
INTERCOMS WITH OR WITHOUT PRIVATE CONVERSATION CONNECTED TO 1 EXTERNAL DOOR STATION
AGORA' series PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series
1 AG100A ... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD71÷MD74

... AG100T 1 PL81÷PL89 1 MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1 MD84÷MD812
... AG20 1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD94÷MD912 *
... AG21 1 PL10PED÷PL12PED 1 MAS10PED÷MAS12PED 1 MD10ED÷MD12ED
*
... AG222 ... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22, MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228

1 AG30ED ... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50
4+1
... 241DMA ... 241DMA ... 241D
INTERNAL STATIONS
VIDEOINTERCOMS
... EX311 Exhito series with 2 call buttons

... EX321 Exhito series modular intercom
... KM811W Compact series intercom with 1 call button
... PT511EW Project series intercom with 1 call button
... SM50 *** Private conversation module
VARIOUS ARTICLES
1 PRS210ED Transformer with electronic ringing generator
1 PA ** Door release push-button (optional)
1 SE ** Electric door lock (12VAC-1A)
... Refers to number of users.

(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
* Rain shelters are used instead of back boxes and hood covers.
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa.
*** Only for diagram "b"; system with private conversation.
Working instructions. See page 52.
Notes
- For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the installation instructions on page 50.
- For wires dimensioning refer to the installation recommendations and table on page 50.
Agorà door station

Note. Door station AG100A do not have the terminal "E" because the requested connection is automatically done inserting the pre-assembled
cable which comes with the product (see drawing 5a on page 18). On the contrary, do not forget to make the connection between the terminal "1"
of art. AG100A and terminal "E" of the additional door stations AG100T’s (if any).
54
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 21MR/1 Si 21MR/2
a) INTERCOMS CONNECTED TO 1 EXTERNAL DOOR b) INTERCOMS WITH PRIVATE CONVERSATION CON-
1+1 INTERCOMS
STATION NECTED TO 1 EXTERNAL DOOR STATION
Note
KM811 EX321 - In all SM50 cut the resistance R1 and in the intercom the jumper W1.
Xn 1
6
SM50 EX321 EX311
3
Xn
7
*
1 1
PT511E EX311 B R1 6 6
C
4+1
2
3 3
7
W1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
KM811 PT511E
KM811 EX321
1 EX321 EX311
6
SM50
3
7
1 1
PT511E EX311
B R1 6 6
C 2
3 3
7
W1
KM811 PT511E
Xn
Agorà Profilo Matrix Mody
X3 Xn
AG100T
P PL2.. Agorà Profilo Matrix Mody
241DMA X3
X2 AG100T
MAS2..
241DMA P PL2..
P 241DMA
X2
MD2.. MAS2..
C 241D 241DMA
E P
MD2..
C 241D
E
P
P
P
C
P
E
AG100A C
1
AG30ED E
PL1.PED 1 AG100A
AG30ED
A MAS1.PED PL1.PED
S
MD1.ED A MAS1.PED
S
MD1.ED
PA
SE (12Vac-1A max) PA
SE (12Vac-1A max)
PRS210ED
PRS210ED
A
230V A
C- 127V 230V
C- 127V
0
0
55
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 22MR/1
INTERCOMS CONNECTED TO 2 AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHED EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS

1+1 INTERCOMS

... AG20 2 PL91÷PL99 * 2 MA91÷MA93 * 2 MD94÷MD912 *
*

4+1
... 241DMA ... 241DMA ... 241D
INTERNAL STATIONS
VIDEOINTERCOMS

VARIOUS ARTICLES
1 1473 Exchanger
1 PRS210 Transformer

(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
Notes
Agorà door stations Install the privacy module.

Attention. To create the terminal "E" in the If privacy feature is requested, SM50
door stations AG100A it is necessary to cut module must be installed inside all the EX321 EX311
the red wire which connects the door speaker intercoms.
amplifier AG30ED to the backlighting board SM50
with diodes and LED’s (see figure).
1 1
The terminal "E" of the entrance “a” must B R1 6 6
remain disconnected and insulated, on the C 2
contrary that of entrance “b” must be 3 3
W1
connected to the terminals "E" of additional 7
AG100T’s (if any). KM811 PT511E
In all SM50 cut the resistance R1 and in the intercom
the jumper W1.
56
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 22MR/1
1+1 INTERCOMS
EX321 EX311
Xn 1
6
3
7
*
4+1
KM811 PT511E
VIDEOINTERCOMS
EX321 EX311
1
6
3
7
KM811 PT511E
X2 X3 Xn
Agorà Profilo Matrix Mody Agorà Profilo Matrix Mody
AG100T AG100T
PL2.. PL2..
P P 241DMA
MAS2..
MAS2..
MD2.. 241DMA
P P MD2..
C C
241D
E
P P
P P
C 6 3 C
E 7 E
AG100A 1 7a 7b 1 AG100A
AG30ED AG30ED
PL1.PED 2 PL1.PED
MAS1.PED A 1 A MAS1.PED
S 4 S
MD1.ED 1473 MD1.ED
5
entrance "a" entrance "b"
PA PA
SE SE
PRS210 PRS210ED
A
230V 230V
127V 127V
C-
0 0
57
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 26MR/1
INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON STATION (multiple entrance)
1+1 INTERCOMS
1+X AG100A ... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD71÷MD74

... AG100T 1+X PL81÷PL89 1+X MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1+X MD81÷MD812
... AG20 1+X PL91÷PL99 * 1+X MA91÷MA93 * 1+X MD91÷MD912 *
... AG21 1+X PL10PED÷PL12PED 1+X MAS10PED÷MAS12PED 1+X MD10ED÷MD12ED
*
1+X AG30ED ... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50
4+1
... 241DMA ... 241DMA ... 241D
INTERNAL STATIONS
VIDEOINTERCOMS

VARIOUS ARTICLES
X 1473 Exchanger
X PRS210ED Transformer with electronic ringing generator
1+X PA ** Door release push-button (optional) Install the privacy module.
1+X SE ** Electric door lock (12VAC-1A) If privacy feature is requested, SM50 module must be
EX321 EX311
installed inside all the intercoms.
X Refers to the number of stairways. SM50
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
* Rain shelters are used instead of back boxes and hood covers. 1 1
B R1 6 6
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. C 2
3 3
Notes 7
W1
- For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the
KM811 PT511E
installation instructions on page 50.
- For wires dimensioning refer to the installation recommendations and In all SM50 cut the resistance R1 and in the intercom the jumper W1.
table on page 50.
Working instructions.
As the basic system described on page 52, with the following variations:
- The audio functions and door lock opening are automatically switched The main entrance push-button panel must have separate common
to the door station which has made the call and remain in this state until terminals. One common terminal for each secondary door station. The
a call from another entrance is received. common terminals of push-buttons Profilo and Matrix series can be
separated only module by module.
- Services to secondary door stations are independent and can be
The common terminals of push-button
operated at the same time. Common buttons Agorà series can be separated according
building “a” to the requirements, by cutting
opportunely the common rail or just do
not using it.
Agorà door stations In Mody series the common terminals
of push-buttons can be separated
Attention. In the door station AG100A of the module by module or every 2 push-
secondary entrances create the terminal buttons by cutting opportunely the
"E" cutting the red wire which connects the common rail which connects the
door speaker AG30ED to the backlighting common terminals of push-buttons.
board (see figure), than connect it to the
Common of
terminals "E" of additional AG100T’s (if button 1 and 2
any).
To separate
In the door station AG100A of the main common of
entrance only cut and insulate the conductor buttons cut here
“E” (red wire).
Common of
Common buttons button 3 and 4
building “b”
58
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 26MR/1
1+1 INTERCOMS
“A” “B”
KM811 EX321 KM811 EX321 “C-D..”
3 3
1 Xn(A) 1 Xn(B)
PT511E EX311 PT511E EX311
*
KM811 EX321 KM811 EX321
4+1
3 3
1 1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
secondary entrance "a" Xn(A) X3(A) X2(A) secondary entrance "b" Xn(B) X3(B) X2(B)
AG100T AG100T
PL2.. PL2..
241DMA P 241DMA P
MAS2.. MAS2..
241DMA 241DMA
MD2.. P MD2.. P
241D 241D
C C
E E
P P
P P
Agorà C 3 Agorà C 3
E 10 E 10
AG100A AG100A
AG30ED 1 10b AG30ED 1 10b
1473 1473
PL1.PED PL1.PED
2 2
MAS1.PED A 1 MAS1.PED A 1
Profilo S Profilo S
MD1.ED MD1.ED
PA 4 5 6 10a PA 4 5 6 10a
SE SE
Matrix Mody Matrix Mody
0 A 0 A
127V 127V “C-D..”
230V 230V
C- C-
PRS210ED PRS210ED
main entrance
MD2. P Xn (C)
MAS2.
P X1 (C)
C
MD2. P Xn (B)
MAS2.
P
C
P Xn (A)
Agorà P
C
AG100A
AG30ED 1
PL1.PED
MA1S.PED A
Profilo
MD1.ED S
PA
SE
Matrix Mody
0
127V
230V
PRS210
59
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 26MR/2
ONE-WAY INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON DOOR STATION
1+1 INTERCOMS
Main DOOR STATION

... AG20 1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD91÷MD912 *
*

4+1
Secondary DOOR STATIONS

VIDEOINTERCOMS
X AG100A X PL71 X MA71 X MD71

X AG21 X PL81 X MAS61 (1) X MD81
3xX AG20 X PL91 * X MA91 * X MD91 *
X AG30ED X PL11PED X MAS11PED X MD11ED
X 241DMA X 241DMA X 241D
INTERNAL STATIONS
VARIOUS ARTICLES
X 1473 Exchanger
X PRS210ED Transformer with electronic ringing generator
1+X PA ** Door release push-button (optional)
1+X SE ** Electric door lock (12VAC-1A)
X D ** 100V-1A diode (type 1N4007)

X Refers to the number of stairways.
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
Notes
- For wires dimensioning refer to the installation recommendations and
table on page 50.
- The audio functions and door lock opening are automatically switched
to the door station which has made the call and remain in this state until
a call from another entrance is received.
operated at the same time.
Agorà door stations

Attention. In the door stations AG100A it is
necessary to cut and insulate the red wire
which connects the door speaker amplifier
AG30ED to the backlighting board with diodes
and LED’s (see figure).
60
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 26MR/2
ONE-WAY INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON DOOR STATION
1+1 INTERCOMS
(multiple entrance)
“A” “B”
“C-D..”
KM811 EX321 KM811 EX321
1 1
3 3
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
D D
10 4 5 10 4 5
P 3 P 3
Agorà C Agorà C
E E
AG100A AG100A
Profilo PL11PED Profilo PL11PED

2 2
MAS11PED A 1 1473 MAS11PED A 1 1473
S S
MD11ED MD11ED
PA 6 10a PA 6 10a
Mody Mody
Matrix SE Matrix SE
0 A 0 A
127V 127V “C-D..”
230V 230V
C- C-
PRS210ED PRS210ED
AG100T P Xn
PL2.
MAS2.
MD2. P X3
C
Agorà P
C
AG100A
AG30ED 1
PL1.PED
MAS1.PED A
Profilo
MD1.ED S
PA
230V
127V
0
SE
Matrix Mody
PRS210ED
A C-
61
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 27MR/1
INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS AND 2 MAIN COMMON STATIONS (multiple
1+1 INTERCOMS
entrance)
2+X AG100A ... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD71÷MD74

... AG100T 2+X PL81÷PL89 2+X MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 2+X MD81÷MD812
... AG21 2+X PL10PED÷PL12PED 2+X MAS10PED÷MAS12PED 2+X MD10ED÷MD12ED
*

2+X AG30ED ... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50
4+1
... 241DMA ... 241DMA ... 241D
INTERNAL STATIONS
VIDEOINTERCOMS

VARIOUS ARTICLES
2xX 1473 Exchanger
X PRS210ED Transformer with electronic ringing generator Install the privacy module.
If privacy feature is requested, SM50 module must be
2+X PA ** Door release push-button (optional) EX321 EX311
2+X SE ** Electric door lock (12VAC-1A) installed inside all the intercoms.
SM50
X Refers to the number of stairways. 1 1
(1) Or MA61÷MA63. B R1 6 6
* Rain shelters are used instead of back boxes and hood covers. C 2
3 3
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. W1
7
Notes KM811 PT511E

- For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the In all SM50 cut the resistance R1 and in the intercom the jumper W1.
table on page 50.
Working instructions. The main entrance push-button panel must have separate common
As the basic system described on page 52, with the following variations: terminals. One common terminal for each secondary door station. The
- The audio functions and door lock opening are automatically switched common terminals of push-buttons Profilo and Matrix series can be
to the door station which has made the call and remain in this state until separated only module by module.
a call from another entrance is received. The common terminals of push-button
Common buttons Agorà series can be separated according
- Services to secondary door stations are independent and can be building “a” to the requirements, by cutting
not using it.
Common of
any).
To separate
In the door station AG100A of the main common of
entrances only cut and insulate the conductor buttons cut here
“E” (red wire).
Common of
building “b”
62
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 27MR/1
1+1 INTERCOMS
entrance)
“A” “B”
KM811 EX321 KM811 EX321 “C-D..”
3 3
1 Xn(A) 1 Xn(B)
*
KM811 EX321 KM811 EX321
3 3
4+1
1 1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Xn(A) X3(A) X2(A) Xn(B) X3(B) X2(B)
secondary entrance "a" secondary entrance "b"
MD2.. MD2..
241D 241D
P P
MAS2.. MAS2..
241DMA 241DMA
P P
C C
E E
P P
P P
Agorà C 3 Agorà C 3
E 10 E 10
AG100A AG100A
1473 1473
PL1.PED PL1.PED
2 2
MAS1.PED A 1 MAS1.PED A 1
Profilo S 4 Profilo S 4
MD1.ED MD1.ED
PA 5 6 10a PA 5 6 10a
SE SE
Matrix Mody Matrix Mody

0 2 4 5 10 0 2 4 5 10
A A
127V 1 127V 1 “C-D..”
230V 230V
C- 1473 C- 1473
PRS210ED PRS210ED
3 10b 10a 6 3 10b 10a 6
main entrance "1" main entrance "2"

MD2. P Xn (C) MD2. P Xn (C)
MAS2. MAS2.
P X1 (C) P X1 (C)
C 3 (C) C 6 (C)
MD2. P Xn (B) MD2. P Xn (B)

MAS2. MAS2.
P P
C C
P Xn (A) Xn (A) P
Agorà P P Agorà
C C
AG100A
AG100A AG30ED
AG30ED 1 1
PL1.PED
PL1.PED
MAS1.PED
MAS1.PED A A
Profilo MD1.ED Profilo
MD1.ED S S
PA PA
SE SE
Matrix Mody Mody Matrix
0 0
127V 127V
230V 230V
PRS210 PRS210
63
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 211R/1 One-way system diagrams
ONE-WAY INTERCOM SYSTEM
1+1 INTERCOMS
Agorà
P2
P1
C
E
AG100A 1 1
AG30ED 3
PL11PED
*
A
MAS11PED
S
4+1
MD11ED PA
VIDEOINTERCOMS
SE A C
0
EX311 EX321 KM811 PT511E
127V
230V PRS210ED
Profilo Matrix Mody
Si 211R/5
ONE-WAY INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING SERVICE BETWEEN 2 INTERCOMS
Agorà
P2
P1
J1= 2-3
C
E 1P
AG100A 1 1M 1 1
AG30ED F 3 3
PL11PED 7 C C
A A A1 P
MAS11PED
S P A1
MD11ED PA
1443ED
SE A C
0 PRS210 0
127V 127V
230V PRS210ED 230V
Profilo Matrix Mody
EX311 EX321 KM811
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS for Si 211R/1 and Si 211R/5

1 AG100A 1 PL71 1 MA71 1 MD71
1 AG21 1 PL81 1 MAS61 (1) 1 MD81
3 AG20 1 PL91 * 1 MA91 * 1 MD91 *
1 AG30ED 1 PL11PED 1 MAS11PED 1 MD11ED
INTERNAL STATIONS for Si 211R/1 INTERNAL STATIONS for Si 211R/5
1 EX311 Exhito series with 2 call buttons 2 EX311 Exhito series with 2 call buttons
1 EX321 Exhito series modular intercom 2 EX321 Exhito series modular intercom
1 KM811W Compact series intercom with 1 call button 2 KM811W Compact series intercom with 1 call button
1 PT511EW Project series intercom with 1 call button 2 ST701 Additional push-button for intercom KM811W
VARIOUS ARTICLES for Si 211R/1 VARIOUS ARTICLES for Si 211R/5

1 PRS210ED Transformer with electronic ringing generator 1 PRS210ED Transformer with electronic ringing generator
1 PA ** Door release push-button (optional) 1 PRS210 Transformer
1 SE ** Electric door lock (12VAC-1A) 1 1443ED Switcher module for intercommunicating system
(1) Or MA61. Notes

* Rain shelters are used instead of back boxes and hood - In art. 1443ED it is necessary to move the jumper J1 in the position indicated
covers. in the installation diagram (see also on page 48).
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. - Do not forget to connect the terminal E with the terminal 1 of the door stations
Profilo, Matrix and Mody (no connection it is required in the Agorà series).
Working instructions. See page 52. - For wires dimensioning refer to the installation recommendations and table
on page 50.
64
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Two-way intercommunicating system diagrams Si 212R/1
TWO-WAY INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING SERVICE BETWEEN 2 APARTMENTS
1+1 INTERCOMS
Agorà
P2
P1
C
E 1M J1= 1-2
AG100A 1 1P 1 1
AG30ED F 3 3
PL12PED 7 C C
*
A A A1 P
MA12SPED
S P A1
4+1
MD12ED PA
1443ED
SE A C PRS210 0
VIDEOINTERCOMS
0
127V 127V
230V PRS210ED 230V
Profilo Matrix Mody
EX311 EX321 KM811
Note.
In the door station AG100A cut the red wire to create the terminal “E” (see drawing 5b on page 18).
Si 212R/3
TWO-WAY INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING SERVICE BETWEEN IN AN APARTMENT
1
Agorà 3
P2
P1 EX311 EX321 KM811 PT511E
C J1= 2-3
E 1P
AG100A 1 1M 1 1
AG30ED F 3 3
PL12PED 7 C C
A A A1 P
MA12PED
S P A1
MD12ED PA
1443ED
SE A C
0 PRS210 0
127V 127V
230V PRS210ED 230V
Profilo Matrix Mody
EX311 EX321 KM811
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS for Si 212R/1 and Si 212R/3

1 AG100A 1 PL71 1 MA71 1 MD71
2 AG21 1 PL81 1 MAS61 (1) 1 MD81
2 AG20 1 PL91 * 1 MA91 * 1 MD91 *
1 AG30ED 1 PL12PED 1 MAS12PED 1 MD12ED
INTERNAL STATIONS for Si 212R/1 INTERNAL STATIONS for Si 212R/3
2 EX311 Exhito series with 2 call buttons 3 EX311 Exhito series with 2 call buttons
2 EX321 Exhito series modular intercom 3 EX321 Exhito series modular intercom
2 KM811W Compact series intercom with 1 call button 3 KM811W Compact series intercom with 1 call button
2 ST701 Additional push-button for intercom KM811W 2 ST701 Additional push-button for intercom KM811W
1 PT511EW Project series intercom with 1 call button
VARIOUS ARTICLES for Si 212R/1 and Si 212R/3

1 1443ED Switcher module for intercommunicating system
(1) Or MA61. Notes

* Rain shelters are used instead of back boxes and hood - In art. 1443ED it is necessary to move the jumper J1 in the position indicated
covers. in the installation diagram (see also on page 48).
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. - Do not forget to connect the terminal E with the terminal 1 of the door stations
Profilo, Matrix and Mody (no connection it is required in the Agorà series).
Working instructions. See page 52. - For wires dimensioning refer to the installation recommendations and table
on page 50.
65
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 214R/1
1+1 INTERCOMS
MULTI-WAY INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH A DOOR STATION AND SOME APARTMENTS WITH INTERCOMMUNI-
CATING SERVICE

... AG20 1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD91÷MD912 *
*

4+1

... 241DMA ... 241DMA ... 241D
VIDEOINTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS WITHOUT INTERCOMMUNICATING SERVICE (for the details of the internal intercommunicating devices which can
be installed see the list on the bottom of this page)
VARIOUS ARTICLES (for all the specific devices to be installed in the intercommunicating apartments see the detailed list on the bottom of
this page)
Agorà door station
(1) Or MA61÷MA63. Attention. In the door station
* Rain shelters are used instead of back boxes and hood covers. AG100A of the secondary en-
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. trances create the terminal "E"
cutting the red wire which con-
Working instructions. See page 52. nects the door speaker
AG30ED to the backlighting
Notes board (see figure).
table on page 50.
In the multi-apartment diagram are shown 3 different examples of connection for the intercommunicating
service.
(A) Intercommunicating service between 2 (B) Intercommunicating service in the (C) Intercommunicating service in the
apartments each of them with 2 parallel same apartment between 2 intercoms same apartment with 3 intercoms
intercoms (Exhito and/or Compact series) (Exhito and/or Compact series) Exhito series
Exhito Compact Exhito Compact Exhito

4 EX311 4 KM811W 2 EX311 2 KM811W 3 EX311 3 EX321
EX321 1 1443ED EX321 2 ST701 3 EX301 3 EX301
1 1443ED 1 PRS210 1 1443ED 1 1443ED 1 1443ED 1 1443ED
1 PRS210 4 ST701 1 PRS210 1 PRS210 1 PRS210 1 PRS210
Notes: Notes:
- In the art. 1443ED move the jumper J1 from the - Verify that in the art. 1443ED the jumper J1 Notes:
position 2-3 to the position 1-2. has been set in the position 2-3. - Verify that in the art. 1443ED the jumper J1
- In each of the 2 apartments it is be possible to - To make an intercommunicating call, pick has been set in the position 2-3.
connect at maximum 3 intercoms in parallel, but up the handset, be sure that there are not - To make an intercommunicating call, pick
the intercommunicating calls are between apart- any other communication in progress, and up the handset, be sure that there are not any
ments (and not among the intercoms in the same press the push-button 1. The called inter- other communication in progress, and press
apartment). com, to receive the ringing tone, must have the push-button 1 or 2. The called intercom,
the handset correctly hooked in its place to receive the ringing tone, must have the
(not unhooked). handset correctly hooked in its place (not
unhooked).
66
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Multi-way intercommunicating system diagrams Si 214R/1
MULTI-WAY INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH A DOOR STATION AND SOME APARTMENTS WITH INTERCOMMUNI-
1+1 INTERCOMS
CATING SERVICE
Xn 1
3
EX311 EX321 KM811 PT511E
*
J1=2-3
1M
4+1
1 1 1 1 1
3 3 F 3 3 3
1 1
C C 7 C C C
A1 A1 X4 1P A1 P P 2
VIDEOINTERCOMS
P P P A1 P2
A
C C C
KM811+ EX321 P2 P2 A1
ST701 1443ED
EX321+ EX311+
EX301 EX301
0
127V
230V
EX311 PRS210
(C)
J1=2-3
1 1 1M 1 1
3 3 F 3 3
1 1
C C 7 C C
A1 A1 X3 1P A1 P
P P P A1
A
KM811+ EX321 EX321 KM811+
ST701 1443ED ST701
0
127V
230V
EX311 PRS210 EX311
(B)
1443ED
PRS210 J1=1-2
0
A 1P 1M 7 F
127V
230V X3 Xn
(A) AG100T
PL2..
P 241DMA
MA2..
241DMA
P MD2..
C
241D
E
P
C
E
Agorà Profilo
1
C- AG100A
AG30ED
230V PL1.PED
127V A A
S MA1.PED
0 PA
MD1.ED Matrix Mody
PRS210ED
SE
67
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 41MR/2
MULTI-WAY MIXED INTERCOM AND VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO ONE EXTERNAL DOOR
1+1 INTERCOMS
STATION

1 AG100V ... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74
... AG100T 1 PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1 MD82÷MD812
... AG20 1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD92÷MD912 *
... AG21 1 PL40PCED÷PL42PCED 1 MAS43CED 1 MD10ED÷MD12ED
*
... AG222 PL40PED÷PL42PED MAS43ED 1 MD41D

1 AG40CED ... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22, MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228
4+1
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50

... 241DMA ... 241DMA ... 241D
VIDEOINTERCOMS
VIDEOINTERCOMS
ECHOS series EXHITO series COMPACT series
... EH9161CT ... EX3100C ... KM8111CW
... EH9161CW ... EX3160C ... KM8111W
... 9083 ... EX3160 ... WB8111
... WA9100T-W ... WB3161
... TA9160 ... TA3160
INTERCOMS
EXHITO series COMPACT series PROJECT series
... EX311 ... KM811W ... PT511EW
... EX321 ... SM50 *** ... SM50 ***
... SM50 ***
VARIOUS ARTICLES
1 1181E Timed power-supply
... DV2D-DV4D Video distributors

(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
*** Use only for privacy feature.
Notes
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations MODY series with internal devices ECHOS series.
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the installation instructions and table on pages 50 and 51.
Control switching ON deactivation
Note. Door station AG100V do not have the terminal "E" because the requested To activate the control switching ON from the
connection is automatically done inserting the pre-assembled cable which videointercoms only when the system is in stand-by,
comes with the product (see drawing 5a on page 18). On the contrary, do not it is necessary to install a relay (type 1471 or 1472)
forget to make the connection between the terminal "1" of art. AG100V and and connect it as shown on the diagram.
terminal "E" of the additional door stations AG100T’s (if any).
to the videoin-
tercoms
68
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 41MR/2
MULTI-WAY MIXED INTERCOM AND VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO ONE EXTERNAL DOOR
1+1 INTERCOMS
STATION
2x
75W
Y X F H
Echos
X1 X Compact
Y1 Y
H H
F F
DV2D Xn 10
DV4D
4
Exhito Exhito
Y X F H
*
4+1
KM811 PT511E EX321 EX311
KM811 PT511E EX321 EX311
VIDEOINTERCOMS
B 1 1 Conversation privacy
C 6 6 W1
1 2 In case of conversation privacy func-
3 R1 3 3 tion, jumper W1 of the intercom and
7 resistance R1 of module SM50 must
Intercom without SM50 be cut.
private conversa- Intercom with private
tion conversation
Y X F H
Echos
X1 X Compact
Y1 Y
H H
F F
DV2D 10
DV4D
4
Exhito Exhito
Y X F H
1181E
F H A C 4
X3 Xn
0
230V
127V
AG100T
PL2..
P 241DMA
MAS2..
241DMA
P MD2..
C 241D
E
P
C
E Agorà
1
A
S Mody
PA Profilo
AG100V
AG40CED
SE
PL4.PED
H
F MAS43.ED
X MD1.ED Matrix
Y MD41D
69
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 41MR/28
MULTI-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO ONE EXTERNAL DOOR STATION WITH SURVEIL-
1+1 INTERCOMS
LANCE CAMERA

... AG20 1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD91÷MD912 *
*

4+1
... 241DMA ... 241DMA ... 241D
INTERNAL STATIONS
VIDEOINTERCOMS

... EH9161CT ... EX3100C ... KM8111CW
... EH9161CW ... EX3160C ... KM8111W
... 9083 ... EX3160 ... WB8111
... WA9100T-W ... WB3161
... TA9160 ... TA3160
VARIOUS ARTICLES
1 CV01 Video signal converter
1 TVT.. CCTV camera
1 H.. Lens with or without autoiris
1 CU.. Outdoor heated housing
1 AST.. Bracket for camera or housing
1 APS.. Power supply for camera

(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
Notes
Agorà door station
Note. Door station AG100A do not have the terminal "E" because the requested
To activate the control switching ON from the
connection is automatically done inserting the pre-assembled cable which comes
videointercoms only when the system is in standby,
with the product (see drawing 5a on page 18). On the contrary, do not forget to make
it is necessary to install a relay (type 1471 or 1472)
the connection between the terminal "1" of art. AG100A and terminal "E" of the
and connect it as shown on the diagram.
additional door stations AG100T’s (if any).
to the videoin-
tercoms
70
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 41MR/28
MULTI-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO ONE EXTERNAL DOOR STATION WITH SURVEIL-
1+1 INTERCOMS
LANCE CAMERA
2x
75W
Y X F H
Echos
X1 X
Y1 Y Compact
H H
F F
DV2D Xn 10
DV4D
*
4
Y X F H Exhito Exhito
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Y X F H
Echos
X1 X
Y1 Y Compact
H H
F F
DV2D 10
DV4D
4
CU..
AST..
CV01 APS..
J1
X 1 2 3
Y
Red White
+H V TVT..
Black Green
-F M H..
1181E
ADDITIONAL TERMINALS 230V
F H A C 4
X2 X3 Xn
0
230V
127V
AG100T
PL2..
P 241DMA
MA2..
241DMA
P MD2..
C 241D
E
P
C
E
Agorà Profilo
1
AG100A
AG30ED
A
PL1.PED
S
PA MA1.PED
Matrix Mody
MD1.ED
SE
71
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 42MR/1
MULTI-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO TWO EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS, ONE OF WHICH
1+1 INTERCOMS
ONLY AUDIO

1 AG100A 2 PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 2 MD82÷MD812
... AG100T 2 PL91÷PL99 * 2 MA91÷MA93 * 2 MD92÷MD912 *
*

... AG222 1 PL10PED÷PL12PED 1 MAS10PED÷MAS12PED ... MD21÷MD228
4+1
1 AG30ED ... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22, MAS24 ... MD20, MD50

1 AG40CED ... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... 241D
... 241DMA ... 241DMA
VIDEOINTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
... EH9161CT ... EX3100C ... KM8111CW
... EH9161CW ... EX3160C ... KM8111W
... 9083 ... EX3160 ... WB8111
... WA9100T-W ... WB3161
... TA9160 ... TA3160
VARIOUS ARTICLES
1 1473 Exchanger

(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
- The audio-video functions and door lock opening are automatically switched to the door station which has made the call and remain in this state
until a call from another entrance is received.
Notes
Agorà door stations Control switching ON deactivation

Attention. To create the terminal "E" in the
videointercoms only when the system is in standby,
door station AG100A and AG100V it is
it is necessary to install a relay (type 1471 or 1472)
necessary to cut the red wire which connects
and connect it as shown on the diagram.
the door speaker amplifier AG30ED or
AG40CED to the backlighting board with to the videoin-
diodes and LED’s (see figure). tercoms
The terminal "E" of the entrance “b” must
remain disconnected and insulated, on the
contrary that of entrance “a” must be
connected to the terminals "E" of additional
AG100T’s (if present).
72
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 42MR/1
MULTI-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO TWO EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS, ONE OF WHICH
1+1 INTERCOMS
ONLY AUDIO
2x
75
Y X F H
Echos
X1 X
Y1 Y Compact
H H
F F
DV2D Xn 10
DV4D
4
Exhito Exhito
*
Y X F H
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Y X F H
X1 X Echos
Y1 Y Compact
H H
F F
DV2D 10
DV4D
4
PRS210 1181E
X F H A C 4
0
127V
230V
0
127V
230V
entrance "b" Xn X3 X2 X2 X3 Xn entrance "a"
AG100T
AG100T
PL2..
PL2.. P P 241DMA
MA2.. MA2..
MD2.. 241DMA
Agorà P P MD2..
C C 241D
E
7 8 1
P 2 P
Profilo 9
3
P P
5
C 4 6 C
E 10 E Agorà
AG100A 1 10b 10a 1
Matrix AG30ED
PL1.PED
MA1.PED A A
S S
MD1.ED PA Mody Profilo
PA
Mody AG100V
1473 AG40CED
SE SE
PL4.PED
F
9b 9a H MA43.ED
8b 8a X MD1.ED Matrix
7b 7a Y MD41D
73
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 42MR/2
MULTI-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO TWO EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS

1+1 INTERCOMS

... AG20 2 PL91÷PL99 * 2 MA91÷MA93 * 2 MD92÷MD912 *
*

... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50
4+1
... 241DMA ... 241DMA ... 241D
INTERNAL STATIONS
VIDEOINTERCOMS

... EH9161CT ... EX3100C ... KM8111CW
... EH9161CW ... EX3160C ... KM8111W
... 9083 ... EX3160 ... WB8111
... WA9100T-W ... WB3161
... TA9160 ... TA3160
VARIOUS ARTICLES
1 1473 Exchanger

(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
- The audio-video functions and door lock opening are automatically switched to the door station which has made the call and remain in this state
until a call from another entrance is received.
Notes
- With Echos videointercoms series it is possible to monitor also the “b” entrance by connecting the terminal P1 of the Echos videointercoms
to the terminal “4” of the exchanger art.1473 and by moving the jumper J2 on the back of the videointercom to the position 2-3 (see page 4).
Agorà door stations Control switching ON deactivation

Attention. To create the terminal "E" in the videointercoms only when the system is in stand-by,
door station AG100V it is necessary to cut it is necessary to install a relay (type 1471 or 1472)
the red wire which connects the door speaker and connect it as shown on the diagram.
amplifier AG40CED to the backlighting
board with diodes and LED’s (see figure). to the videoin-
The terminal "E" of the entrance “b” must tercoms
remain disconnected and insulated, on the
contrary that of entrance “a” must be
connected to the terminals "E" of additional
AG100T’s (if present).
74
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 42MR/2
MULTI-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO TWO EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS
1+1 INTERCOMS
2x
75
Y X F H
Echos
X1 X Exhito
Y1 Y
H H
F F
DV2D Xn 10
DV4D
4
Compact
Y X F H
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Y X F H
X1 Echos
X Exhito
Y1
Y
H
H
F
DV2D F
DV4D 10
4
Y X F H Compact
PRS210 1181E
X F H A C 4
0
0
127V
230V
127V
230V
entrance "b" Xn X3 X2 X2 X3 Xn entrance "a"
AG100T
AG100T
PL2..
PL2.. P P 241DMA
MA2.. MA2..
MD2.. 241DMA
Agorà
P P MD2..
C C 241D
E
7 8 1
P 2 P
9
3
P P
5
C 4 6 C
E 10 E Agorà
Profilo
1 10b 10a 1
A A
S S
PA Mody Profilo
Matrix PA
AG100V AG100V
AG40CED 1473 AG40CED
SE SE
PL4.PED PL4.PED
F F
MA43.ED H 9b 9a H MA43.ED
MD1.ED X 8b 8a X MD1.ED Matrix
MD41D Y 7b 7a Y MD41D
Mody
75
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MR/1
MULTI-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY VIDEO STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON VIDEO
1+1 INTERCOMS
STATION (multiple entrance)

1+X AG100V ... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74
... AG100T 1+X PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1+X MD82÷MD812
... AG21 1+X PL40PCED÷PL42PCED 1+X MAS43CED 1+X MD10ED÷MD12ED
*
... AG222 PL40PED÷PL42PED MAS43ED 1+X MD41D

1+X AG40CED ... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22, MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228
4+1
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50

... 241DMA ... 241DMA ... 241D
VIDEOINTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
... EH9161CT ... EX3100C ... KM8111CW
... EH9161CW ... EX3160C ... KM8111W
... 9083 ... EX3160 ... WB8111
... WA9100T-W ... WB3161
... TA9160 ... TA3160
VARIOUS ARTICLES
X 1473 Exchanger Control switching ON deactivation
1+X 1181E Timed power-supply To activate the control switching ON from the
1+... DV2D-DV4D Video distributors videointercoms only when the system is in stand-by,
1+X PA ** Door release push-button (optional) it is necessary to install a relay (type 1471 or 1472)
1+X SE ** Electric door lock (12VAC-1A) and connect it as shown on the diagram.
... Refers to number of users. to the videoin-
X Refers to number of stairways. tercoms
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
Notes
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations
MODY series with internal devices ECHOS series.
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the installation
instructions and table on pages 50 and 51.
- With Echos videointercoms series it is possible to monitor also the
main entrance by connecting the terminal P1 of the Echos
videointercoms to the terminal “5” of the exchanger art.1473 con-
nected to its own riser and by moving the jumper J2 on the back of the
The main entrance push-button panel must have separate common
videointercoms to the position 2-3 (see on page 4).
terminals. One common terminal for each secondary door station. The
common terminals of push-buttons Profilo and Matrix series can be
Working instructions. separated only module by module.
As the basic system described on page 52, with the following variations: The common terminals of push-button
- The audio-video functions and door lock opening are automatically Common buttons Agorà series can be separated according
switched to the door station which has made the call and remain in this building “a” to the requirements, by cutting
state until a call from another entrance is received. opportunely the common rail or just do
- Services to secondary door stations are independent and can be not using it.
operated at the same time. In Mody series the common terminals
module by module or every 2 push-
Attention. In the door station AG100V of the buttons by cutting opportunely the
secondary entrances create the terminal common rail which connects the
common terminals of push-buttons.
"E" cutting the red wire which connects the
door speaker AG40CED to the backlighting Common of
board (see figure), than connect it to the button 1 and 2
terminals "E" of additional AG100T’s (if To separate
any). common of
buttons cut here
In the door station AG100V of the main
entrance only cut and insulate the conductor Common of
“E” (red wire). Common buttons button 3 and 4
building “b”
76
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MR/1
1+1 INTERCOMS
2x 2x
75W 75W
“A” “B” “ C - D - .. ”
F Y X H F Y X H
Echos X X1 Echos X X1
Y Y1 Y Y1
Compact Compact
F F F F
H H H H
10 xn(A) DV2D 10 xn(B) DV2D
DV4D DV4D
4 4
Exhito Exhito F Y X H Exhito Exhito F Y X H
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
F Y X H F Y X H
Y Y1 Y Y1
Compact Compact
F F F F
H H H H
10 DV2D 10 DV2D
DV4D DV4D
4 4

230V
127V
230V
127V
0
0
1181E 1181E
xn(A) xn(B)
4 F A H C 4 F A H C
x3(A) x3(B)
AG100T AG100T
PL2.. PL2..
241DMA P 241DMA P
MAS2.. MAS2..
241DMA 241DMA
MD2.. P x2(A) MD2.. P x2(B)
241D C
241D C
E E
P P
P 3 10 9 8 P 3 10 9 8
C 4 C 4
Mody Mody
E 7 E 7
1 7b 1 7b
1473 1473
2 2
A 1 A 1
S S
Profilo PA Profilo PA
Matrix Matrix
AG100V AG100V
AG40CED SE AG40CED SE
PL4.PED F
PL4.PED F
MAS43.ED H 8b MAS43.ED H 8b “ C - D - .. ”
X 9b X 9b
MD1.ED MD1.ED
MD41D Y 10b MD41D Y 10b
Agorà Agorà
5 6 7a 8a 9a 10a 5 6 7a 8a 9a 10a
main entrance
xn(C)
AG100T Y1 X2
PL2.. X1 Y2
x1(C)
MAS2.. F
6 (C)
H
MD2.. xn(B)
X DV2D X
Y DV4D Y
xn(A)
A
S PA
AG100V
AG40CED SE
PL4.PED
H
MAS43.ED
F
MD1.ED X
MD41D Y
127V
230V
1181E
0
F A 3+ X C 4 H
77
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MR/2
MULTI-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS ONLY AUDIO AND 1 MAIN
1+1 INTERCOMS
COMMON VIDEO STATION (multiple entrance)

X AG100A 1+X PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1+X MD82÷MD812
... AG100T 1+X PL91÷PL99 * 1+X MA91÷MA93 * 1+X MD92÷MD912 *
... AG20 1 PL40PCED÷PL42PCED 1 MAS43CED 1+X MD10ED÷MD12ED
*

... AG222 X PL10PED÷PL12PED X MAS10PED÷MAS12PED ... MD21÷MD228
4+1
X AG30ED ... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22, MAS24 ... MD20, MD50

1 AG40CED ... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... 241D
... 241DMA ... 241DMA
VIDEOINTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
... EH9161CT ... EX3100C ... KM8111CW
... EH9161CW ... EX3160C ... KM8111W
... 9083 ... EX3160 ... WB8111
... WA9100T-W ... WB3161
... TA9160 ... TA3160
VARIOUS ARTICLES
X 1473 Exchanger
1+X 1181E Timed power-supply
1+... DV2D-DV4D Video distributors
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
Notes
- If it is requested to monitor the main entrance it is necessary to
connect the terminal “4” of the videointercoms to the terminal “5” of
the exchanger art. 1473 connected to its own riser.
The main entrance push-button panel must have separate common
Working instructions. terminals. One common terminal for each secondary door station. The
As the basic system described on page 52, with the following variations: common terminals of push-buttons Profilo and Matrix series can be
- The audio-video functions and door lock opening are automatically separated only module by module.
switched to the door station which has made the call and remain in this The common terminals of push-button
state until a call from another entrance is received. Common buttons Agorà series can be separated according
building “a” to the requirements, by cutting
operated at the same time. opportunely the common rail or just do
not using it.
Common of
any).
To separate
In the door station AG100V of the main common of
entrance only cut and insulate the conductor buttons cut here
“E” (red wire).
Common of
building “b”
78
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MR/2
MULTI-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS ONLY AUDIO AND 1 MAIN
1+1 INTERCOMS
2x 2x
75W 75W
“A” “B” “ C - D - .. ”
F Y X H F Y X H
Y Y1 Y Y1
Compact Compact
F F F F
H H H H
DV4D DV4D
4 4
*
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
F Y X H F Y X H
Y Y1 Y Y1
Compact Compact
F F F F
H H H H
10 DV2D 10 DV2D
DV4D DV4D
4 4

230V
127V
230V
127V
0
0
1181E 1181E
xn(A) xn(B)
4 F A H C 4 F A H C
x3(A) x3(B)
AG100T AG100T
PL2.. PL2..
241DMA P 241DMA P
MAS2.. MAS2..
241DMA 241DMA
MD2.. P x2(A) MD2.. P x2(B)
241D C
241D C
E E
P P
P 3 10 9 8 P 3 10 9 8
C 4 C 4
E 7 E 7
AG100A 1 7b AG100A 1 7b
AG30ED AG30ED
1473 1473
PL1.PED 2 PL1.PED 2
A 1 A 1
MAS1.PED MAS1.PED
S S
MD1.ED PA MD1.ED PA
SE SE
8b 8b “ C - D - .. ”
9b 9b
Agorà Profilo Matrix Mody 10b Agorà Profilo Matrix Mody 10b
5 6 7a 8a 9a 10a 5 6 7a 8a 9a 10a
main entrance
xn(C)
AG100T Y1 X2
PL2.. X1 Y2
x1(C)
MAS2.. F
6 (C)
H
MD2.. xn(B)
X DV2D X
Y DV4D Y
xn(A)
A
S PA
AG100V
AG40CED SE
PL4.PED
H
MAS43.ED
F
MD1.ED X
MD41D Y
127V
230V
1181E
0
F A 3+ X C 4 H
79
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MR/9
ONE-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY VIDEO STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON VIDEO
1+1 INTERCOMS
STATION
MAIN DOOR STATION

... AG20 1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD92÷MD912 *
*

4+1
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50

... 241DMA ... 241DMA ... 241D
VIDEOINTERCOMS
SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS
X AG100V X PL71 X MA71 X MD72

X AG20 X PL91 * X MA91 * X MD91 *
X AG40ED X PL41PCED X MAS43CED X MD41D
PL41PED MAS43ED X MD11ED
INTERNAL STATIONS
... EH9161CT ... EX3100C ... KM8111CW
... EH9161CW ... EX3160C ... KM8111W
... 9083 ... EX3160 ... WB8111
... WA9100T-W ... WB3161
... TA9160 ... TA3160
VARIOUS ARTICLES
X 1473 Exchanger
1+x 1181E Timed power-supply

X Refers to number of stairways.
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
Notes
MODY series with internal devices ECHOS series. Attention. In the door station AG100V it is
- For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the necessary to cut and insulate the red wire
installation instructions on page 50. which connects the door speaker amplifier
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the installation AG40CED to the backlighting board with
instructions and table on pages 50 and 51. diodes and LED’s (see figure).
- The audio-video functions and door lock opening are automatically
switched to the door station which has made the call and remain in this
state until a call from another entrance is received.
80
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MR/9
ONE-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY VIDEO STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON VIDEO
1+1 INTERCOMS
STATION
“A” “B” “ C - D - .. ”
Echos X Echos X
Y Y
*
Compact Compact
F F
H H
10 10
4+1
4 4
Exhito Exhito Exhito Exhito
VIDEOINTERCOMS
230V
127V
230V
127V
0
0
1181E 1181E
C A H F 4 C A H F 4
Matrix D Matrix D
Mody Profilo Mody Profilo
C 13 7 4 5 12 8 9 10 C 13 7 4 5 12 8 9 10
P 3 P 3
1 7b 1 7b
Agorà Agorà
2 2
A 1 A 1
S S
PA 1473 PA 1473
AG100V AG100V
AG40CED SE AG40CED SE
PL41P.ED PL41P.ED
F F
MAS43.ED H 8b MAS43.ED H 8b
MD11ED Y 9b MD11ED Y 9b
MD41D X 10b MD41D X 10b
“ C - D - .. ”
6 7a 8a 9a 10a 6 7a 8a 9a 10a
X1 Y2
Y1 X2
F Y3
H X3
X DV2D Y
Y DV4D X
AG100V
AG40ED 1
AG100T
A
S PA
PL4.PED
PL2..
MAS4.PED SE
MAS2..
H
MD1.ED
F
MD41D
MD2.. X
Y
127V
230V
1181E
0
F A 3+ C- 4 X H
81
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MR/15
ONE-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS ONLY AUDIO AND 1 MAIN COM-
1+1 INTERCOMS
MON VIDEO STATION
MAIN DOOR STATION

... AG20 1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD91÷MD912 *
*

4+1
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50

... 241DMA ... 241DMA ... 241D
VIDEOINTERCOMS
SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS
X AG100A X PL71 X MA71 X MD71

3xX AG20 X PL91 * X MA91 * X MD91 *
X AG30ED X PL11PED X MAS11PED X MD11ED
INTERNAL STATIONS
... EH9161CT ... EX3100C ... KM8111CW
... EH9161CW ... EX3160C ... KM8111W
... 9083 ... EX3160 ... WB8111
... WA9100T-W ... WB3161
... TA9160 ... TA3160
VARIOUS ARTICLES
X 1473 Exchanger
1+x 1181E Timed power-supply

(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
Notes
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations Agorà door stations
- For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the Attention. In the door stations AG100A and
installation instructions on page 50. AG100V it is necessary to cut and insulate
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the installation the red wire which connects the door speaker
instructions and table on pages 50 and 51. amplifier AG30ED or AG40CED to the
backlighting board with diodes and LED’s
Working instructions. (see figure).
82
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MR/15
ONE-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS ONLY AUDIO AND 1 MAIN COM-
1+1 INTERCOMS
MON VIDEO STATION
“A” “B” “ C - D - .. ”
Echos X Echos X
Y Y
*
Compact Compact
F F
H H
10 10
4+1
4 4
Exhito Exhito Exhito Exhito
VIDEOINTERCOMS
230V
127V
230V
127V
0
0
1181E 1181E
C A H F 4 C A H F 4
D D
Profilo Mody Matrix Profilo Mody Matrix
C 7 4 5 11 8 9 10 C 7 4 5 11 8 9 10
P 3 P 3
1 7b 1 7b
Agorà Agorà
2 2
A 1 A 1
S S
AG100A PA 1473 AG100A PA 1473
AG30ED AG30ED
PL11PED SE PL11PED SE
MAS11PED MAS11PED
MD11ED 8b MD11ED 8b
9b 9b
10b 10b
“ C - D - .. ”
6 13 7a 8a 9a 10a 6 13 7a 8a 9a 10a
X1 Y2
Y1 X2
F Y3
H X3
X DV2D Y
Y DV4D X
AG100V
AG40ED 1
AG100T
A
S PA
PL4.PED
PL2..
MAS4.PED SE
MAS2..
H
MD1.ED
F
MD41D
MD2.. X
Y
127V
230V
1181E
0
F A 3+ C- 4 X H
83
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 47MR/1
1+1 INTERCOMS
STATIONS (multiple entrance)

2+X AG100V ... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74
... AG100T 2+X PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 2+X MD82÷MD812
... AG21 2+X PL40PCED÷PL42PCED 2+X MAS43CED 2+X MD10ED÷MD12ED
*
... AG222 PL40PED÷PL42PED MAS43ED 2+X MD41D

2+X AG40CED ... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22, MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228
4+1
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50

... 241DMA ... 241DMA ... 241D
VIDEOINTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
... EH9161CT ... EX3100C ... KM8111CW
... EH9161CW ... EX3160C ... KM8111W
... 9083 ... EX3160 ... WB8111
... WA9100T-W ... WB3161
... TA9160 ... TA3160
VARIOUS ARTICLES
2xX 1473 Exchanger Control switching ON deactivation
1+X 1181E Timed power-supply To activate the control switching ON from the
1 PRS210 Transformer videointercoms only when the system is in stand-by,
2+... DV2D-DV4D Video distributors it is necessary to install a relay (type 1471 or 1472)
2+X PA ** Door release push-button (optional) and connect it as shown on the diagram.
to the videoin-
... Refers to number of users. tercoms
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
Notes
- With Echos videointercoms series it is possible to monitor also the (DS1)
main entrances by connecting the terminals P1 and P2 of the Echos
videointercoms respectively to the terminals “6” and “3” of the
exchanger art. 1473 (DS2) connected to its own riser and by moving The main entrance push-button panel must have separate common
the jumper J2 on the back of the videointercoms to the position 2-3 terminals. One common terminal for each secondary door station. The
(see on page 4). common terminals of push-buttons Profilo and Matrix series can be
Working instructions. The common terminals of push-button
Common buttons Agorà series can be separated according
As the basic system described on page 52, with the following variations: building “a” to the requirements, by cutting
not using it.
- Services to secondary door stations are independent and can be In Mody series the common terminals
operated at the same time. of push-buttons can be separated
module by module or every 2 push-
Agorà door stations buttons by cutting opportunely the
common rail which connects the
Attention. In the door station AG100V of the common terminals of push-buttons.
secondary entrances create the terminal "E"
Common of
cutting the red wire which connects the door button 1 and 2
speaker AG40CED to the backlighting board
To separate
(see figure), than connect it to the terminals common of
"E" of additional AG100T’s (if any). buttons cut here
In the door station AG100V of the main
entrances only cut and insulate the conductor Common of
“E” (red wire).
building “b”
84
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 47MR/1
1+1 INTERCOMS
STATIONS (multiple entrance) 2x 2x
75W 75W
“A” “B” “ C - D - .. ”
F Y X H F Y X H
Y Y1 Y Y1
Compact Compact
F F F F
H H H H
DV4D DV4D
4 4
*
4+1
F Y X H F Y X H
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Y Y1 Y Y1
Compact Compact
F F F F
H H H H
10 DV2D 10 DV2D
DV4D DV4D
4 4

230V
127V
230V
127V
0
0
1181E 1181E
secondary entrance secondary entrance
"a" xn(A) "b" xn(B)
4 F A H C 4 F A H C
x3(A) x3(B)
AG100T AG100T
PL2.. P PL2.. P
MA2.. MAS2..
MD2.. MD2..
241D.. 241D..
P x2(A) P x2(B)
C C
E E
P P
P 3 10 9 8 P 3 10 9 8
C 4 C 4
Profilo E 7 Profilo E 7
AG100V 1 7b AG100V 1 7b
AG40CED 1473 AG40CED 1473
PL4.PED 2 (DS1) PL4.PED 2 (DS1)
MAS43.ED A 1 MAS43.ED A 1
MD1.ED S MD1.ED S
MD41D PA MD41D PA
Matrix Matrix
SE SE
F F
H 8b H 8b “ C - D - .. ”
X 9b X 9b
Mody Y 10b Mody Y 10b
Agorà Agorà
6 5 7a 8a 9a 10a 6 5 7a 8a 9a 10a
4 5 7 8 9 10 2 1 4 5 7 8 9 10
1 1473 1473
2 (DS2) (DS2)
6 7a 8a 9a 10a 10b 9b 8b 7b 3 6 7a 8a 9a 10a 10b 9b 8b 7b 3
Y1 X2
X1 Y2
F X3
main entrance "1" H Y3
X DV2D X
Y DV4D Y
xn(C)
x1(C)
X1 Y2
main entrance "2"
6 (C)
Y1 X2
xn(B) xn(C)
F Y3
H X3
x1(C)
Y DV2D Y
3 (C)
X DV4D X
xn(A) xn(A) xn(B)
AG100T
PL2..
MAS2..
MD2..
1 1 AG100T
PL2..
MAS2..
A A MD2..
S PA S
AG100V PA
AG40CED AG100V
PL4.PED SE AG40CED
SE PL4.PED
MAS43.ED
MD1.ED MAS43.ED
H H MD1.ED
MD41D F F MD41D
X X
Y Y
127V
230V
127V
230V
1181E
0
PRS210
A F 4 H C- 3+ X
Agorà Profilo Matrix Mody Mody Matrix Profilo Agorà
85
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 411R/1
ONE-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM
1+1 INTERCOMS
X
Y
H
F
X
Y
H
F
P 10
C 4
*
E
1
4+1
Echos
A Compact Exhito Exhito
VIDEOINTERCOMS
S
PA
SE
A F C H 4
Matrix
Mody 1181E
Agorà
0
230V
127V
Profilo

1 AG100V 1 PL71 1 MA71 1 MD72
1 AG21 1 PL81 1 MAS61 (1) 1 MD82
1 AG20 1 PL91 * 1 MA91 * 1 MD92 *
1 AG40CED 1 PL41PCED 1 MAS43CED 1 MD11ED
PL41PED MAS43ED 1 MD41D
INTERNAL STATIONS
1 EH9161CT 1 EX3100C 1 KM8111CW
EH9161CW EX3160C KM8111W
1 9083 EX3160 1 WB8111
1 WA9100T-W 1 WB3161
1 TA9160 1 TA3160
VARIOUS ARTICLES
(1) Or MA61.
Notes
- For wires dimensioning refer to the installation instructions and table on pages 50.
Agorà door station
Note. Door station AG100V do not have the terminal "E" because the requested connection is automatically done inserting the pre-assembled
cable which comes with the product (see drawing 5a on page 18).
86
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Additional diagrams for systems NOT intercommunicating
All videointercom installation diagrams in this technical manual are drawn with only one video intercom for each user. It is possible to “personalise”
1+1 INTERCOMS
the installation by properly matching the applications on the following pages to the basic diagrams. To obtain the requested wiring diagram it is
necessary overlay the desired application diagram on the “basic” diagram in order to cover the existing videointercom (VC1 will replace the
videointercom of the basic diagram). More than one application diagram can be overlaid on a multi-ways diagram.
a) Application of 3 videointercoms and 1 intercom in parallel b) Application of 2 videointercoms and 1 inter-

com in parallel
VC1 VC2 VC3 VC1 VC2
*
X X X CT X X CT
Y Y Y
Y Y
H H H
H H
4+1
F F F 3
1 F F 3
10 10 10
4 4 4 10 10 1
4 4 EX311
EX311 KM811 KM811
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Echos
Compact
1281 Echos
EX321 Compact Exhito Exhito

1P H 1M PT511E EX321 PT511E
0
A A 127V
RL37D Exhito Exhito
IV I 230V
c) Application of 1 videointercom and 3 intercoms in parallel d) Application of 1 videointercom and 2 inter-

coms in parallel
VC1 VC1
X CT1 CT2 CT3 X

Y CT1 CT2
Y
H H
F 3 3 3 F 3 3
10 1 1 1 10 1 1
4 4
Echos
Compact Echos
PRS210 Compact
EX311 EX321 KM811 PT511E EX311 EX321 KM811 PT511E
1P 1M
0
A 127V
Exhito Exhito RL37D
230V Exhito Exhito
e) Floor call (for intercom and videointercom sys-

List of the additional devices needed to carry out the installation diagrams tems) FP
reported in this page A1
In all the diagrams floor push-
Diagram Videointercoms + Intercoms Power Supplementary shown in this manual button
accessories supplies call module (except intercom-
municating devices
2 EH9161 + 2 9083 1 EX311 Exhito and Compact
"a" 2 EX3100 + 2 WB3161 1 EX321 1 1281 1 RL37D series) it is possible
2 EX3160 + 2 WB3161 1 KM811 to have a floor call Echos Compact
feature with different
2 KM8111 + 2 WB8111 1 PT511E
ringing tone from the
1 EH9161 + 1 9083 1 EX311 door station call,
FP
"b" 1 EX3100 + 1 WB3161 1 EX321 using the art. RL37D. A1
1 EX3160 + 1 WB3161 1 KM811 floor push-

1 KM8111 + 1 WB8111 1 PT511E button
3 EX311 Exhito Exhito

"c" 3 EX321 1 PRS210 1 RL37D
3 KM811
3 PT511E
PRS210
CP
2 EX311 A 230V
"d" 2 EX321 127V
0
2 KM811 RL37D
2 PT511E
"e" 1 PRS210 1 RL37D Note.

To get a different ringing tone, move the jumper J2,
Select the desired model among those listed
located inside the art. RL37D, from position 1-2 to
position 2-3.
87
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 411R/41 Additional diagrams for one-way intercommunicating systems
ONE-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING SERVICE BETWEEN 2 VIDEOINTERCOMS

1+1 INTERCOMS
J1= 2-3 Echos series

P1
1P 1M 10 10
X X X
Y Y Y
H HP HM H H
F F F F
C 4P 4M 4 4
E 7 C C
X 9R P1
*
1
P1 9R
A
V+ V+
4+1
A
1443ED
S
PA
VIDEOINTERCOMS
0
127V Echos Echos
SE A F C H 4 230V
Matrix
0 J12 = 1-2
127V
Mody 230V 1181E PRS210
Agorà Profilo
Compact series
J1= 2-3
1P 1M 10 10
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS X X
Y Y
series AGORA' PROFILO MATRIX MODY HP HM H H
F F F
1 AG100V 1 PL71 1 MA71 1 MD72 4P 4M 4 4
1 AG21 1 PL81 1 MAS61 (1) 1 MD82 7 PC PC
1 AG20 1 PL91 * 1 MA91 * 1 MD92 * X A1 P
1 AG40CED 1 PL41PCED 1 MAS43CED 1 MD11ED P A1
A
PL41PED MAS43ED 1 MD41D
1443ED
INTERNAL STATIONS
0
series ECHOS EXHITO COMPACT 127V Compact Compact
230V
2 EH9161CT 2 EX3100C 2 KM8111CW J1= 1-2
EH9161CW EX3160C KM8111W PRS210
2 9083 EX3160 2 WB8111
2 WA9100T-W 2 WB3161 Exhito series
2 TA9160 2 TA3160
J1= 2-3
1P 1M 10 10
VARIOUS ARTICLES X X
Y Y
1 1181E Timed power-supply HP HM H H
1 1443ED Switcher module for intercommunicating system F F F
1 PRS210 Transformer 4P 4M 4 4
1 PA ** Door release push-button (optional) 7 1C 1C
X A1 P1
P1 A1
A
(1) Or MA61.
* Rain shelters are used instead of back boxes and hood covers. 1443ED
0
Exhito Exhito
127V
Working instructions. See page 52. 230V
J1= 1-2
Notes PRS210
- Move jumper J1, on the wall brackets WB3161 and WB8111 from position 2-3 to
position 1-2 J1= 2-3 Exhito series
- Move jumper J12, on the back of Echos videointercoms to short circuits pin 1-2. 1P 1M 10
- Set jumper J1, inside art.1443ED to position 2-3. X
- Instead a videointercom it is possible to install an intercom EX311, EX321 or Y
HP HM H
KM811 wired as reported in the last example of this page.
F F 1
- Door station AG100V do not have the terminal "E" because the requested 4P 4M 4 3
connection is automatically done inserting the pre-assembled cable which comes 7 1C C
with the product (see drawing 5a on page 18) X A1 P
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations MODY series P1 A1
A
with internal devices ECHOS series.
- For wires dimensioning refer to the installation instructions and table on page 50. 1443ED
0
Exhito Exhito
127V
230V J1= 1-2
PRS210
88
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Additional diagrams for two-way intercommunicating systems Si 412R/18
TWO-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING SERVICE BETWEEN 2 APARTMENTS
1+1 INTERCOMS
J1= 1-2 Echos series
P2
P1
10 10
X X X
Y Y Y
H HP HM H H
F F F F
C 4P 4M 4 4
E 1M 7 C C
*
1 1P X 9R P1
P1 9R
A
4+1
V+ V+
A
1443ED
S
PA
VIDEOINTERCOMS
0
127V Echos Echos
SE A F C H 4 230V
0
127V
J12 = 1-2
230V 1181E PRS210
Matrix Agorà Mody Profilo
series AGORA' PROFILO MATRIX MODY

1 AG100V 1 PL71 1 MA72 1 MD72 J1= 1-2
2 AG21 1 PL81 1 MAS62 (1) 1 MD82 Compact series
1 AG40CED 1 PL91 * 1 MA92 * 1 MD92 *
1 PL42PCED 1 MAS43CED 1 MD12ED 10 10
PL42PED MAS43ED 1 MD41D X X
1 MAS22 Y Y
1 241DMA HP HM H H
F F F
4P 4M 4 4
INTERNAL STATIONS
1M 7 PC PC
series ECHOS EXHITO COMPACT 1P X A1 P
P A1
2 EH9161CT 2 EX3100C 2 KM8111CW A
EH9161CW EX3160C KM8111W
1443ED
2 9083 EX3160 2 WB8111
2 WA9100T-W 2 WB3161
2 TA9160 2 TA3160 0
127V Compact Compact
230V
VARIOUS ARTICLES J1= 1-2
PRS210
1 1443ED Switcher module for intercommunicating system
J1= 1-2 Exhito series
(1) Or MA62.
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. 10 10
X X
Working instructions. See page 52. Y Y
HP HM H H
F F F
Notes
4P 4M 4 4
- Move jumper J1, on the wall brackets WB3161 and WB8111 from position 2-3 to 1M 7 1C 1C
position 1-2 1P X A1 P1
- Move jumper J12, on the back of Echos videointercoms to short circuits pin 1-2. P1 A1
A
- Set jumper J1, inside art.1443ED to position 1-2.
- In the door station AG100V cut the red wire to create the terminal “E” (see drawing 1443ED
5b on page 18).
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations MODY series 0
Exhito Exhito
with internal devices ECHOS series. 127V
230V
- For wires dimensioning refer to the installation instructions and table on page 50. J1= 1-2
PRS210
89
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 414R/8 Multi-way intercommunicating systems
MULTI-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM WITH A DOOR STATION AND SOME APARTMENTS WITH INTERCOM-
1+1 INTERCOMS
MUNICATING SERVICE

... AG20 1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD91÷MD912 *
... AG21 1 PL40PCED÷PL42PCED 1 MAS43ED÷MAS43CED 1 MD10ED÷MD12ED
*
... AG222 PL40PED÷PL42PED ... MAS22, MAS24 1 MD41D

1 AG40CED ... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS20 ... MD21÷MD228
4+1
... PL20, PL50 ... 241DMA ... MD20, MD50

... 241DMA ... 241D
VIDEOINTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS (see the list on the bottom of this page)
COMMON VARIOUS ARTICLES (for all the specific devices to be installed in the intercommunicating apartments see the detailed list on the
bottom of this page)
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
Notes
In the multi-apartment diagram are shown 3 different examples of connection for the intercommunicating
service.
(A) Intercommunicating service between (B) Intercommunicating service in the (C) Intercommunicating service in the
2 apartments with videointercoms same apartment among 2 videointer- same apartment between 2 videoin-
Echos, Exhito and/or Compact series coms and 1 intercom Exhito series tercoms Echos
Echos Exhito Compact Exhito Echos

2 EH9161 2 EX3100 2 KM8111W 2 EX3160 1 EX321 2 EH9161
2 9083 EX3160 2 WB8111 2 WB3161 1 EX301 2 9083
2 WA9100 2 WB3161 1 1443ED 2 TA3160 1 1443ED
2 TA9160 2 TA3160 1 PRS210 1 1443ED 1 PRS210
1 1443ED 1 1443ED 1 PRS210
1 PRS210 1 PRS210
Notes: Notes:
Notes: - Set jumper J1, inside art.1443ED to position - Set jumper J1, inside art.1443ED to position
- In the art. 1443ED move the jumper J1 from 2-3. 2-3.
the position 2-3 to the position 1-2. - Move jumper J1, on the wall brackets WB3161 - Move jumper J12, on the back of ECHOS
- Move jumper J1, on the wall brackets WB3161 from position 2-3 to position 1-2 videointercoms to short circuits pin 1-2.
and WB8111 from position 2-3 to position 1-
2
- Move jumper J12, on the back of ECHOS
videointercoms to short circuits pin 1-2.
Notes for intercommunicating functions

To make an intercommunicating call it is necessary:
- with the videointercom switched OFF, pick up the handset (or press the button for Echos series) and be sure that there are not any other
communications in progress;
- press the push-button related to the videointercom or intercom to be called.
To hear the ringing tone, the called videointercom or intercom must have the handset correctly hooked in its place (no unhooked).
Read also the operating notes on page 52.
90
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 414R/8
MULTI-WAY VIDEOINTERCOM SYSTEM WITH A DOOR STATION AND SOME APARTMENTS WITH INTERCOM-
1+1 INTERCOMS
MUNICATING SERVICE
KM8111+ EX3160+
WB8111 WB3161 EH9161+
9083
(WA9100) 2x
(TA9160) 75W
(B)
J1= 2-3 J1 = 1-2
Y X F H
X X X X1 X1 X X
Y Y Y Y1 Y1 Y Y
H H H H H HP HM H H
*
F F F F F F F F
10 10 10 X4 4P 4M 4 4 3
4 4 4 DV2D 1P 1M 10 10 1
4+1
PC 1C C DV4D Y X F H 7 1C 1C C
A1 A1 9R X A1 P1 P
A
P P1 P1 P1 A1 P2
V+ P2 P2 A1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
J1 = 1443ED EX3160+ EX3160+ EX321+
WB3161 WB3161 EX301
1-2 J12=1-2 0
127V
EX3100+ 230V
WB3161
PRS210
KM8111+ EX3160+
WB8111 WB3161 EH9161+
9083
(WA9100)
(TA9160)
(C)
J12=1-2
Y X F H J1= 2-3
X X X X1 X1 X X
Y Y Y Y1 Y1 Y Y
H H H H H HP HM H H
F F F F F F F F
10 10 10 X3 4P 4M 4 4
4 4 4 1P 1M 10 10
DV2D
PC 1C C DV4D Y X F H 7 C C
A1 A1 9R X V+ V+
A
P P1 P1 9R P1
V+ P1 9R
J1 = 1443ED EH9161+ EH9161+
9083 9083
1-2 J12=1-2 0 (WA9100) (WA9100)
127V (TA9160) (TA9160)
EX3100+ 230V
WB3161
PRS210
0
A X 7 4M HM 4P
127V
HP
230V
F
1P 1M
PRS210
1443ED
1181E
X3 X4
(A) J1= 1-2
4
AG100T
F H A C
PL2..
P 241DMA
MAS2..
241DMA
0
230V
127V
P MD2..
C
241D
E
P
C
E Mody
1
A
S
PA AG100V
AG40ED Matrix Profilo
SE
PL4.PED
H MAS4.PED
F
MD1.ED
X MD41D
Y
Agorà
91
(MT11 - Gb2012)
92
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERCOMS AND VIDEOINTERCOMS
TRADITIONAL
INDEX Page
Internal stations 94
- Echos series videointercoms 94
- Exhito series videointercoms 97
- Exhito series intercoms 98
- Compact series videointercoms 100
- Compact series intercoms 102
- Project series intercoms 102
- Studio series intercoms 103
- Studio series videointercoms 107
External door stations 113

- Profilo series push-button panels 113
- Matrix series push-button panels 122
- Mody series push-button panels 129
- UP series push-button panels 139
- ErreP/R series push-button panels 140
Power supplies 141

Service modules 142
Installation instructions 146
Intercom installation diagrams 151

- Working instructions 183
- Troubleshooting 184
Videointercom installation diagrams 185

- Working instructions 218
- Troubleshooting 218
93
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS ECHOS SERIES
VIDEOINTERCOMS 16 How to select the function for buttons from 1 to 6
4+1 INTERCOMS
5
/8”
Buttons from 1 to 6 can be used for several functions, that is:
- intercommunicating calls;
- control switching ON of the video intercom when more than one
external door station or extra surveillance cameras are present on the
103 system;
4 1/16” - free voltage contacts for supplementary functions.
ATTENTION. The common contacts of the buttons are only two: one for
the buttons 1 and 2, the other for the buttons 3,4,5 and 6, so at least only
*
two of the three possible different operations described before can be

achieved at the same time. When the buttons are used for
7+1
208 26 intercommunicating calls or videointercom control switching ON the

8 3/16” 1” terminals 1C and 2C must remain unconnected.
VIDEOINTERCOMS
EH9100CW. Hands Free Colour Video Intercom with audio- Model Buttons Jumpers Position Function
video privacy, 4 types of calls, 14 differentiated programmable ring
tones, audio, contrast, and brightness adjustment. White colour. Com- 1-2 not used
plete with 6 keys for monitor control switching-on, door lock opening, EH9100C 1, 2 J5 2-3 (*) control switching ON
intercom calls and supplementary services. It can be installed on the wall free free contacts (common 1C)
by using the back box art.9083 or wall adaptor WA9100W.
1, 2 J5 1-2 (*) intercommunicating calls
EH9160CW. It differs from the model EH9100CW for the presence EH9160C 2-3 control switching ON
of additional 4 buttons and the possibility to realize systems with 3, 4, 5, 6 J6 free free contacts (common 2C)
intercommunicating service.
EH9160CT. Hands-free videointercom with same features of the (*) Factory setting
J6 J5
model EH9160CW but in metallized grey colour finish. It can be installed
on the wall by using the back box art.9083 or wall adaptor WA9100T. 1-2
Technical characteristics Intercommunicating calls
3 2 1 3 2 1
Power supply: 18÷24Vdc
Operating current: 0.3A 3 3
Screen: 3.5" LCD 2-3 2

1
2
1
J6 J5
Television standard: PAL Control switching ON
Horizontal frequency: 15625Hz 3 2 1 3 2 1
Vertical frequency: 50Hz
Band width: >5MHz Free
Video signal on 75Ω: 0.8÷1.5Vpp Free contacts -
Starting up time: 1 second
Number of bell rings: 2 (programmable) commons 1C and 2C 3 2 1 3 2 1
Operating temperature: 0°÷+50°C

Maximum admissible humidity: 90%RH
Installation and settings
Terminals For installation and display adjustment see the pages 5 and 6.
X Video signal input-output
M Video ground (shielded coaxial) Supplementary functions
F General ground
H Positive voltage input (18÷24Vdc) Floor call
1 Microphone output
2 Speaker and automatic switching OFF input For floor call feature make the connection as reported on page 221.
3 Audio ground
4 Control switching ON – button Door-open’s warning and other functions
5 Door lock release - button For door-open’s warning or other similar functions connect a normally
8 Positive power supply output for video distributors 12Vdc closed contact (NC) of a sensor or a relay between the terminal L+ of the
9M Call input from external door station videointercom and terminal X of power supply 1282E or 1281E .
9R* Electronic call input from other intercommunicating devices
X* Positive voltage input for intercommunicating devices (15÷18Vdc)
CP Electronic floor-call input
L+ LED for open-door signalling or other functions Orange
1C Common contact for buttons P1 and P2
P1 - P2 Service buttons (max 50mA)
Closed contact the orange LED is
E 2C* Common contact for buttons P3, P4, P5 and P6
P3 ÷ P6* Service buttons (max 50mA) F L+ X ON.
C* Common contact for P1÷P6; only for intercommunicating service)
EH9100 1281E Open contact the orange LED is
C * Terminals only on the models EH9160CT and EH9160CW EH9160 1282E OFF.
H
9083. Back-box for video intercoms EH9160CT and EH9160CW.
O C P P P P 2
6 5 4 3 C
P P 1 L C X
2 1 C + P
9 9 8 5 4 3
R M
2 1 H F V M V
R45
WA9100T. Wall adaptor for the EH9160CT videointercom.

S WA9100W. Wall adaptor for the EH9160CW videointercom.
C P P P P 2
6 5 4 3 C
P P 1 L C X
2 1 C + P
9 9 8 5 4 3
R M
2 1 H F V M V EH9160C TA9160 . Table adapter for Echos videointercoms. Complete with
junction box and 2.4m connection cable with 20 wires.
P P 1 L C 9 8 5 4 3 2 1 H F V M V EH9100C
2 1 C + P M
94
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
4+1 INTERCOMS
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Characteristics
conversation with an external door station 13 Orange LED. The LED lights-up when at
1 Image brightness adjustment .
or another intercommunicating equipment; the terminal L+ is connected a positive
- the videointercom is in programming op- voltage (8÷12Vdc). To signal an open-door
2 Loudspeaker. It allows to hear the conver- eration mode when it is continuously lit-up. state it is necessary to install to the door a
sation and to receive the calls from the proper sensor whose contacts must be a
external door station, from other intercom- 9 Audio communication button . It al- normally closed type (see page 94).
municating equipments or from local door lows to enable the audio communication
station. with the door station or another intercom 14 3.5" Colour LCD Display.
after receiving a call or a control switching
3 Call and communication volume adjust- ON operation ( ). The audio communi-
ment . 15 Jumpers for programming buttons 1 to
cation is end pressing again the button or if
6.
the communication time expires.
4 Microphone. It allows to talk with the door
station or with other intercommunicating 16 Microphone sensitivity adjustment
10 Buttons 3,4,5 and 6 are available for supple-
equipments MIC.SENS.
mentary services. These buttons are
present only on the model EH9160C.
5 Green LED. The LED shows: After positioning properly the jumper J6 17 Colour adjustment .
- a communication in progress when it they can be used for:
lights up continuously; - intercommunicating calls; 18 Contrast adjustment .
- an intercommunicating call when it flashes. - control switching ON function for multiple
entrance systems;
- as free voltage contacts (max 50mA). Adjustment of the microphone ampli-
6 Control switching ON button . It al- fier .
lows to power ON the video intercom and
monitoring the entrance.
time. 15 16 17 18
7 Mute button . It allows to:
- enable/disable the audio (microphone) 11 Lock release button . It allows to oper-
to the door station during a conversation; ate the electric lock release either with the
- enable/disable the bell rings if pressed video intercom in ON or OFF state.
for less then 2 seconds after receiving a
call or making a control switching ON func- E
tion; 12 Buttons 1 and 2 are available for supple-
- enter/exit the programming mode if mentary services. After positioning prop-
erly the jumper J5 they can be used for:
C
pressed for more than 2 seconds.
8 Red LED. The LED shows:

- intercommunicating calls (only for
EH9160C);
H
- control switching ON function for multiple
- temporary disabling of audio when it con-
tinuously lights-up. If audio is enabled again
entrance systems; O
- as free voltage contacts (max 50mA). 3 3
the LED recover the previous operating
mode;
2
1
J6 J5
2
1 C P P P P 2
6 5 4 3 C
P P
2 1 S
- bell rings disabling. The LED flashes used for one of the functions listed above at
when a call is received and during the time.
95
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
ADJUSTMENTS
4+1 INTERCOMS
function and increase the other one by to the door station, but continuing hearing the
acting on the button or on the trimmer audio from the door station press shortly the
Brightness adjustment.
With the video intercom switched ON, press of the videointercom. button ; in this status the red LED will light
-Attention. For a better setting of the audio up continuously. To restore the audio to the
left and right the button to adjust the
levels on the video intercom adjust the door station press again the button ; the
brightness of the image. To store the current microphone sensitivity of the door station to red LED will recover the previous status. To
setting press the button . The pressure of the minimum value and the loudspeakers end the communication and switch OFF the
this button switches OFF the video intercom. volume to an intermediate value. video intercom press the button . The
-If there are intercommunicating devices
video intercom switches OFF automatically
*
Colour and Contrast adjustment. adjust also their audio levels.

when the communication time expires or if
The trimmers are located on the back of the
7+1
from the door station a call to another user is

video intercom and can be operated by made.
means of a small screwdriver. To adjust the PROGRAMMING
trimmers is required:
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Control switching ON
- dismount the video intercom from the wall to To enter the programming mode it is required: The button and the buttons numbered
accede to the adjustment points; from 1 to 6, if present and correctly
-to switch ON the video intercom pressing the
- power ON the video intercom; programmed (see table on the previous
button .
- insert the screwdriver in the hole marked pages), allow to display the images (without
-to keep pressed for more than 2 seconds the
with the symbol of the adjustment required; audio) of the entrances presents in the system.
- rotate the screwdriver clock or anti-clock buttons ; a beep will confirm the correct
operation and the red LED lights up. To get also the audio it is sufficient to press the
wise to find the desired image quality; button . Press it again to switch OFF the
- fix again the video intercom to the wall.
Number of rings of the bell (external and video intercom.
Enabling, disabling and volume of the intercommunicating calls) Control switching ON is allowed only when the
ringing sound. After entering the programming mode it is system is in stand-by mode (no running
When you receive a call from the door station necessary: communications); if, pressing the control
or from another intercommunicating - to press the button to verify the number switching ON buttons, the video intercom
equipment it is possible to adjust the level of of the rings currently programmed; doesn’t switch ON a communication between
the ringing sound pressing left and right the - to press left and right the button to another user and the door station could be
button . To store the current setting press respectively increase or decrease the active.
the button . number of rings. After each pressure of the
button the selected number of rings will be Door lock release
To disable the ringing sound it is necessary,
heard; To operate the electric door lock release
during a receiving call, to press momentarily
- please keep the button pushed for more press the button independently if the
the button ; the red LED flashes during the
than 2 seconds or wait for the end of the video intercom is switched ON or OFF. If the
call and the conversation. system has more door stations the electric
The status (enabled or disabled) and the level programming time in order to make the
changes confirmed and exit from the op- door lock release of the door station from
of the ringing sound are stored and they are which the last call has been made or to which
used for next calls. If the ringing sound is eration.
a control switching ON has been directed will
disabled during a receiving call or during a be activated.
communication the red LED will flash to Ringer tone selection (call from door station)
indicate this status, but no LED indication will Once entering into programming mode, it is
necessary: Intercommunicating Call (only EH9160C)
be present in stand-by mode. With the model Pressing one of the buttons set to make
EH9160, after connecting a positive 15- - to push the button in order to check the
intercommunicating calls the audio of the
18Vdc to the terminal X it will be possible to ringer tone now programmed; calling video intercom will be enabled and the
have the LED indication of the disabled - to push laterally (left or right side) the green LED lights UP, the called video intercom
ringing sound also with the video intercom in button to select the previous or next ringer rings with a different sound with respect to the
stand-by mode. tone; call received from the external door station;
- after having selected the favourite ringer the green LED flashes for all the call time and
Setting of the audio volume
tone, keep the button pushed for more lights up continuously when the
- With the video intercom switched ON, press
than 2 seconds or wait for the end of the communication is enabled. If the ringing
the button to enable the communication.
E To set the receiving audio level (loudspeaker)
programming time to make the changes
confirmed and exit from the operation.
sound has been disabled also the red LED will
flash. Press the button to enable the
press left and right the button . To store
C the selected level press the button . The
communication with the calling equipment. To
end the communication press the button .
pressure of this button switches OFF the OPERATIONS
H video intercom.
The communication will also end when the
communication time expires or if there is a
- If required the communication the audio is
O intermittent or distorted it is advisable to
adjust the microphone sensitivity by acting
Call from the door station
Making a call from the door station the video
call from the external door station.
intercom will ring (according to the

S on the trimmer located on the back of the
video intercom.
programming) or the red LED starts flashing
if the bell rings has been disabled; on the
- In case of incorrect automatic switching of display appears the image of the calling
the video intercom between talk and listening station. To start the communication press the
function decrease the level of the preferred button . If it is desired to disable the audio
96
(MT11 - Gb2012)
VIDEOINTERCOMS WB3160. Wall bracket for EX3100C, EX3160 and EX3160C
4+1 INTERCOMS
video intercoms with terminal boards for connection to the system.
62 211 Terminals
2 7/16" 8 5/16" V Video signal input-output
M Video ground (shielded coaxial)
F General ground
H Positive voltage input (18÷24Vdc)
1 Microphone output
2 Speaker and automatic switching OFF input
218 3 Audio ground
8 9/16" 4 Control switching ON (button )
*
5 Door lock release - button
8 Positive power supply output for video distributors 12Vdc
7+1
9M Call input from external door station
9R Electronic call input from other intercommunicating devices
1C Common contact for P1, P2, P3 (P2-P3 only for EX3160, EX3160C)
VIDEOINTERCOMS
P1 Service button (max 0.3A)
P2 ÷ P5 (*) Service buttons (max 0.3A)
2C (*) Common contact for buttons P4 and P5
EX3160. White Flat video intercom with private L1+ (*) Positive power supply input for red Led (+12Vdc)
L1- (*) Negative power supply input for red Led
audio-video function, electronic microphone, dif-
L+ Not connected
ferentiated double electronic ringing sounds
(modulated and continuous) and terminal board (*) Not connected in EX3100C videointercom.
for the connection to the wall bracket. Equipped 152
with led's and 2 buttons for camera control switch Installation 6"
ON and door-open. Together with the videointer-
com there are 5 extra buttons which can be
assembled in the proper slots (see page 10). 3
2
1
J1
The video intercom can be fixed to the wall (flush-

mounted) with the WB3160 bracket. R1
V
M
V
9R
8
Technical data 5
4
3
Power supply 12÷15Vdc 2

1
9M 186
F
Operating current 0.4A H
P1 7 5 /16"
Monitor 4" FLAT CRT 1C
P2
P3
P4
TV standard CCIR-625 lines P5
2C
L1+

P6
L1-
P6
L+
L2+
Frame frequency 50Hz L2-

L3+
L3-
Bandwidth >5MHz R+
R-
Video signal on 75Ω 0.8÷1.5Vpp

Switching ON time 2 seconds
Maximum permissible humidity 90%RH
EX3160C. Version of EX3160 video intercom - This area has to be free; remove possible
with colour LCD. 140 ÷ 150 cm present cables.
4 7" 4 11"
EX3100C. It is differ- Fix the wall bracket by using 3 expansion plugs.
ent from the model Don't shut the 3 screws of fixing if the wall is
EX3160C because of irregular.
the lack of LED’s and It is suggested to use a wall box to contain the
for the reduced number
of buttons (only 3 for
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa extra wires.
electrical lock release,

monitoring and supple- TA3160 . Table adaptor for Exhito video- Note.
mentary functions). intercoms with weighted base, junction box For the installation of the videointercom and
and 2.4m connection cable with 20 wires. mounting of additional buttons, see pages 9
and 10. E
Technical data
Choosing the private conversation or intercommunicating service X
Operating current
Screen
0.4A
4" LCD H
TV standard PAL
Line frequency
Frame frequency
15625Hz
50Hz
1-2 = Video intercom without audio pri-
vacy
I
Bandwidth
Video signal on 75Ω
>5MHz
0.8÷1.5Vpp T
Switching ON time 1 second 2-3 = Video intercom with audio privacy
Maximum permissible humidity
0°÷+50°C
90%RH
O
97
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERCOMS
4+1 INTERCOMS
Wall version
62 65
2 7/16" 2 9/16"
*
218 172.5
6 13 /16"
8 9/16"
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
EX310. White electronic intercom with two

push-buttons, spiral cord, electronic micro-
phone and possibility to insert an additional
EX301 push-button and a SR41, RL36 or
EX304 module (description and characteris-
tics of the modules on page 13). Wall-mount-
able with expansion plugs or wall box.
172.5
Terminals 6 13 /16"
1 Microphone
2 Loudspeaker
3 Ground
5 Door release button (max 1A)
0 Common button (connected to terminal
3 with jumper W1)
C Common contact for 1 push-button
9 Electronic call input
P Service push-button (max 1A)
Accessories
EX301. Single button module for Exhito

For higher currents use a relay. EX301
Note. For easier reference the 2 terminals of
the module are defined as C and P, but they
have no polarity and can be inverted.
EX304. Additional loudspeaker module.

See page 13. SR41 or
E RL36 or
RL 36. Relay module. See page 99. EX304
X
SR41. Electronic buzzer module.
H See page 13.
I P C
33
7 1
T 6 A
1
98
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERCOMS
TA320. Table adaptor with weighted base,
4+1 INTERCOMS
Table version
junction box and 2.4m connection cable with 20
wires.
Remove the cover of the junction

box and connect wires to the termi-
nals matching the colour of wire with
that of the label. Write in the proper
*
space the code of the connection.
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
EX320. White colour intercom for 4+1 inter-
com systems and intercommunicating systems
connected to 1 or more external door stations.
Complete with spiral cord, electronic micro-
phone and 2 buttons extendable to 8 by adding
the EX301 single button module.
Possibility of inserting modules EX304,
EX332, ST703, SR41, RL36 and SM50E.
Wall-mountable with expansion plugs or wall RL 36. Relay module. When installed inside Additional bell connection
box or on the desk using the table adaptor intercoms it allows to activate additional bells. If the ringing volume is not sufficient or if you
TA320. Maximum switching current is 1A (24V). need to chime the call in a different place, you
can add an additional bell enabled by a relay.
Terminals Terminals
1 Microphone C common terminal of relay
NA normally open contact of relay
2 Loudspeaker
NC normally closed contact of relay
3 Ground
5 Door release button (max 1A) - ground
0 Common button (connected to terminal 13Vac/dc voltage input
3 with jumper W1) EC relay activation input (ground command)
C Common contact for 1 push-button 9
9 Electronic call input Wires
P Service push-button (max 1A) 9 electronic call in- NA NC 3
put without resis- 9
tive load
Installation 3 ground
For wall installation of the intercom see to intercom
3
page 12 terminals
EC 13÷48Vac/dc
Accessories C
EX301. Single button module. See page ST703 . Ringing volume adjustment
12. switch.
EX304. Additional loudspeaker module.

To terminal 9 of the in-
tercom or 9A of EX304 E
See page 13. additional loudspeaker. 9
EX332. Module with 3 LED. See page 13.

Call push-button C X
SR41. Electronic buzzer module.
H
See page 13.
I
T
OFF MED. MAX.
3 levels to adjust ring-

O
ing volume (off, me-
dium and maximum)
99
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS COMPACT SERIES
VIDEOINTERCOMS
4+1 INTERCOMS
95.6 58 115.3 201

3 3 /4 " 2 5 /16" 4 9 /16" 7 15 /16"
229
9"
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
KM 8100W KM 8600W KM 8800W

KM 8100CW
KM 8100W. White colour videointercom KM 8600W. White colour videointercom KM 8800W. White colour reflex videoin-
with flat CRT, audio-video privacy, electronic with traditional cathode tube, audio-video pri- tercom, with audio-video privacy, electronic
microphone and terminal board for the connec- vacy, electronic microphone and terminal board microphone and terminal board for the connec-
tion to the wall-bracket. With three buttons for for the connection to the wall-bracket. With tion to the wall-bracket. With three buttons for
door lock release, control switch ON and auxil- three buttons for door lock release, control door lock release, control switch ON and auxil-
iary service. The maximum acceptable current switch ON and auxiliary service. The maximum iary service. The maximum acceptable current
to the button terminals is 0.3A. For higher cur- acceptable current to the button terminals is to the button terminals is 0.3A. For higher cur-
rents use relay unit art.1471 or 1472. It can be 0.3A. For higher currents use relay unit art.1471 rents use relay unit art.1471 or 1472. It can be
installed on the wall (with no built-in) by using or 1472. It can be installed on the wall (with no installed on the wall (with no built-in) by using
the wall-bracket WB8600. built-in) by using the wall-bracket WB8600 and the wall-bracket WB8600.
the back-box art.8083.
KM8100CW . Version of KM8100W
videointercom with colour LCD. Technical data Technical data
Power supply 18÷24Vdc Power supply 18÷24Vdc
Technical data Operating current 0.7A Operating current 0.7A
Power supply 18÷24Vdc Video tube 4,5-90° Video tube 4,5-90°
Operating current 0.5A TV standard CCIR-625 lines TV standard CCIR-625 lines
Video tube (KM8100W) 4" FLAT CRT
Horizontal frequency 15625Hz Horizontal frequency 15625Hz
Screen (KM8100CW) 4" LCD
TV standard (KM8100W) CCIR-625 lines Vertical frequency 50÷60Hz Vertical frequency 50÷60Hz
TV standard (KM8100CW) PAL Bandwidth >5MHz Bandwidth >5MHz
Horizontal frequency 15625Hz Video signal on 75Ω 0.8÷1.5Vpp Video signal on 75Ω 0.8÷1.5Vpp
Vertical frequency 50Hz Starting up time 5÷7 sec. Starting up time 5÷7 sec.
Bandwidth >5MHz Operating temperature 0°÷+50°C Operating temperature 0°÷+50°C
Video signal on 75Ω 0.8÷1.5Vpp Max. permissible humidity 90%RH Max. permissible humidity 90%RH
Starting up time (KM8100W) 2÷4 seconds
Starting up time (KM8100CW) 1 second
Max. permissible humidity 90%RH
WB 8600. Plastic bracket to fix the video 8083 . Back-box for video intercom Choosing the private conversation or in-
intercoms KM8100W, KM8600W and art.KM8600W. tercommunicating service
KM8800W to the wall . Complete with terminal
board for connection to the system and con-
nectors for connection to the video intercom. H
1-2
F
Terminals 9M 1 2 3 J1
V Video signal input 0.8÷1.5Vpp
C M Video ground
F General ground
3
2
1
3
2
1 J1
2-3
O H Positive power supply input 18÷24Vdc
1 Microphone output
4
5 1 2 3 J1
2 Speaker and automatic switching OFF input
8
M 3 Audio ground
4 Control switching ON – button
P
PC
5 Door lock release - button on intercom
P 8 Positive power supply output for video dis-
tributors 12Vdc
9R
V
A 9M Call input from external door station (250mA)

9R Intercommunicating or floor-call input 1-2 = Video intercom without audio privacy
P Service button (symbol )
C PC Common of service button
2-3 = Video intercom with audio privacy
T
100
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
Installation
4+1 INTERCOMS
Only for KM8100W and KM8800W models
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Fix the wall bracket at ap-
proximately 1.5m (4' 11")
distance from the floor. Fix the wall bracket by using 4 expansion plugs.
aaaaaaaaa
Only for KM8600W model
59
2 5/16”
128.5
5 1/16”
132
5 3/16”
Place the box 8083 on the

wall at a height of about 1.5m
4’ 7” ÷ 4’ 11” (4' 11") from the floor keeping
the front edges flush-mounted Fix the bracket WB8600 to the back box 8083 with the 2 screws supplied with the bracket and
and vertical to the finished
adding 2 screws and expansion plugs for the lower fixing.
plaster.
aaaaaaaaaaa
For all models
C
O
Dismounting of
M
videointercom
from the wall
P
bracket.
A
Plugging in of videointercom
connectors to the terminal
Installation of videointercom
onto the wall bracket.
C
boards of wall bracket.
T
101
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS COMPACT SERIES PROJECT SERIES
INTERCOM INTERCOM
4+1 INTERCOMS
65 86 72 77.5
2 9 /16" 3 3 /8 " 2 13/16" 3 1 /16"
211 214
8 5 /16" 8 1 /16"
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
PT510EW. White electronic intercom with 1

KM810W. White electronic intercom with 1 button, spiral cord, electronic microphone, and
button, spiral cord, electronic microphone, and possibility of installation of SR41 and SM50E
possibility of installation of SR41, SM50E modules. Wall-mountable with expansion plugs
modules and a ST701 additional push-button . or wall box.
box. Terminals
1 microphone W1
Terminals 2 speaker
1 microphone 3 ground
2 speaker 5 door release button 2 9 1 3 5 7
3 ground (max 1A)
5 door release button (max 1A) 7 common door release button (connected to
7 common door release button (connected to terminal 3 with jumper W1)
terminal 3 with jumper W1) 9 electronic call input
9 electronic call input
W1
2 9 1 3 5 0
Mounting of the additional button ST701.
C
O
M
P
A ST
70
C 1
T
-
P
R
O
J
E
C
T
102
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS COMPOSITION STUDIO SERIES
4+1 INTERCOMS
COMPOSITION BOARD OF STUDIO SERIES INTERNAL STATIONS
Wall version
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Intercom Monitor Videointercom
ST720W intercom ST7100W B/W monitor ST7100W B/W monitor

ST7100CW colour monitor ST7100CW colour monitor
WB7100 wall bracket for monitor WB7100 wall bracket for monitor
ST720W intercom
WB700 wall bracket for intercom
Table version
Intercom Monitor Videointercom
ST720W intercom ST7100W B/W monitor ST7100W B/W monitor

S
WB700 wall bracket for intercom
TA720 table adaptor for intercom
ST7100CW
WB7100
colour monitor
wall bracket for monitor
ST7100CW
WB7100
colour monitor
wall bracket for monitor T
TA7100 table adaptor for monitor TA7100 table adaptor for monitor
ST720W
WB700
intercom
wall bracket for intercom
U
TA700 table adaptor for intercom
D
I
O
103
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
INTERCOM Studio series
67 93 Accessories
4+1 INTERCOMS
2 5 /8 " 3 11 /16"
ST 701. Single button module for ST720

For higher currents use a relay.
129 Note. For easier reference the 2 terminals of the
60 5 1 /16" module are defined as C and P, but they have no
2 3 /8 " 83.5
209
polarity and can be inverted.
3 5 /16"
8 1 /4 "
*
7+1
28.5
1 1 /8 "
VIDEOINTERCOMS
ST 720W. White colour intercom for 4+1

intercom systems and intercommunicating sys-
tems connected to 1 or more external door
stations. Complete with spiral cord, electronic
microphone and 1 button extendable to 7 by
adding the ST 701 single button module.
box or with WB700 bracket if combined with
ST 7100 monitor or other modules.
Terminals
1 microphone
2 speaker
3 ground
5 door release button (max 1A)
0 common button grounded with the jumper
present in the JP2 connector
9 electronic call input
1
P1
8
7
6
5 5
4 P5
3
2 6
1 P6
7
JP2 3 2 9 1 5 0 P7
ST 702W. LED module for ST720W inter-

coms.
L-
S L+
T
U
D
I
O
104
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
ST 703. Ringing volume adjustment ST 715. Switch module. It allows to acti- ST 716. Switch module with LED. It allows
4+1 INTERCOMS
switch. vate or deactivate one of the intercom functions to activate/deactivate/divert one of the inter-
(for example call, door lock release, etc.). Maxi- com functions (for example call, door lock re-
mum contact current is 0.1A. lease, etc.) with visual indication of the function.
Maximum contact current of switch module is
0.1A.
The article takes the space of 2 modules. It is
recommended to install it in the last position in
order to use the space in the bottom part of the
intercom.
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
to terminal 9 of the inter-
com or 9A of ST 704 ad-
ditional loudspeaker.
9 Example of switch module application to deac-
C
tivate the intercom call
call button
OFF ON to terminal 9 of the inter-
NA 9 com or 9A of ST704 ad-
C ditional loudspeaker.
OFF MED. MAX.

3 levels to adjust ringing volume
(off, medium and maximum)
call button
ST 704. Additional loudspeaker. It allows

to receive calls with off-hook handset, or in RL 36. Relay module. When installed inside
systems with 2 calls, with 1 single call and 1 call intercoms it allows to activate additional bells
in common to other intercoms. (see page 183). Maximum switching current is
To install the module the last module holder on 1A (24V).
the intercom base must be removed (see draw-
ing). The article takes the space of 2 modules, Terminals
and therefore reduces the number of additional C common terminal of relay
buttons to 4. NA normally open contact of relay
NC normally closed contact of relay
- ground
9A 13Vac/dc voltage input
EC relay activation input (ground command)
3A
Wires
9 electronic call input without resistive load
3 ground
NA NC
9
Example of switch module with LED applica-
tion to deactivate the intercom call with visual
3
indication
6÷21Vac/dc L+
EC
C L-
NA
S
call button
NC T
to terminal 9 of the in- C
tercom or 9A of ST704
additional loud-
U
speaker.
D
I
O
105
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
4+1 INTERCOMS
SM 50E. Private conversation module. TA 720W. Table adapter, white colour. Com- Combination of additional modules
When installed inside all the intercoms of the plete with junction box and 2.4m connection All modules described above can be installed
multi-way intercom system it allows only the cable with 20 wires. inside the ST 720 intercoms. It must be kept in
called user to be put in communication with the mind that they cannot be installed all at the
external door station. The module cannot be same time. Below are some examples of pos-
used in intercommunicating systems and if the sible combinations.
intercom is combined with a monitor (in this
case the service is provided by the monitor
*
itself). Make the hole for

the connection
7+1
Terminals cable.
B audio line transmitter
C audio line receiver ST701 or ST702 or
VIDEOINTERCOMS
9 electronic call input ST715 (max 6)

- ground
Wires
1 microphone
2 speaker
3 ground SR41 or SM50E or
Block the connection ca-
9 electronic call output RL36 (1-see note)
ble to the table adapter
and block it with the cable
clamp.
ST703 (max 1)
Fix the WB700 bracket ST701 or ST702 or

to the table adapter with ST715 (max 4)
the 2 screws supplied.
SR41 or SM50E or
RL36 (1-see note)
SR 41. Electronic buzzer module. Thanks Open the intercom and make the connections as
to low current consumption, it can be used for shown in the installation diagram.
parallel call to several intercoms. Provided with Junction box ST704 (max 1)
volume adjustment.
ST703 (max 1)
1
Terminals
3 ground
4 power supply input (13Vac-70mA; 9÷20Vdc- Yellow
1
15mA)
329150
ST720 ST701 or ST702 or

ST715 (max 5)
Mark the colour/terminal
combination in the junc-
tion box
S
T ST716 (max 1)
SR41 or SM50E or
U RL36 (1-see note)
ST703 (max 1)
D
I Hook the intercom to
the adapter.
Note
An additional SR41 or SM50E or RL36 mod-
ule can be installed taking the place of the last
O 4 positions of the push-button modules after
removing the plastic holders.
106
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
4+1 INTERCOMS
MONITORS
FIXING ELEMENTS
61 156
2 3 /8 " 6 1 /8 " With monitor ST7100 the video connection
can be made with 75 Ohm coaxial cable or
JP1 twisted pair. The choice between the two sys-
1
1 2 3
J2
tems depends on the correct selection of video
JP3 JP4
JP5
R9 Y X P P 8 1 4
14
V V C C
F
M
5
9M
9R
distributor and camera. The number of wires
9V
3 and possible installations does not change.
*
2
1
H Do not forget to position jumper J2 cor-
rectly and use the proper input terminals
7+1
U1
1
224 J1 2
3
on bracket WB7100.
8 /16"
13
10
JP2 1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Choosing the video connection with co-
axial cable or twisted pair
ST 7100W. White monitor with flat CRT and 2 WB 7100. Bracket to fix the monitor 1-2
JP1
1
buttons. One button for control switch ON and one ST7100 to the wall or to the table adapter
button for supplementary services. Maximum accept- (art.TA7100). Complete with terminal JP4 J2
1 2 3 1 2 3 J2
able current of buttons is 0.3A. For higher currents use board for connection to the system and
JP5
Y X P P 8 1 4
2-3
14
relay art. 1471 or 1472. connectors for connection to the monitor. C C
F
The monitor can be surface mounted on the wall with One or more brackets WB 700 can be 5
bracket art. WB7100. combined with WB 7100 to expand the 9M 1 2 3 J2
9R
system. The bracket is arranged to be 9V
Technical data electrically connected to the intercom 3
Power supply 18÷24Vdc ST720 (the connection cable is supplied 2
1
Operating current 0.35A with bracket WB 700). H
Monitor 4" FLAT CRT
TV standard CCIR-625 lines Terminals 1-2 = Video connection with coaxial cable at
Horizontal frequency 15625Hz V Video signal input 0.8÷1.5Vpp terminals V and M
Vertical frequency 50Hz M Video ground 2-3 = Video connection with twisted pair at
Bandwidth >5MHz F General ground terminals X and Y
Video signal on 75Ω 0.8÷1.5Vpp H Positive power supply input 18÷24Vdc
Starting up time 2÷4 sec. X Negative balanced video signal input
Operating temperature 0°÷+50°C Y Positive balanced video signal input
Max. permissible humidity 90%RH 1 Microphone output
2 Speaker and automatic switching OFF
Choosing the private conversation or in-
ST 7100CW. Version with colour LCD of monitor input tercommunicating service
ST7100W. 3 Audio ground 9M
4 Control switching ON – button 9R
9V
Technical data 5 Door lock release - button on inter- 3
Power supply 18÷24Vdc com 2
Operating current 0.4A 8 Positive power supply output for video 1
Monitor 4" LCD distributors 12Vdc H
TV standard PAL 9M Call input from external door station 1-2
Horizontal frequency 15625Hz (250mA) U1
1
Vertical frequency 50Hz 9R Intercommunicating or floor-call input J1 2 1 2 3 J1
3
Bandwidth >5MHz 9V Input for direct activation from FN4000
Video signal on 75Ω 0.8÷1.5Vpp digital system (ground command) 2-3
10
JP2
Starting up time 1 sec. 1C Common of buttons for control switch-

1
Operating temperature 0°÷+50°C ing ON 1 2 3 J1

Max. permissible humidity 90%RH P Service button (symbol )
PC Common of service button
1-2 = Monitor without audio privacy

2-3 = Monitor with audio privacy
S
T
U
D
I
O
107
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
4+1 INTERCOMS
INSTALLATION
The modularity of the Studio articles permits the realisation of different

WB 700. Bracket for fixing mechanically types of system. Some of the possible compositions are illustrated
intercom ST 720 and/or accessories of Stu- below.
dio line to monitor ST7100 or among them. - monitor only
Complete with: - video intercom (see page 110)
- flat cable for electrical connection of one - digital video intercom (see manual 10 – 2010 edition)
intercom ST 720 to monitor ST 7100
*
- templates for correct alignment with

7+1
bracket WB7100 and/or brackets WB700.
MONITOR ONLY
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Installation steps for monitor ST7100 or ST 7100C in wall or table

version.
TA7100W. White Table adapter for

ST7100W and ST7100CW monitors. Com-
Wall version
plete with cable clamp, junction box and
2.4m connection cable with 20 wires.
JP1
1
1 2 3
JP3 JP4 J2
JP5
R9 Y X P P 8 1 4
14
V V C C
F
5
M
9M
9R
9V
3
2
1
H
U1
1
J1 2
3
10
JP2 1
TA700W. White table adapter for acces-
sories, intercoms and telephones of Studio
series. Complete with cable clamp, plastic 1) Fix the bracket WB7100 to the wall with the 3
and metallic frames for correct alignment 4 ' 13 "
fixing points at approximately 1.55 m distance
with TA7100 adapters and/or additional from the floor to the upper part of the bracket.
TA700 or TA720.
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
JP1
1
TA720W. White table adapter for J2

1 2 3
ST720W intercoms. Complete with cable R9 Y X P P 8 1 4

14
V V C C
F
clamp, junction box and 2.4m connection M

5
9M
cable with 20 wires, plastic and metallic 9R

9V
3
frames for correct alignment with TA7100 2
1
adapters and/or additional TA700 or TA720. H
S U1
J1
1
2
3
10
JP2
T
1
U
D Note. Choose model TA720 when the 20 wires of the TA7100 connec-
tion cable are not sufficient to cover the system requirements.
I
2) Make the connections on the bracket terminal board.
O
108
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
4+1 INTERCOMS
2) Pass the connection cable through the
hole on the back of the table adapter
JP1 and block it with the cable clamp.
1
1 2 3
JP4 J2
JP5
R9 Y X P P 8 1 4
14
V C C
F
5
M
9M
9R
*
9V
3
2
7+1
1
H
VIDEOINTERCOMS
U1
1
J1 2
3
10
JP2 1
3) Connect the monitor cable to the

U
P bracket. 3) Fix the bracket WB7100 with the 2
screws supplied.
4) Make the connection to the bracket
terminal board according to the in-
stallation diagram.
Junction box
1
4
5) Mark the colour/termi- F
nal combination on the 5 1
9M
junction box. 9R Yellow
4) Hook the monitor to the bracket. 9V
3
2
1
H
JP1
WB7100
1
1 2 3
JP4 J2
JP5
R9 Y X P P 8 1 4
14
V C C
F
Table version M
5
9M
9R
6) Connect the monitor cable to the bracket.
9V
3
2
1
H
U1
1
J1 2
3
10
JP2 1
U
P
S
7) Hook the monitor to the bracket. T
U
D
1) Apply the 4 anti-slip rubber pads in their housing under the table
adapter base.
I
O
109
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
VIDEO INTERCOM
4+1 INTERCOMS
Installation steps for monitor ST7100 (or ST7100C), intercom ST720,

brackets WB7100 and WB700 and table adapters (if required) for the JP1
realisation of an internal station with video intercom functions. J2

1 2 3
Wall version
67 249
*
7+1
1
J1 2
3
JP2
VIDEOINTERCOMS
224
2)Fix the 2 brackets to the wall following the indications of drawing 1 on

page 108.
JP1
1
1 2 3
JP3 JP4 J2
JP5
R9 Y X P P 8 1 4
14
V V C C
F
5
M
9M
9R
9V
3
2
1
H
U1
1
J1 2
3
10
JP2 1
3) Remove the intercom cover.
1) Splice the bracket WB700 with the WB7100 inserting the 2 plastic
templates in the proper holes.
JP2
S JP2
329150
T
U
D
I 4) Remove the mobile jumper of connector JP2 of the intercom.
110
(MT11 - Gb2012)
JP1
1 2 3
J2
INTERNAL STATIONS
4+1 INTERCOMS
JP1
1
1 2 3
JP4 J2
JP5
R9 Y X P P 8 1 4
14
1 V C C
F
J1 2
3 5
M
9M
9R
9V
JP2
*
2
1
H
7+1
U1
1
J1 2
VIDEOINTERCOMS
3
5) Connect the flat cable supplied with bracket WB700 to connector
10
JP2
JP2 of bracket WB7100.
1
U
P
5
9M
9R
9V 8) Connect the monitor cable to the bracket.
3
2
1
H
U1
1
J1 2
3
10
JP2 1
6) Hook the intercom base to bracket WB700 and connect the other end
of the flat cable to connector JP2 of the intercom by passing the cable
between the intercom base and the bracket. Pull the cable in such a
way that the extra part of the cable remains inside the intercom.
JP1
1
1 2 3
J2
R9 Y X P P 8 1 4
14
V V C C
F
5
M
9M
9R
9V
3
2
1
9) Hook the monitor to the bracket.
H
U1
1
J1 2
3
10
JP2 1
S
T
U
D
7)Make the connection on the terminal board of bracket WB7100
according to the installation diagram. In case of additional buttons or I
modules, additional connections must be made inside the intercom. 10) Close the intercom.
O
111
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERNAL STATIONS
Table version
4+1 INTERCOMS
*
7+1
c
VIDEOINTERCOMS
4) Screw the 2 metallic frames to the desk adapter TA7100 and hook
the plastic frame to them.
1) Apply the 8 anti-slip rubber pads in their housings under the base of
table adapters TA7100 and TA700.
5) Fix the table adapter TA700 to the 2 metallic frames.
2) Pass the connection cable through the

hole in the back of the table adapter
TA7100 and block it with the cable
clamp.
6) Screw the brackets WB7100 and WB700 to the table adapters.
7) Hook the monitor and Junction box

S intercom according to
the instructions on
T pages 110 and 111
(from point 3 to 10). 4
1
When connecting the
U wires to the terminal
F
5
9M
1
boards of bracket 9R Yellow

D WB7100 (point 7) you
must mark the colour/
9V
3
2
I
1
terminal combination H
3) The arrows indicate the breaking points for the application of the on the junction box.
metallic frames.
O WB7100
112
(MT11 - Gb2012)
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS PROFILO SERIES
Module frames complete with back box
4+1 INTERCOMS
Push-button panels in extruded aluminium and
steel push-buttons made up of modular ele-
ments. Suitable for the most diverse installa-
tion requirements. The careful selection of
modules allows for multiple application oppor-
tunities; from one-way installations to blocks of
flats; from intercom to video intercom installa-
tions.
The optimized size of modules allows for easy
installation on the gage jamb.
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
PL 71 PL 72 PL 73
Hood covers
PL 81 PL 82 PL 83 PL 84 PL 86 PL 89
Rain shelter with module frames
P
R
O
F
PL 91 PL 92 PL 93 PL 94 PL 96 PL 99
I
L
O
113
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Push-button panel
Video modules with integrated door speaker
4+1 INTERCOMS
Modules with integrated door speaker
PL40P PL41P PL42P

without call buttons and with 1 call button and B\W with 2 call buttons and B\W
PL10P PL11P PL12P with B\W camera camera camera
*
without call but- with 1 call button with 2 call PL40PC PL41PC PL42PC
tons buttons colour version colour version colour version
7+1
PL422P PL424P
VIDEOINTERCOMS
with 2 call buttons and with 4 call buttons and

PL122P PL124P B\W camera - 2 row B\W camera - 2 row
with 2 call but- with 4 call but-
tons - 2 row tons - 2 row PL422PC PL424PC
colour version colour version
Modules: blank, buttons and number
PL 20 PL 21 PL 23 PL 24 PL226 PL228 PL 50
blank module with 1 call PL 22 with 3 call with 4 call with 6 call with 8 call number module
button with 2 call buttons buttons buttons - 2 row buttons - 2 row
buttons
Access control modules Technical characteristics and terminal boards of the button modules
PL21 PL22 PL23 PL24 PL226 PL228 PL50
A A A A A A A AC power supply input for nameplate
(25mA) (50mA) (0.1A) Led (13Vac)
- - - - - - - Ground
FC 52PL FP 52PL C C C C C/C2 C/C2 Call push-buttons common
Keypad module Proximity reader for P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 Call push-button
for access control access control (see P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 Call push-button
(see characteris- characteristics on
P3 P3 P3 P3 Call push-button
tics on page 116). page 116).
P4 P4 Call push-button
P5÷P7 P5÷P8 Call push-buttons (C2 common)
Technical characteristics and terminal boards of the Profilo modules
PL10P PL11P PL12P PL122P PL124P PL40PC PL41PC PL42PC PL422PC PL424PC
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reception audio line

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Transmission audio line
P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Power supply input for electric door speaker (6÷12Vdc)

Audio ground
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
R - - - - - - - - - - Ground for name-plate Led and service Led (13Vac)
A A A A A A A A A A AC or DC power supply input for name-plate Led (13Vac-dc)
O C C C(C2) C(C2) C C C(C2) C(C2) Call push-buttons common
P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 Call push-button
F P2 P2 P2 P2 Call push-button
I P3 P3-P4
V V V V
P3
V
P3-P4
V
Call push-buttons (call push-buttons common C2)
Video signal output (coaxial cable)
L M
H
M
H
M
H
M
H
M
H
Video ground (coaxial shield)
Positive voltage input for camera (18÷24Vdc)
O L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ Power supply input for service Led (13Vac-dc)
114
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Push-button panel
4+1 INTERCOMS
Adjustments
Video modules with integrated door speaker You can manually change the camera
framing by unloosening and adjusting the
horizontal and vertical screws in the de- ± 15°
sired direction.
P4 P3 C2
PL40P.
*
Modules complete with: 1 2 3 4 L+ M V H
7+1
- CCD color camera with autoiris and fixed 3.6mm lens.
- amplified speaker unit with volume adjustment of 2 channels
(reception and transmission)
VIDEOINTERCOMS
- aluminium front plate with transparent screen
- horizontal and vertical adjustments
- red operation LED
PL40PC. Colour version of the PL40P model.
PL41P.
Same as PL40P, with 1 call button and name plate panel with Audio adjustments
transparent screen and green LED backlighting.
If necessary, it is possible to adjust the volume of the 2 audio channels
opportunely varying the accessible trimmers.
Receiver Transmitter
PL42P. Same as PL40PED, with 2 call buttons and name plate adjustable adjustable
panel with transparent screen and green LED backlighting. volume volume

P4 P3 C2
PL422P. Same as PL40PED, with 2 call buttons on 2 rows and

name plate panel with transparent screen and green LED backlight-
ing. 1 2 3 4 L+
PL424P. Same as PL40PED, with 4 call buttons on 2 rows and

name plate panel with transparent screen and green LED backlight-
ing.
Technical data PL40P÷ PL40PC÷ Terminals Dismounting of name

PL424P PL424PC 1 Reception audio line holder to insert name la-
2 Transmission audio line bel.
Camera power supply 21±3Vdc 21±3Vdc 3 Power supply input for electric door speaker
(6÷12Vdc)
Operating current 0.2A 0.4A
4 Audio ground
Audio power supply 6÷12Vdc-0.06A 6÷12Vdc-0.06A
- Alternated power supply input or ground for
Video signal output sur 75Ω 1Vpp 1Vpp name-plate Led
Video signal standard CCIR PAL A AC or DC power supply input for name-
Minimum illumination 2 Lux 2,5 Lux plate Led (12Vac-dc)
Led's 6 infrared 6 white C Call push-buttons common
White balanced
Sensor
-
CCD 1/4" B/W
auto
CCD 1/3" colour
P1 Call push-button
V Video signal output (coaxial cable)
P
Number of pixels
Horizontal frequency
291.000
15.625Hz
291,000
15,625Hz
M Video ground (coaxial shield)
H Positive voltage input for camera R
Vertical frequency 50Hz 50Hz (18÷24Vdc)
Lens 3.6mm; F5 4mm; F4 L- Negative power supply input for service
Led
O
Focus 0.1m ÷ ∞ 0.6m ÷ ∞
Autoiris
electronic
± 15°
electronic
± 15°
L+ Positive power supply input for service Led
F
Vertical adjustment
± 15°
-10°÷+40°C
± 15°
-10°÷+40°C
I
Maximum permissible humidity 80%RH 80%RH
L
O
115
(MT11 - Gb2012)
PROXIMITY READER FOR ACCESS ACCESS CONTROL KEYPAD INSTALLATION

4+1 INTERCOMS
CONTROL
PL42PCDG PL40PCDG
*
7+1
FP52PL. FC 52PL.
This article allows for the activation of 2 relays Access control keypad with 12 digits and 2
relays for lock release. 4 programmable ac-
VIDEOINTERCOMS
by means of keytags or electronic ISO cards

based on transponder technology. cess codes for each relay. Programmable door
Programmable activation time from 1 to 63 opening time from 1 up 99 sec. for each relay
seconds for every relay. 4 user cards and 1 (or bistable operation of relay 1). Acoustic and
master card supplied with the product. Acoustic visual confirmation for entered keys, accepted
and visual control signals and 3-digit display to programming and for wrong codes.
view numbers and codes during set-up and CD4134PL
operation. Technical data CD4138PL TD4100PL
Technical data Stand-by current: 0.06A
Power supply 12Vac/dc ±10% Maximum current consumption: 0.15A
Stand-by current 0.1A Contact ratings: 12Vac-2A
Maximum current consumption 0.25A Numbers of codes for relays 1: 12 or direct
Contact ratings 24Vac - 2A activation
Max. number of cards 490 Numbers of codes for relays 2: 12 or direct
Max. number of Master cards 10 activation
Number of relays 2 Activation time for each relay: from 1 to 99 sec.
Relay time 1 to 63 sec. (or bistable relay 1)
Minimum recognition distance 3 cm Operating temperature: 0° ÷ +40°C Place the push-button panel back box at a
Maximum recognition time 1 sec. Maximum permissible humidity: 85% RH height of about 1.65m (5' 5") from the floor
Operating temperature 0° ÷ +40°C keeping the front edges flush-mounted and ver-
Maximum permitted humidity 85% RH Terminals tical to the finished plaster.
NC2 normally closed contact of relay 2 Position the camera in such a way that
Terminals NA2 normally open contact of relay 2 sunlight or other direct or reflected light
+/A positive or alternate current input C2 common contact of relay 2 sources with high intensity do not hit the
-/A ground or alternate current input NC1 normally closed contact of relay 1 camera lens.
PB door open button NA1 normally open contact of relay 1
NC2 normally closed contact of relay 2 C1 common contact of relay 1
NA2 normally open contact of relay 2 ground or alternate voltage input Assembling modules side by side
C2 common terminal of relay 2 positive or alternate voltage input
NC1 normally closed contact of relay 1 P2 activation of the relay 2; if momentarily
NA1 normally open contact of relay 1 connected to ground it allows the acti-
C1 common terminal of relay 1 vation for the programmed time
P1 activation of the relay 1; if momentarily
connected to ground it allows the acti-
vation for the programmed time
P Card recognition LED. It turns ON dur-

R ing card recognition.
Relay activation LED. It indicates relay
O deactivation (red) or activation (green).
F programming.
Card cancellation and system setup
I LED. It turns ON during Master or user
card cancellation and system setup.
L Insertion of spacers between back boxes.
Spacers and cable bushing (not supplied
O with the products) must be inserted before
brick work.
116
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Rain shelter
4+1 INTERCOMS
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

frame to the back box
and make the electri-
cal connections.
frame to the rain shelter
and make the electrical
connections.
Fixing of module frames to the upper side by

Fixing of module frames to the upper side by the the 2 small screws included in the rain shelter.
2 small screws included in the back boxes.
P
R
O
F
Fixing of frame to back box. Fixing of frame to rain shelter. I
Mounting of Align the frame before tighten- Align the frame before tighten-
module. ing the screws. ing the screws. L
O
117
(MT11 - Gb2012)

4+1 INTERCOMS
1 call button
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

N° Dimensions Door speaker module Button, blank or information Back box and Rain
calls (amplifier) modules (*) module frame (**) shelters
1 100x142x19 1 PL11P - - - 1 PL71 1 PL91
(3 15/16" x 5 9/16" x 3/4")
2 1 PL12P - - - 1 PL71 1 PL91
4 100x253,5x19 1 PL10P 1 PL24 - - 1 PL72 1 PL92
(3 15/16" x 10" x 3/4")
6 1 PL12P 1 PL24 - - 1 PL72 1 PL92
8 100x365x19
1 PL10P 2 PL24 - - 1 PL73 1 PL93
10 (3 15/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4") 1 PL12P 2 PL24 - - 1 PL73 1 PL93
11 200x253,5x19 1 PL11P 2 PL24 1 PL22 - 2 PL72 1 PL94
(7 7/8" x 10" x 3/4")
14 1 PL12P 3 PL24 - - 2 PL72 1 PL94
17 1 PL11P 4 PL24 - 1 PL20 2 PL73 1 PL96
200x365x19
20 (7 7/8" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL12P 4 PL24 1 PL22 - 2 PL73 1 PL96
22 1 PL12P 5 PL24 - - 2 PL73 1 PL96
P 25
28
400x253,5x19
1 PL11P
1 PL10P
6 PL24
7 PL24 -
1 PL20
-
4 PL72
4 PL72
-
-
(15 3/4" x 10" x 3/4")
R 30 1 PL12P 7 PL24 - - 4 PL72 -

31 1 PL11P 7 PL24 1 PL22 3 PL73 1 PL99
O 34
300x365x19
(11 13/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL12P 8 PL24 - - 3 PL73 1 PL99
F 38
40
1 PL12P
1 PL12P
8 PL24
9 PL24
2 PL22
1 PL22
1 PL20
1 PL20
4 PL73
4 PL73
-
-
400x365x19
I 42
(15 3/4" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL12P 10 PL24 - 1 PL20 4 PL73 -
46 1 PL12P 11 PL24 - - 4 PL73 -
L (**) If requested the hood covers can be added (see on page 113) (*) or PL50 It replaces
O PL71, PL72 or PL73
118
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1 INTERCOMS
2 call buttons
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

N° Dimensions Door speaker module Button, blank or information Back box and Rain
calls (amplifier) modules (*) module frame (**) shelters
2 100x142x19 1 PL122P - - - 1 PL71 1 PL91
(3 15/16" x 5 9/16" x 3/4")
4 1 PL124P - - - 1 PL71 1 PL91
8 100x253,5x19 1 PL10P 1 PL228 - - 1 PL72 1 PL92
(3 15/16" x 10" x 3/4")
12 1 PL124P 1 PL228 - - 1 PL72 1 PL92
16 100x365x19 1 PL10P 2 PL228 - - 1 PL73 1 PL93
(3 15/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
20 1 PL124P 2 PL228 - - 1 PL73 1 PL93
22 200x253,5x19 1 PL122P 2 PL228 1 PL224 - 2 PL72 1 PL94
(7 7/8" x 10" x 3/4")
28 1 PL124P 3 PL228 - - 2 PL72 1 PL94
34 1 PL122P 4 PL228 - 1 PL20 2 PL73 1 PL96
200x365x19
40 (7 7/8" x 14 3/8" x 3/4") 1 PL124P 4 PL228 1 PL224 - 2 PL73 1 PL96
44 1 PL124P 5 PL228 - - 2 PL73 1 PL96
50
56
400x253,5x19
(15 3/4" x 10" x 3/4")
1 PL122P
1 PL10P
6 PL228
7 PL228 -
1 PL20
-
4 PL72
4 PL72
-
-
P
60 1 PL124P 7 PL228 - - 4 PL72 - R
62 300x365x19 1 PL122P 7 PL228 1 PL224 3 PL73 1 PL99
68
(11 13/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL124P 8 PL228 - - 3 PL73 1 PL99 O
76
80 400x365x19
1 PL124P
1 PL124P
8 PL228
9 PL228
2 PL224
1 PL224
1 PL20
1 PL20
4 PL73
4 PL73
-
-
F
84
(15 3/4" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL124P 10 PL228 - 1 PL20 4 PL73 - I
92 1 PL124P 11 PL228 - - 4 PL73 -
(**) If requested the hood covers can be added (see on page 113) (*) or PL50 It replaces
L
PL71, PL72 or PL73
O
119
(MT11 - Gb2012)

4+1 INTERCOMS
1 call button
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

N° Dimensions Modules camera Button, blank or information Back box and Rain
calls with door speaker modules (*) module frame (**) shelters
1 100x142x19 1 PL41P - - - 1 PL71 1 PL91
(3 15/16" x 5 9/16" x 3/4")
2 1 PL42P - - - 1 PL71 1 PL91
4 100x253,5x19 1 PL40P 1 PL24 - - 1 PL72 1 PL92
(3 15/16" x 10" x 3/4")
6 1 PL42P 1 PL24 - - 1 PL72 1 PL92
8 100x365x19
1 PL40P 2 PL24 - - 1 PL73 1 PL93
10 (3 15/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4") 1 PL42P 2 PL24 - - 1 PL73 1 PL93
11 200x253,5x19 1 PL41P 2 PL24 1 PL22 - 2 PL72 1 PL94
(7 7/8" x 10" x 3/4")
14 1 PL42P 3 PL24 - - 2 PL72 1 PL94
17 1 PL41P 4 PL24 - 1 PL20 2 PL73 1 PL96
200x365x19
20 (7 7/8" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL42P 4 PL24 1 PL22 - 2 PL73 1 PL96
22 1 PL42P 5 PL24 - - 2 PL73 1 PL96
P 25
28
400x253,5x19
1 PL41P
1 PL40P
6 PL24
7 PL24 -
1 PL20
-
4 PL72
4 PL72
-
-
(15 3/4" x 10" x 3/4")
R 30 1 PL42P 7 PL24 - - 4 PL72 -

31 1 PL41P 7 PL24 1 PL22 3 PL73 1 PL99
O 34
300x365x19
(11 13/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL42P 8 PL24 - - 3 PL73 1 PL99
F 38
40
1 PL42P
1 PL42P
8 PL24
9 PL24
2 PL22
1 PL22
1 PL20
1 PL20
4 PL73
4 PL73
-
-
400x365x19
I 42
(15 3/4" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
1 PL42P 10 PL24 - 1 PL20 4 PL73 -
46 1 PL42P 11 PL24 - - 4 PL73 -
L (**) If requested the hood covers can be added (see on page 113) (*) or PL50 It replaces
O PL71, PL72 or PL73
120
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1 INTERCOMS
2 call buttons
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

N° Dimensions Modules camera Button, blank or information Back box and Rain
calls with door speaker modules (*) module frame (**) shelters
2 100x142x19
1 PL422P - - - 1 PL71 1 PL91
4 (3 15/16" x 5 9/16" x 3/4") 1 PL424P - - - 1 PL71 1 PL91
8 100x253,5x19
1 PL40P 1 PL228 - - 1 PL72 1 PL92
12 (3 15/16" x 10" x 3/4") 1 PL424P 1 PL228 - - 1 PL72 1 PL92
16 1 PL40P 2 PL228 - - 1 PL73 1 PL93
100x365x19
20 (3 15/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4") 1 PL424P 2 PL228 - - 1 PL73 1 PL93
22 200x253,5x19
1 PL422P 2 PL228 1 PL224 - 2 PL72 1 PL94
28 (7 7/8" x 10" x 3/4") 1 PL424P 3 PL228 - - 2 PL72 1 PL94
34 1 PL422P 4 PL228 - 1 PL20 2 PL73 1 PL96
200x365x19
40 1 PL424P 5 PL228 - - 2 PL73 1 PL96
(7 7/8" x 14 3/8" x 3/4")
44 1 PL424P 5 PL228 - - 2 PL73 1 PL96
50
56
400x253,5x19
(15 3/4" x 10" x 3/4")
1 PL422P
1 PL40P
6 PL228
7 PL228 -
1 PL20
-
4 PL72
4 PL72
-
-
P
60 1 PL424P 7 PL228 - - 4 PL72 - R
62 1 PL422P 7 PL228 1 PL224 3 PL73 1 PL99
68
300x365x19
(11 13/16" x 14 3/8" x 3/4") 1 PL424P 8 PL228 - - 3 PL73 1 PL99 O
76
80
1 PL424P
1 PL40P
8 PL228
10 PL228
2 PL224
-
1 PL20
1 PL20
4 PL73
4 PL73
-
-
F
400x365x19
84 (15 3/4" x 14 3/8" x 3/4") 1 PL424P 10 PL228 - 1 PL20 4 PL73 - I
92 1 PL424P 11 PL228 - - 4 PL73 -
(**) If requested the hood covers can be added (see on page 113) (*) or PL50 It replaces
L
PL71, PL72 or PL73
O
121
(MT11 - Gb2012)
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS MATRIX SERIES
PUSH-BUTTONS MATRIX series
4+1 INTERCOMS
Module frames complete with back box Stainless steel anti-vandalism push-button panels
especially studied to withstand burglary, penetration
of solids and water jets (IP 45 protection degree
against the penetration of external solids and water;
IK09 against shocks).
The Matrix push-button panels include back boxes,
module frames, die-cast aluminium decorative
frames, button modules, and modules with built-in
speaker unit (with or without camera).
The careful selection of modules allows for multiple
*
application opportunities; from one-way installations

7+1
to blocks of flats; from intercom to video intercom

installations.
The push-button elements have been developed to
VIDEOINTERCOMS
allow both for horizontal and vertical configuration.
Notice! To maintain the brilliance of door

station plates, periodic cleaning with spe-
MA 71 MA 72 MA 73 cific products for stainless steel is required.
Video modules with integrated door

Front frames speaker
MAS42
without call buttons and with B/
W camera
MAS42C
without call buttons and with
colour camera
MAS43
with 1 call button and B/W cam-
era
MAS43C
with 1 call button and colour
camera
MA 61 MA 62 MA 63 For specifications see page 123.

MAS 61 MAS 62 MAS 63
Rain shelters Push-button modules
MAS20 .
Blank module in stainless steel.
MAS22.
Module with 2 call buttons and
M name plate panel with
breakproof transparent screen
A and green LED backlight.
T
R MAS24.
I With 4 call buttons.
X MA 91 MA 92 MA 93
122
(MT11 - Gb2012)
PUSH-BUTTONS MATRIX series
4+1 INTERCOMS
Video modules with integrated door Modules with integrated door speaker
speaker
*
MAS42. MAS10P. Amplified speaker unit with volume adjustment of 2 channels (reception
7+1
and transmission), steel front plate and red operation LED.
Modules complete with:
- CCD camera with autoiris, fixed 3.6mm lens and 6
infrared LED’s. MAS11P. Same as MA S10P, with call button and name plate panel with breakproof
VIDEOINTERCOMS
- amplified speaker unit with volume adjustment of 2 transparent screen and green LED backlight.
channels (reception and transmission)
- steel front plate with breakproof transparent screen MAS12P. With 2 call buttons.
- red operation LED
- horizontal and vertical adjustments
MAS42C .
Colour version of model MA S42.
Technical data MA42-MA43 MA42C-MA43C
MAS43. Power supply 21±3Vdc 21±3Vdc
Same as MA 42, with call button and name plate panel Operating current 0.3A 0.4A
with breakproof transparent screen and green LED back- Video signal output 1Vpp on 75Ω 1Vpp on 75Ω
lighting. Video signal standard CCIR PAL
MAS43C. White balance - auto
Colour version of model MA S43. Sensor CCD 1/4" B/W CCD 1/3" colour
Number of pixels 291,000 291,000
Horizontal frequency 15,625Hz 15,625Hz
Vertical frequency 50Hz 50Hz
Lens 3.6mm; F5 4mm; F4
Focus 0.1m ÷ ∞ 0.6m ÷ ∞
Autoiris electronic electronic
Horizontal adjustment ± 15° ± 15°
Vertical adjustment ± 15° ± 15°
Operating temperature -10°÷+40°C -10°÷+40°C
Max. permissible humidity 80%RH 80%RH
Technical characteristics of MATRIX modules terminal boards
MAS10P MAS11P MAS12P MAS20 MAS22 MAS24 MAS42 MAS43

MAS42C MAS43C
1 1 1 1 1 Reception audio line

2 2 2 2 2 Transmission audio line
3 3 3 3 3 Power supply input for electric door speaker (6÷12Vdc)
4 4 4 4 4 Audio ground
- - - - - - - - Alternated power supply input or ground for name-plate Led
A A
C
A
C
A A
C
A
C
A A
C
AC or DC power supply input for name-plate Led (12Vac-dc)
M
P1 P1
P2
P1
P2
P1
P2
P1 Call push-button
Call push-button
A
P3
P4
Call push-button
Call push-button
T
V V Video signal output (coaxial cable) R
M M Video ground (coaxial shield)
H H Positive voltage input for camera (18÷24Vdc) I
L- L- L- L- L- Alternated power supply input or ground for service Led
L+ L+ L+ L+ L+ AC or DC power supply input for service Led (12Vac-dc) X
123
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1 INTERCOMS
Adjustments ACCESS CONTROL KEYPAD

You can manually change the camera framing by unloosening and
adjusting the horizontal and vertical screws in the desired direction.
(±15°)
(±15°)
*
7+1
FC 52MAS. Electronic keypad with 12 keys and 2 relays for lock

VIDEOINTERCOMS
release and access control of door stations. 12 programmable access

codes for each relay. Programmable door opening time from 1 up 99
sec. for each relay (or bistable operation of relay). Acoustic and visual
confirmation for entered keys, accepted programming and for wrong
codes.
Technical data
Stand-by current: 0.02A
Max. current consumption: 0.1A
Contact ratings: 12Vac - 2A
Audio adjustments Numbers of codes for relay 1: 12 + direct activation
If necessary, it is possible to adjust the volume of the 2 audio channels Numbers of codes for relay 2: 12 + direct activation
opportunely varying the external knobs. Activation time for each relay: from 1 to 99 seconds (or bistable)
Operating temperature: 0° ÷ +40°C
Degree of protection IP 45
Terminals
normally closed contact of relay 2
2 normally open contact of relay 2
common contact of relay 2
normally closed contact of relay 1
common contact of relay 1
ground or alternating voltage input
positive or alternating voltage input
MAS42 MAS42C MAS43 MAS43C RL2 RL1
P2 P1
Max 2A Max 2A
load load
For direct activation

of RL1 and RL2
Power
M supply
Power
supply
A
T
R
I MAS10P MAS11P MAS12P
124
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INSTALLATION
4+1 INTERCOMS
Insertion of spacers between back boxes. Spacers
and cable bushing (not supplied with the products)
must be inserted before brick work.
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

height of about 1.65m (5' 5") from the floor
keeping the front edges flush-mounted and
vertical to the finished plaster.
sunlight or other direct or reflected light
sources with high intensity do not hit
the camera lens.
Mounting modules.
M
A
For easier connection to the electrical system, it is
T
recommended to insert the metal plate supplied
with the product in the back box opening, as R
shown in the figure. The plate is used to hook the
frame with pre-assembled modules.
Leave the plate in the box to reuse it for
I
maintenance operations.
X
125
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1 INTERCOMS
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Fixing of frame to module frame.
Connection of wires to module terminal boxes.
Rain shelters
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Fixing of frame to back
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
box. aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Align the frame before
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
tightening the screws. * aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
M *
A
T Align the frame before tightening
the screws.
R * Long screws can be used to anchor
the frame during wire connection tp
modules.
I
X Apply the protection gaskets supplied with the product
on the internal part of the frame openings.
126
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Examples of compositions in intercom systems
4+1 INTERCOMS
1 call button 3 call buttons 7 call buttons
*
2 call 4 call 6 call 6 call buttons 8 call buttons 9 call buttons 10 call 10 call buttons
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

N° Module with Button and Front Back box and Rain
Dimensions
calls door speaker blank modules frame module frame shelter (*)
1 140x140x19 1 MAS11P - - 1 MAS61 1 MA71 1 MA91
(5 1/2" x 5 1/2" x 3/4")
2 1 MAS12P - - 1 MAS61 1 MA71 1 MA91
3 1 MAS11P 1 MAS22 - 1 MAS62 1 MA72 1 MA92
140x256x19
4 (5 /2" x 10 1/16" x 3/4")
1 1 MAS10P 1 MAS24 - 1 MAS62 1 MA72 1 MA92
6 1 MAS12P 1 MAS24 - 1 MAS62 1 MA72 1 MA92
8 1 MAS10P 2 MAS24 - 1 MAS63 1 MA73 1 MA93
140x374x19
9 (5 /2" x 14 3/4" x 3/4")
1 1 MAS11P 2 MAS24 - 1 MAS63 1 MA73 1 MA93
10 1 MAS12P 2 MAS24 - 1 MAS63 1 MA73 1 MA93
12 280x256x19 1 MAS12P 2 MAS24 1 MAS22 2 MAS62 2 MA72 -
(11" x 10 1/16" x 3/4") 3 MAS24 - 2 MAS62
14 1 MAS12P 2 MA72 -
16 1 MAS10P 4 MAS24 - 2 MAS63 2 MA73 -
19
280x374x19
(11" x 14 3/4" x 3/4") 1 MAS11P 4 MAS24
5 MAS24
1 MAS22
-
2 MAS63
2 MAS63
2 MA73 -
M
22 1 MAS12P 2 MA73 -
27 560x256x19
(22 1/16" x 10 1/16" x 3/4")
1 MAS11P 6 MAS24 1 MAS22 4 MAS62 4 MA72 - A
30 1 MAS12P 7 MAS24 - 4 MAS62 4 MA72 -
31 420x374x19 1 MAS11P 7 MAS24 1 MAS22 3 MAS63 3 MA73 -
T
(16 9/16" x 14 3/4"x 3/4")
34
38
1 MAS12P
1 MAS10P
8 MAS24
8 MAS24
-
3 MAS22
3 MAS63
4 MAS63
3 MA73
4 MA73
-
-
R
40 560x374x19
(22 1/16" x 14 3/4" x 3/4")
1 MAS10P 9 MAS24 2 MAS22 4 MAS63 4 MA73 - I
43 1 MAS11P 10 MAS24 1 MAS22 4 MAS63 4 MA73 -
46 1 MAS12P 11 MAS24 - 4 MAS63 4 MA73 - X
127
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Examples of compositions in video intercom systems

4+1 INTERCOMS

*
1 call button 4 call 5 call 5 call buttons 6 call buttons 8 call buttons 9 call 9 call buttons
buttons buttons buttons
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

N° Camera and door Button and Front Back box and Rain
Dimensions
calls speaker module blank modules frame module frame shelter (*)
1 140x140x19 1 MAS43 - - - 1 MAS61 1 MA71 1 MA91
(5 1/2" x 5 1/2" x 3/4")
2 1 MAS42 1 MAS22 - - 1 MAS62 1 MA72 1 MA92
140x256x19
4 (5 /2" x 10 1/16" x 3/4")
1 1 MAS42 1 MAS24 - - 1 MAS62 1 MA72 1 MA92
5 1 MAS43 1 MAS24 - - 1 MAS62 1 MA72 1 MA92
6 1 MAS42 1 MAS24 1 MAS22 - 1 MAS63 1 MA73 1 MA93
7 140x374x19 1 MAS43 1 MAS24 1 MAS22 - 1 MAS63 1 MA73 1 MA93
(5 1/2" x 14 3/4" x 3/4")
8 1 MAS42 2 MAS24 - - 1 MAS63 1 MA73 1 MA93
9 1 MAS43 2 MAS24 - - 1 MAS63 1 MA73 1 MA93
10 280x256x19 1 MAS42 2 MAS24 1 MAS22 - 2 MAS62 2 MA72 -
(11" x 10 1/16" x 3/4")
13 1 MAS43 3 MAS24 - - 2 MAS62 2 MA72 -
14 1 MAS42 3 MAS24 1 MAS22 1 MAS20 2 MAS63 2 MA73 -
280x374x19
17 1 MAS43 4 MAS24 - 1 MAS20 2 MAS63 2 MA73 -
M 21
(11" x 14 3/4" x 3/4")
1 MAS43 5 MAS24 - - 2 MAS63 2 MA73 -
A 27
29
560x256x19
(22 1/16" x 10 1/16" x 3/4")
1 MAS43
1 MAS43
6 MAS24 1 MAS22
7 MAS24 -
-
-
4 MAS62
4 MAS62
4 MA72
4 MA72
-
-
T 31 420x374x19
(16 9/16" x 14 3/4"x 3/4")
1 MAS43 7 MAS24 1 MAS22 - 3 MAS63 3 MA73 -
33 1 MAS43 8 MAS24 - - 3 MAS63 3 MA73 -
R 38 1 MAS42 9 MAS24 1 MAS22 1 MAS20 4 MAS63 4 MA73 -
I 40
43
560x374x19
(22 1/16" x 14 3/4" x 3/4")
1 MAS42
1 MAS43
10 MAS24
10 MAS24 1 MAS22
- 1 MAS20
-
4 MAS63
4 MAS63
4 MA73
4 MA73
-
-
X 45 1 MAS43 11 MAS24 - - 4 MAS63 4 MA73 -
128
(MT11 - Gb2012)
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS MODY SERIES
PUSH-BUTTONS
4+1 INTERCOMS
Push-button panels in extruded aluminium made up
Module frames complete with back box 124 64
4 7 / 8" 2 / 2"
1 of modular elements. Suitable for the most diverse
installation requirements.
395 MD71. 72. 73. 74. Plastic back boxes complete with
15 / 16 "
9
module frames.
304.5 MD81.82.83.804.84.86.808.89.812. Aluminium

12 "
hood covers. To be added to MD71.72.73.74 back
boxes.
*
213
8 3 / 8"
7+1
MD91.92.93.904.94.96.908.99.912. Anodized alu-
minium rain shelters with module frames. Used for
121.5 wall mounting.
VIDEOINTERCOMS
4 13 / 16"
19
MD 71 MD 72 MD 73 MD 74 3
/4"
Hood covers 151 276

5 15 /16" 10 7 / 8"
414.5 16 5 /16"
323 12 11 /16"
231.5 9 1 / 8"
140
5 1 / 2"
MD 81 MD 82 MD 83 MD 804 MD 84 MD 86 MD 808
Rain shelter with module frames 401 40

15 13 /16" 1 9 /16"
151
5 15 /16"
414.5 16 5 /16"
414.5 16 /16"
5
323
12 11 /16"
323 12 /16"
11
231.5 9 1 / 8"
140
5 1 / 2"
25
1"
MD 89 MD 812
MD 91 MD 92 MD 93 MD 904
276 401 80
10 7 / 8" 15 13 /16" 3 1 / 8"
414.5 16 5 / 16"
M
323 12 11 / 16"
O
D
231.5
9 /8 "
1
Y
65
2 9 /16"
MD 94 MD 96 MD 908 MD 99 MD 912
129
(MT11 - Gb2012)
PUSH-BUTTONS MODY series
4+1 INTERCOMS
1 row push-button modules ELECTRIC DOOR SPEAKER
Modules for electric door speaker (amplifier) 91 25.5

3 9 /16" 1"
55
2 3 /16"
*
MD 10 MD 11 MD 12
without buttons 1 call button 2 call buttons
7+1
MD 30.
Button modules It consists of a double amplifier (receiver and
transmitter) with adjustable volume of 2 chan-
VIDEOINTERCOMS
nels. Also fittable to Prestige and ErreP/R

series push-button panels (for ErreP/R door
stations by means of 299/1 adapter).
Transmitting volume adjustment

MD 21 MD 22 MD 23 MD 24
1 call button 2 call buttons 3 call buttons 4 call buttons
2 row push-button modules
Modules for electric door speaker (amplifier)

Receiving volume adjustment
Terminals
1 audio receiver
2 audio transmitter
3 positive power supply 6 ÷ 8Vdc - 60mA
4 ground
MD 122 MD 124
Dismounting and protection of name la-
Button modules bels
MD 222 MD 224 MD 226 MD 228

Modules: blank, number, amplified door stations, access control and

cameras
50 Dismounting of name holder to insert name

label.
MD20 MD50 MD 100 MD 200

blank module number module Amplified door sta- Amplified door sta-
M tion with 1 call button
(see page 132)
tion with 2 call but-
tons (see page 132)
O 1 2 3
D 4
A
5
0
6
Y In any button module, in order to avoid the

dismounting of name holder, insert a 3MAx12
FC52P. Keypad FP52 . Proximity MD41. MD41D. screw in the holes shown in the picture for each
module for access reader for access Black and white cameras. name plate to be blocked. Screws are not
control (see char- control (see charac- MD41C. Colour cam- supplied by the manufacturer.
acteristics on page teristics on page eras (see characteristics
132). 132). on page 131).
130
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1 INTERCOMS
CAMERAS
For the realisation of video intercom systems - Video intercom system with coaxial cable
you must select the camera according to the - Video intercom system with twisted pair
type of installation:
Adjustments
For system with coaxial cable For system with twisted pair If necessary, you can manually modify the cam-
MD41. MD41D. era position by means of the horizontal and
*
B/W adjustable camera complete with: B/W adjustable camera complete with: vertical adjustments located on the back of the
- solid-state sensor (CCD), electronic autoiris, - solid-state sensor (CCD), electronic autoiris, camera.
7+1
3.6mm fixed optics and 6 infrared LEDs; 3.6mm fixed optics and 6 infrared LEDs; To do this, you must:
- front plate of anodized aluminium with break- - front plate of anodized aluminium with break- - remove the upper screw of the push-button
proof transparent screen; proof transparent screen; panel to access the back of the camera;
VIDEOINTERCOMS
- horizontal and vertical adjustment. - horizontal and vertical adjustment. - loosen the screw of the horizontal or vertical
adjustment (or both screws, if you want to
adjust the image in all the directions);
MD41C Color.
- move the camera in the desired direction;
Colour adjustable camera complete with:
- tighten the screw to block the camera in the
- solid-state sensor (CCD), autoiris and 4mm
desired position;
fixed optics;
Y - fix the push-button panel.
- front plate of anodized aluminium with break- F
proof transparent screen; X
H
- horizontal and vertical adjustment. Horizontal (± 15°)
Terminals
Y Positive video signal output
Vertical (± 15°)
F Ground
X Negative video signal output
V H Power supply input
M
F
H
Note
For colour installations use the video signal
Terminals converter CV01 (see page 150).
V Video signal output
M Ground
F Not connected
H Power supply input
Technical data MD41 MD41C MD41D
Power supply 21±3Vdc 21±3Vdc 15÷21Vdc

Operating current 0.3A 0.4A 0.3A
Video signal output 1Vpp on 75Ω 1Vpp on 75Ω 1Vpp balanced
Video signal standard CCIR PAL CCIR
Minimum illumination 2 Lux 2.5 Lux 2 Lux
White balance - auto -
Sensor CCD 1/4" B/W CCD 1/3" colour CCD 1/4" B/W
Number of pixels 291000 291000 291000
Horizontal frequency 15625Hz 15625Hz 15625Hz
Vertical frequency 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz
Lens 3.6mm; F5 4mm; F4 3.6mm; F5
Focus 0.1m ÷ ∞ 0.6m ÷ ∞ 0.1m ÷ ∞
Autoiris
electronic
± 15°
electronic
± 15°
electronic
± 15° M
Vertical adjustment ± 15° ± 15° ± 15°
Max. permissible humidity
-10°÷+40°C
80%RH
-10°÷+40°C
80%RH
-10°÷+40°C
80%RH
O
D
Note
MD40, MD40C and MD40D cameras have the same specifications as models MD41, MD41C
and MD41D, except that they have not horizontal and vertical adjustment.
Y
131
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1 INTERCOMS
AMPLIFIED DOOR STATIONS ACCESS CONTROL KEYPAD PROXIMITY READER FOR ACCESS
124 124
CONTROL
52 45
4 7 /8" 2 1 /16" 4 7 /8" 1 3 /4 " 124 45
4 7 /8" 1 3 /4 "
1 2 3
4 5 6
90 90 888
9
3 9
7 8 9
90
3 /16" /16" A 0 B
3 /16"
9
*
7+1
19 19
MD 100. 1 button module. 3
/4" FC52P.
3
/4" 19
FP52. 3
/4"
Be used in all intercom, telephone, intercom- Access control keypad with 12 digits and 2 This article allows for the activation of 2 relays
VIDEOINTERCOMS
municating and video intercom systems. relays for lock release. 4 programmable ac- by means of keytags or electronic ISO cards
Complete with electric door speaker amplified cess codes for each relay. Programmable door based on transponder technology.
in the two channels, receiving adjustable vol- opening time from 1 up 99 sec. for each relay Programmable activation time from 1 to 63
ume, call button and anodized aluminium front (or bistable operation of relay 1). Acoustic and seconds for every relay. 4 user cards and 1
plate. It can replace the MD11 and MD30 mod- visual confirmation for entered keys, accepted master card supplied with the product. Acoustic
ule and use all the other accessories of the programming and for wrong codes. and visual control signals and 3-digit display to
Mody series. view numbers and codes during set-up and
Technical data operation.
MD 200. 2 buttons module. Power supply: 12Vac/dc ±10%
Stand-by current: 0.015A Technical data
Terminals Maximum current consumption: 0.1A Power supply 12Vac/dc ±10%
- ground Contact ratings: 12Vac-5A. Stand-by current 0.1A
supply 13Vac/ 12-21Vdc-60mA Numbers of codes for relays 1: 4 Maximum current consumption 0.25A
1 audio receiver Numbers of codes for relays 2: 4 or direct Contact ratings 24Vac - 2A
2 audio transmitter activation Max. number of cards 490
C call push-buttons common Activation time for each relay: from 1 to 99sec. Max. number of Master cards 10
call push-buttons (or bistable relay 1) Number of relays 2
name-plate lamp (24V-70mA) Operating temperature: 0° ÷ +40°C Relay time 1 to 63 sec.
Maximum permissible humidity: 85% RH Minimum recognition distance 3 cm
1 2
Maximum recognition time 1 sec.
Terminals
Operating temperature 0° ÷ +40°C
1 normally closed contact of relay 2
Maximum permitted humidity 85% RH
3 common contact of relay 2 Terminals
3
4 normally closed contact of relay 1 +/A positive or alternate current input
5 normally open contact of relay 1 -/A ground or alternate current input
6 common contact of relay 1 PB door open button
7 ground or alternate voltage input NC2 normally closed contact of relay 2
12 8 positive or alternate voltage input NA2 normally open contact of relay 2
4 9-10 connection to optional door lock release C2 common terminal of relay 2
NC1 normally closed contact of relay 1
NA1 normally open contact of relay 1
C1 common terminal of relay 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5
888
door 12Vac relay 1 relay 2
1 Lamp terminals release 12Vdc
2 Push-button terminal board
3 Common contact of call push-buttons
4 Terminals on stair light push-button
5 External volume adjustment
6 Terminal board for connection to the system
M Card recognition LED. It turns ON during
card recognition.
O Installation diagrams
For the installation of the MD100 and MD200
Relay activation LED. It indicates relay de-
activation (red) or activation (green).
modules see the installation diagrams for sys-
D tems with one entrance.
programming.
Y Card cancellation and system setup LED.

It turns ON during Master or user card can-
cellation and system setup.
132
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1 INTERCOMS
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
5' 5"
aaaaaaaaaa Openings for cables.

height of about 1.65m from the floor keeping
the front edges flush-mounted and vertical to
the finished plaster.
sunlight or other direct or reflected light Mounting of button module.
sources with high intensity do not hit the
camera lens.
M
Insertion of cable bush between back boxes.
The cable bushes must be inserted before
O
brickwork.
(a) D
Lower fixing of the module frame on back box.
Y
It is advised to insert a protection (a) between
Lower fixing of the module frame. panel and wall while fixing.
133
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1 INTERCOMS
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Alignment of the panel.
Hood covers
Mounting of frame bottom and door speaker

(amplifier).
Modules insertion and wall fixing of rain shelter.
Fixing of the hood cover between the back box

and the module frame.
Rain shelters
M
O
D
Y
Top fixing of the panel. Dismounting of the frame top side from the rain Mounting of the frame top to the rain shelter.
shelter.
134
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Examples of compositions of Mody push-button panels in intercom systems
4+1 INTERCOMS
1 call button
*
buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Composition board of Mody push-button panels.

N° Dimensions Module for Door speaker Button modules and Back box and Hood Rain
calls (mm / inches) speaker (amplifier) number or blank module module frame covers shelters
1 124x121.5x19 1 MD11 1 MD30 - - - 1 MD71 1 MD81 1 MD91
(47/8"x 413/16"x 3/4")
2 1 MD12 1 MD30 - - - 1 MD71 1 MD81 1 MD91
4 124x213x19 1 MD10 1 MD30 1 MD24 - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
(47/8"x 83/8"x 3/4")
6 1 MD12 1 MD30 1 MD24 - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
7 124x304.5x19 1 MD10 1 MD30 1 MD24 1 MD23 - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
(4 7/8" x 12" x 3/4")
10 1 MD12 1 MD30 2 MD24 - - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
12 248x213x19 1 MD10 1 MD30 3 MD24 - - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
(9 3/4" x 8 3/8" x 3/4")
14 1 MD12 1 MD30 3 MD24 - - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
16 1 MD10 1 MD30 4 MD24 - 1 * 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
248x304.5x19
19 (9 3/4" x 12" x 3/4")
1 MD11 1 MD30 4 MD24 1 MD22 - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
22 1 MD12 1 MD30 5 MD24 - - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
24 1 MD10 1 MD30 6 MD24 - 1 * 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
248x395x19
27 (9 3/4" x 15 9/16" x 3/4") 1 MD11 1 MD30 6 MD24 1 MD22 - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
30 1 MD12 1 MD30 7 MD24 - - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
32 372x304.5x19
1 MD12 1 MD30 7 MD24 1 MD22 - 3 MD73 1 MD89 1 MD99
34
37
(14 5/8" x 12" x 3/4") 1 MD12
1 MD11
1 MD30
1 MD30
8 MD24
9 MD24
-
- 2
-
*
3 MD73
3 MD74
1 MD89
1 MD812
1 MD99
1 MD912
M
40
42
372x395x19
(14 5/8" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
1 MD12
1 MD12
1 MD30
1 MD30
9 MD24
10 MD24
1 MD22
-
1
1
*
*
3 MD74
3 MD74
1 MD812
1 MD812
1 MD912
1 MD912
O
46 1 MD12 1 MD30 11 MD24 - - 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912 D
48 1 MD10 1 MD30 12 MD24 - 3 * 4 MD74 - -
52 496x395x19
(19 1/2" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
1 MD10 1 MD30 13 MD24 - 2 * 4 MD74 - - Y
57 1 MD11 1 MD30 14 MD24 - 1 * 4 MD74 - -
62 1 MD12 1 MD30 15 MD24 - - 4 MD74 - -
or MD74 or MD804 or MD904 * MD20 or MD50 or FC52P -
It replaces
MD71, 72, 73, 74
135
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Examples of compositions of Mody push-button panels in videointercom systems
4+1 INTERCOMS
1 call 2 call 4 call 6 call 10 call 7 call 10 call 12 call buttons 15 call buttons
*
button buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons

7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS

N° Dimensions Camera Module for Door speaker Button modules and Back box and Hood Rain
calls (mm / inches) module speaker (amplifier) number or blank module module frame covers shelters
1 124x213x19 1 MD41 1 MD11 1 MD30 - - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
(47/8"x 83/8"x 3/4")
2 1 MD41 1 MD12 1 MD30 - - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
4 124x304.5x19 1 MD41 1 MD10 1 MD30 1 MD24 - - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
(4 7/8" x 12" x 3/4")
6 1 MD41 1 MD12 1 MD30 1 MD24 - - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
7 248x213x19 1 MD41 1 MD10 1 MD30 1 MD24 1 MD23 - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
(9 3/4" x 8 3/8" x 3/4")
10 1 MD41 1 MD12 1 MD30 2 MD24 - - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
12 1 MD41 1 MD10 1 MD30 3 MD24 - 1 * 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
248x304.5x19
15 (9 3/4" x 12" x 3/4")
1 MD41 1 MD11 1 MD30 3 MD24 1 MD22 - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
18 1 MD41 1 MD12 1 MD30 4 MD24 - - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
20 1 MD41 1 MD10 1 MD30 5 MD24 - 1 * 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
(9 3/4" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
25 1 MD41 1 MD11 1 MD30 6 MD24 - - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
26 1 MD41 1 MD12 1 MD30 6 MD24 - - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
(14 5/8" x 12" x 3/4")
30 1 MD41 1 MD12 1 MD30 7 MD24 - - 3 MD73 1 MD89 1 MD99
33 1 MD41 1 MD11 1 MD30 8 MD24 - 2 * 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912
M 36 1 MD41 1 MD12 1 MD30 8 MD24 1 MD22 1 * 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912
372x395x19
O 38
40
(14 /8" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
5 1 MD41
1 MD41
1 MD12
1 MD12
1 MD30
1 MD30
8 MD24
9 MD24
2 MD22
1 MD22
-
-
3 MD74
3 MD74
1 MD812
1 MD812
1 MD912
1 MD912
D 42
45
1 MD41
1 MD41
1 MD12
1 MD11
1 MD30
1 MD30
10 MD24
10 MD24
-
2 MD22 2
-
*
3 MD74
4 MD74
1 MD812
-
1 MD912
-
Y 50 496x395x19
(19 1/2" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
1 MD41 1 MD12 1 MD30 11 MD24 2 MD22 1 * 4 MD74 - -
54 1 MD41 1 MD12 1 MD30 13 MD24 - 1 * 4 MD74 - -
58 1 MD41 1 MD12 1 MD30 14 MD24 - - 4 MD74 - -
or MD74 or MD804 or MD904 * MD20 or MD50 or FC52P It replaces
MD72, 73, 74
136
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Examples of compositions of Mody push-button panels in intercom systems
4+1 INTERCOMS
50
2 call
buttons
*
buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons
7+1
50
VIDEOINTERCOMS

N° Dimensions Module for Door speaker Button modules and Back box and Hood Rain
calls (mm / inches) speaker (amplifier) number or blank module module frame covers shelters
2 124x121.5x19 1 MD122 1 MD30 - - - 1 MD71 1 MD81 1 MD91
(47/8"x 413/16"x 3/4")
4 1 MD124 1 MD30 - - - 1 MD71 1 MD81 1 MD91
8 124x213x19 1 MD10 1 MD30 1 MD228 - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
(47/8"x 83/8"x 3/4")
12 1 MD124 1 MD30 1 MD228 - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
14 124x304.5x19 1 MD10 1 MD30 1 MD228 1 MD226 - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
(4 7/8" x 12" x 3/4")
20 1 MD124 1 MD30 2 MD228 - - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
24 248x213x19 1 MD10 1 MD30 3 MD228 - - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
(9 3/4" x 8 3/8" x 3/4")
28 1 MD124 1 MD30 3 MD228 - - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
32 1 MD10 1 MD30 4 MD228 - 1 * 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
248x304.5x19
38 (9 3/4" x 12" x 3/4")
1 MD10 1 MD30 4 MD228 1 MD226 - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
44 1 MD124 1 MD30 5 MD228 - - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
48 1 MD10 1 MD30 6 MD228 - 1 * 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
248x395x19
54 (9 3/4" x 15 9/16" x 3/4") 1 MD122 1 MD30 6 MD228 1 MD224 - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
60 1 MD124 1 MD30 7 MD228 - - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
64 372x304.5x19
1 MD10 1 MD30 8 MD228 - - 3 MD73 1 MD89 1 MD99
68
74
(14 5/8" x 12" x 3/4") 1 MD124
1 MD122
1 MD30
1 MD30
8 MD228
9 MD228
-
- 2
-
*
3 MD73
3 MD74
1 MD89
1 MD812
1 MD99
1 MD912
M
80
84
372x395x19
(14 5/8" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
1 MD124
1 MD124
1 MD30
1 MD30
9 MD228
10 MD228
1 MD224
-
1
1
*
*
3 MD74
3 MD74
1 MD812
1 MD812
1 MD912
1 MD912
O
92 1 MD124 1 MD30 11 MD228 - - 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912 D
96 1 MD10 1 MD30 12 MD228 - 3 * 4 MD74 - -
104 496x395x19
(19 1/2" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
1 MD10 1 MD30 13 MD228 - 2 * 4 MD74 - - Y
114 1 MD122 1 MD30 14 MD228 - 1 * 4 MD74 - -
124 1 MD124 1 MD30 15 MD228 - - 4 MD74 - -
or MD74 or MD804 or MD904 * MD20 or MD50 or FC52P -
It replaces
MD71, 72, 73, 74
137
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Examples of compositions of Mody push-button panels in videointercom systems
4+1 INTERCOMS
2 call 4 call 8 call 12 call 20 call call 14 call 20 call 24 call buttons 30 call buttons
*
buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons buttons

7+1
50
VIDEOINTERCOMS
50

N° Dimensions Camera Module for Door speaker Button modules and Back box and Hood Rain
calls (mm / inches) module speaker (amplifier) number or blank module module frame covers shelters
2 124x213x19 1 MD41 1 MD122 1 MD30 - - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
(47/8"x 83/8"x 3/4")
4 1 MD41 1 MD124 1 MD30 - - - 1 MD72 1 MD82 1 MD92
(4 7/8" x 12" x 3/4")
12 1 MD41 1 MD124 1 MD30 1 MD228 - - 1 MD73 1 MD83 1 MD93
(9 3/4" x 8 3/8" x 3/4")
20 1 MD41 1 MD124 1 MD30 2 MD228 - - 2 MD72 1 MD84 1 MD94
24 1 MD41 1 MD10 1 MD30 3 MD228 - 1 * 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
248x304.5x19
30 (9 3/4" x 12" x 3/4") 1 MD41 1 MD10 1 MD30 3 MD228 1 MD226 - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
36 1 MD41 1 MD124 1 MD30 4 MD228 - - 2 MD73 1 MD86 1 MD96
42 1 MD41 1 MD122 1 MD30 5 MD228 - 1 * 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
(9 3/4" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
50 1 MD41 1 MD122 1 MD30 6 MD228 - - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
52 1 MD41 1 MD124 1 MD30 6 MD228 - - 2 MD74 1 MD808 1 MD908
(14 5/8" x 12" x 3/4")
60 1 MD41 1 MD124 1 MD30 7 MD228 - - 3 MD73 1 MD89 1 MD99
68 1 MD41 1 MD124 1 MD30 8 MD228 - 2 * 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912
M 72 1 MD41 1 MD124 1 MD30 8 MD228 1 MD224 1 * 3 MD74 1 MD812 1 MD912
372x395x19
O 76
80
(14 5/8" x 15 9/16" x 3/4") 1 MD41
1 MD41
1 MD124
1 MD124
1 MD30
1 MD30
8 MD228 2 MD224
9 MD228 1 MD224
-
-
3 MD74
3 MD74
1 MD812
1 MD812
1 MD912
1 MD912
D 84
90
1 MD41
1 MD41
1 MD124
1 MD122
1 MD30
1 MD30
10 MD228 -
10 MD228 2 MD224 2
-
*
3 MD74
4 MD74
1 MD812
-
1 MD912
-
Y 100
108
496x395x19
(19 1/2" x 15 9/16" x 3/4")
1 MD41
1 MD41
1 MD124
1 MD124
1 MD30
1 MD30
11 MD228 2 MD224
13 MD228 -
1
1
*
*
4 MD74
4 MD74
-
-
-
-
116 1 MD41 1 MD124 1 MD30 14 MD228 - - 4 MD74 - -
or MD74 or MD804 or MD904 * MD20 or MD50 or FC52P It replaces
MD72, 73, 74
138
(MT11 - Gb2012)
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS UP series
PUSH-BUTTONS UP series
4+1 INTERCOMS
Surface mounted version Flush mounted version
106 46 100 42.5
4 3 /16" 1 13 /16" 3 15 /16" 1 11 /16"
*
151 148
7+1
5 15 /16" 5 13 /16"
VIDEOINTERCOMS
UP 100. Amplified push-button panel with 1 call button. UP 11. Amplified push-button panel with 1 call button.
Be used in all 4+1 intercom and intercommunicating systems. Be used in all 4+1 intercom and intercommunicating systems.
Complete with electric door speaker amplifier in the two channels, Complete with electric door speaker amplifier in the two channels,
volume control of the receiving channel, front panel in anodized alu- volume control of the receiving channel, front panel in anodized alu-
minium with call button. Wall-mountable with expansion plugs. minium with call button.
To install it you must:
UP 200. Amplified push-button panel with 2 call buttons. - fix the back box to the wall;
- install the speaker unit;
- make the connections;
- screw the front panel onto the back box.
UP 12. Amplified push-button panel with 2 call buttons.
Terminals
- ground
13Vac-70mA voltage input
1 audio receiver
2 audio transmitter
Wires in electronic call systems

External volume adjustment C the yellow wire must not be used; it
is recommended to insulate or cut
it.
External volume adjustment

ANTILOCALE
U
P
139
(MT11 - Gb2012)
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS ErreP/R series
PUSH-BUTTONS ErreP/R series AMPLIFIED DOOR STATIONS
4+1 INTERCOMS
376 14 13 /16"
40 122
313 12 5 /16"
282 11 1 /16"
250 9 13 /16"
219
8 5 /8 "
164
*
7+1
RP12 RP10 RP8 RP6 RP4 RP2 RP1

VIDEOINTERCOMS
RP. Push-button panels with anod- RP100. 1-button amplified door station.
313 12 5 /16" ized aluminium front panel and buttons, It is complete with an amplifier, in both chan-
282 11 1 /16" complete with name plate lights. The nels, electric door speaker, volume control of
250 9 13 /16" electric door speaker can be fitted in- the receiving channel, front panel in anodized
219 side the push-button panel. aluminium, call button, rain shelter and name
8 5 /8 " plate light.
The unit should be flush-mounted
and the microphone should be It can be installed on the wall with expansion
firmly attached to the front panel to plugs or on a wall box.
avoid feedback and to obtain the
highest audio quality. RP200. 2-button amplified door station.
R14 R12 R10 R8 Technical data

Power supply: 13Vac
40mm 1 9 /16" ELECTRIC DOOR SPEAKER (amplifier) Operating current: 130mA
R. Push-button panels
provided only with buttons. 337C. It features a double amplifier (receiver
An electric door speaker Terminals
and transmitter); receiver has volume control. It
cannot be fitted inside. When 2 audio receiver
is applicable inside the RP or TM push-button 1 audio transmitter
such panels are installed to- panels (or in other push-button panels by means C common contact of call push-buttons
gether with the previous of the adaptor art.299). P1 call push-button
ones, a system with over 12 Provided with an electret microphone and tropi- P2 call push-button
calls is obtained (see table). calized speaker. - ground
alternate voltage input 13Vac
Terminals
1 audio receiver Note. The W1 jumper must be cut in order to be
2 audio transmitter used in electronic call systems.
3 positive power supply 6÷8Vdc -60mA
4 ground
Instructions of the various ErreP/R push-button panel series and their dimensions en mm (and inches)
L and H = Dimensions of the panel l and h = Dimensions of the back-box
L L L L L L
H H
Series R RP R+RP R+RP+R R+RP+R+R R+R+RP+R+R
L 112 (4 7/16") 224 (8 13/16") 336 (13 1/4") 448 (17 5/8") 560 (22 1/16") L
H h
E R8 RP1 R8+RP1=9 2R8+RP1=17 3R8+RP1=25 4R8+RP1=33
218.5 206.5
r (8 5/8") R8 RP2 R8+RP2=10 2R8+RP2=18 3R8+RP2=26 4R8+RP2=34 (8 1/8")
r 250
(9 13/16")
R10 RP4 R10+RP4=14 2R10+RP4=24 3R10+RP4=34 4R10+RP4=44
238
(9 3/8")
e 281.5
(11 1/16")
R12 RP6 R12+RP6=18 2R12+RP6=30 3R12+RP6=42 4R12+RP6=54 269.5
(10 5/8")
P/ 313
(12 5/16")
R14 RP8 R14+RP8=22 2R14+RP8=36 3R14+RP8=50 4R14+RP8=64 301
(11 7/8")
R H
l
103 (4 1/16") 215 (8 7/16") 327 (12 7/8") 439 (17 5/16") 551 (21 11/16")
l
h
140
(MT11 - Gb2012)
POWER SUPPLIES
Power supplies are not provided with fuses, but
4+1 INTERCOMS
they are protected against overloading or short-
circuiting by a heat sensor (thermoprotector),
to restore power, it is necessary to cut OFF the
mains voltage for about one minute. Reconnect 65 65
power after having eliminated the problem. 2 9 /16" 2 9 /16"
Do not obstruct the openings for ventilation or
heat dissipation to allow the equipment to op-
erate correctly. The power supply can be fixed 107.5 107.5
on DIN bar or screwed to the wall.
4 1 /4" 89 4 1 /4" 89
All power supplies can provide power for a
3 1 /2" 3 1 /2"
*
maximum of 6 (24V-3W) lamps for illuminating
push-button panel name plates. If required add
7+1
the necessary PRS210 transformers (approx. PRS 240. STABILIZED POWER SUPPLY PRS226E. POWER SUPPLY –
1 for 10 lamps). WITH 2 ELECTRONIC RINGING GENERA- SWITCHER FOR INTERCOMMUNICATING
VIDEOINTERCOMS
TORS. SYSTEMS.
General technical data Power supply with two electronic ringing gen-
Input voltage: 127Vac or 220-230Vac erators for calls. It supplies the voltages needed Used to power intercom intercommunicating
Working temperature: 0°÷+50°C
for the correct operation of intercom systems. systems. It allows for automatic switching be-
Maximum of humidity: 90%RH
tween the audio connection of the external door
Technical data station and the intercommunicating service to
Power: 18VA the intercoms.
Ringing frequency: 450Hz modulated
Warning Housing: DIN 6 modules A Technical data
All power supplies in this manual can work Weight: 0.5 Kg. (1.1lb) Power: 18VA
either 127Vac or 220-230Vac. Approved by: VDE according to the Safety Housing: DIN 6 modules A
Check carefully the right connection. Standard EN60065 Weight: 0.5 Kg (1.1lb)
Approved: VDE according to the Safety Standard
Output terminals EN60065
- Ground
127Vac 220-230Vac + Audio line power supply 7.2Vdc-0.1A Output terminals
X Power supply for aux. services 12Vdc-0.2A - Ground
Power supply 13Vac for: + 8Vdc-0.1A power supply for door speaker unit
- name plate lamps (continuous load 0.6A) X 12Vdc-0.2A power supply for auxiliary serv-
0 127V 230V
- electric door lock and bells (intermittent load ices
0 127V 230V
1A) 13Vac power supply for:
C+ Modulated electronic call output 12Vpp-0.25A - name plate light, switcher (continuous serv-
7 Continuous electronic call output 12Vpp-0.25A ice 0.6A)
- electric door lock (intermittent service 1A)
7 Electronic call output for intercommunication
Y Electronic call output for push-button panels
A Output for alternate current calls from push-
button panels 13Vca-0.15A
65 G Audio line receiver from intercoms
2 Audio line transmitter to intercoms
2 9 /16"
65 D Audio line transmitter to electric door speaker
2 9 /16" C+ Audio line receiver from electric door speaker
9 Electronic call input for audio switching in
multi-family systems
70 4 Common contact of relay activated by termi-
89
2 3 /4" nal 9
54 3 1 /2" 4a Normally closed contact of relay activated by
89 terminal 9
2 1 /8" 3 1 /2" PRS 220. STABILIZED INTERCOM 4b Normally open contact of relay activated by
POWER SUPPLY. terminal 9
PRS 210. TRANSFORMER.
Used in intercom systems where the ringing
generator is located in a different power supply
Used to power 13Vac devices; MD100, MD200,
or service module.
RP100, RP200, UP series amplified external
door stations, accessories, additional door Technical data
locks, name plate light, etc. Power: 15VA
Technical data Weight: 0.45 Kg. (0.99lb)
Power: 15VA Approved by: VDE-SASO according to the Safety
Output voltage: 13Vac Standard EN60065
Maximum load: 0.7A Output terminals
Maximum of intermittent load: 1A - Ground
Housing: DIN 3 modules A + Audio line power supply 6Vdc-0.1A
Weight: 0.42 Kg. (0.93lb) Power supply 13Vac for:
Approved by: VDE according to the Safety - name plate lamps, exchangers (continuous
Standard EN60065 load 0.6A)
- electric door lock and bells (intermittent load
1A)
141
(MT11 - Gb2012)
POWER SUPPLY AND CONTROL UNIT
4+1 INTERCOMS
74 65 65
2 15/16" 2 9 /16" 2 9 /16"
140 107.5 70
5 1/2 " 89 4 1 /4" 89 89
*
3 1/2 " 2 3 /4"

3 1 /2" 3 1 /2"
7+1
1281E. AUDIO-VIDEO POWER SUPPLY- 1281. STABILIZED POWER SUPPLY WITH 1282E. AUDIO-VIDEO TIMER.
SWITCHING REGULATOR.
VIDEOINTERCOMS
TIMER.
Connected to the stabilized power supply
It allows to power in timed way (about 100 Connected to the timer art.1282E, allows to art.1281, it allows a video intercom system to
seconds) a videointercom installation with elec- drive at low voltage a monitor (or 2 in parallel in be timed (50 seconds).
tronic call. Moreover it allows to switch-ON one FLAT type), a camera unit with a solid state It also allows time to be increased during a
monitor at a time and to switch it OFF at the end sensor (CCD), electric door lock, name plate conversation (3 minutes), automatic power OFF
of the timing. lights, etc. at the end of the conversation; switching ON of
one monitor at a time. By adding the intercom-
Technical data Technical data municating module art.1443E on the proper
Input voltage 127 or 220-230Vac Input voltage 127 or 220-230Vac connector, an intercommunicating service with
Frequency 50/60Hz Frequency 50/60Hz privacy towards the external station is obtained.
Power 48VA Power 48VA
Operating temperature 0°÷+40°C Operating temperature 0°÷+40°C Technical data
Maximum permissible humidity 90%RH Maximum permissible humidity 90%RH Turn ON time: -50 sec. with handset replaced
Housing DIN 8 modules A Housing DIN 8 modules A -3 min. with handset lifted
Weight 0.95Kg. Weight 0.95Kg. Operating temperature 0°÷+50°C
Approved VDE according to safety stan- Approved VDE according to safety stan- Maximum permissible humidity 90%RH
dard EN60065 dard EN60065 Housing DIN 6 modules A
Terminals Terminals
Terminals
A Output voltage 13Vac for: A Output voltage 13Vac for:

IV Logic command output of timing 0/5Vdc
-name plate light, exchangers and timer (con- -name plate light, exchangers and timer (con-
X Auxiliary voltage output 12Vdc-0.2A
tinuous service 0.6A) tinuous service 0.6A)
A Alternate voltage input-output 13Vac-1.6A
-electric door lock and bells (intermittent ser- -electric door lock and bells (intermittent ser-
F Ground
vice 1A) vice 1A)
H Timed positive voltage input-output 18÷21Vdc-
- Ground - Ground 1A max.
H Timed positive voltage input-output 18÷21Vdc- + Continuous output 21Vdc-1A (timed opera-
4 Control switching ON input from the monitors
1A max. tion)
7.5Vdc-8mA
F Ground I Logic command input from timing
5 Command for door lock release command
X Auxiliary voltage output 12Vdc-0.2A 0 = activated
3mA
4 Control switching ON input from the monitors +5Vdc = non activated
S Alternate Voltage for door lock release 13Vac-
7.5Vdc-8mA 1A max
5 Command for door lock release command Notes 1D Transmitter audio channel input 5Vdc-20mA
3mA - The power supply is not provided with fuses, 2D Receiver audio channel input 1.5Vdc-20mA
S Alternate voltage for door lock release 13Vac- but all of its outputs are protected against 3D Audio ground
1A max overloading and short circuiting by tempera- C+ Electronic ringing generator for calls from ex-
C+ Electronic ringing generator for calls from ture sensors. To reset the power supply, power ternal station 12Vpp-0.25A
external station 12Vpp-0.25A must be cut OFF for about one minute and 7 Electronic ringing generator for intercommu-
3+ Positive voltage output 8Vdc-0.1A can be restored after having eliminated the nicating calls 12Vpp-0.25A
problem. 1 Transmitter audio channel output 5Vdc-20mA
Notes - The power supply must be installed in a dry 2 Receiver audio channel output 1.5Vdc-20mA
- The power supply is not provided with fuses, place and can be fixed on DIN bar or on a wall 3+ Positive voltage output 8Vdc-0.1A
but all of its outputs are protected against by using the expansion plugs.
overloading and short circuiting by tempera- - The connection between power supply 1281
ture sensors. To reset the power supply, power and timer 1282E must not to be longer than
must be cut OFF for about one minute and 25cm.
can be restored after having eliminated the
problem.
- The power supply must be installed in a dry
place and can be fixed on DIN bar or on a wall
by using the expansion plugs.
142
(MT11 - Gb2012)
SERVICE MODULES
4+1 INTERCOMS
1443E. INTERCOMMUNICATING MOD-
ULE.
Added inside the timer art.1282E, it allows for

the intercommunicating service with privacy 74 74
towards the external station. 2 15/16" 2 15/16"
140 140
5 1/2 " 89 5 1/2 " 89
*
3 1/2 " 3 1/2 "
7+1
1473. 4-CONTACT ANALOG EX- 1273TV. 7-CONTACT ANALOG EX-
CHANGER. CHANGER.
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Used in systems with 2 or more door stations to It is used in systems with 2 or more video
automatically switch audio lines and door lock entrances for switching automatically the video
release on the calling station. signals, the audio lines and door lock on the
Both 3-4 terminals and 11 (side b) or 5-6 calling entrance. Can be fixed on DIN bar or
terminals and 12 (side a) can be used to acti- with two expansion plugs. In housing DIN 8
1443E vate switching. modules A. For the switching of video signals it
Can be fixed on DIN bar or screwed to the wall is advisable to use terminals 8-8a-8b and 9-
with 2 expansion plugs. 9a-9b, being that they are physically closer.
Technical data Terminals

Power supply: 13Vac; 15÷21Vdc 1 Power supply 13Vac-0.1A (15÷21Vdc)
Current consumption: 0.1A 2 Ground
Number of exchanges: 4 3 and 4 Driver to switch the relay in “b” position
Max. switching current: 5A (50V) - ON position
1282E 5 and 6 Driver to switch the relay in “a” position
Operating temperature: 0° ÷ 50°C - OFF position
Maximum permissible humidity: 90% RH 7,8,9,10,11,12,13 Common contact of relay
7a,8a,9a,10a,11a,12a, 13a OFF position of relay
Terminals contacts
1 Power supply 13Vac-0.1A 7b,8b,9b,10b,11b,12b, 13b ON position of relay
2 Ground contacts
3 and 4 Driver to switch the relay to “b” posi-
tion - ON position 1 7b 7a 8b 8a 9b 9a
Use the trimmer to adjust the intercommunicat- 5 and 6 Driver to switch the relay to “a” posi- 2
ing volume. tion - OFF position 3
7, 8, 9 and 10 Common contact of relays 4 ON (b)

MEMORY
7a, 8a, 9a and 10a OFF position of the relay 5 OFF (a)
contacts 6
7b, 8b, 9b and 10b ON position of the relay 7
contacts 8
9
11 Ground command to switch the relay to “a”
position - OFF position 10b 10a 11b 11a 12b 12a 13b 13a
12 Ground command to switch the relay to “b”
art.1443E position - ON position
13 Electronic call input
1 7b 7a 8b 8a 9b 9a 10b 10a 10
2 11
3 12
13
4 ON (b)
MEMORY
5 OFF (a)
11
12
13 7 8 9 10
143
(MT11 - Gb2012)
SERVICE MODULES
4+1 INTERCOMS
65 65 65
2 9 /16" 2 9 /16" 2 9 /16"
70 54 70
89 89 89
2 3 /4" 2 3 /4"
*
1
3 1 /2" 2 /8" 3 1 /2" 3 1 /2"
7+1
2443. AMPLIFIER-SWITCHER FOR IN- GN30. ELECTRONIC RINGING GENERA- RL37. RELAY MODULE.
TERCOMMUNICATING SYSTEMS. TOR WITH 3 DIFFERENT SOUNDS.
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Relay module used to regenerate the elec-

It is suitable for video intercom systems where It allows for differentiating calls from external tronic call for additional 3 intercoms or video
it is necessary to have the intercommunicating door stations or from door station and floor- intercoms. It permits to activate/deactivate max.
service in different flats with privacy towards calls. It can be used either in electronic or 3 additional video power supplies. Complete
both outside and other users. Use one art.2443 alternate current call systems. with electronic ringing generator for intercom-
in every intercommunicating flat. Can be fixed Can be fixed on DIN bar or screwed to the wall munication.
on DIN bar or with two expansion plugs. In with 2 expansion plugs. Can be fixed on DIN bar or screwed to the wall
housing DIN 4 modules A. with 2 expansion plugs.
Technical data
Terminals Power supply: 13Vac Technical data
F General ground Current consumption with ringing ON: 0.6A Power supply: 13Vac
B Power supply 8Vdc-60mA Housing: DIN 3 modules A Current consumption: 0.04A
Power supply 13Vac-70mA Operating temperature: 0° ÷ 50°C Current consumption with ringing ON: 0.6A
12 Connection toward the microphone of the Maximum permissible humidity: 90% RH Number of exchanges: 1
monitors Max. switching current: 1A (24V)
12a Audio output from door station (transmitter Terminals Housing: DIN 4 modules A
channel) Alternate current input Operating temperature:0° ÷ 50°C
13 Connection towards the loudspeaker of the - Ground Maximum permissible humidity: 90% RH
monitors S1 Modulated electronic ringing output (stand-
13a Audio input from the door station (receiver ard tone) Terminals
channel) S2 Continuous electronic ringing output Alternate current input
14 Timed power supply for audio connection S3 Modulated electronic ringing output (acute - Ground
toward the door station 12÷24Vdc-60mA tone) H Timed continuous current input 21Vdc
0 To connect to terminal F when the terminal IV Additional power supply activation
14 is powered to 12Vdc (terminal 8 of the Note. If necessary, the volumes of the electronic C Common contact of relay
monitor) ringing generator can be individually adjusted by NA Normally open contact of relay
means of R4 (S1), R5 (S2) and R6 (S3) trimmers. 9P Electronic call input
Note 9M Regenerated electronic call output activated
If it is necessary to adjust the volume of the by terminal 9P
intercommunicating audio turn trimmer R5. 9R Direct electronic call output from terminal 9P
R4 B 8Vdc voltage output
B 12 13 14
S1
R5 B IV
S2 H
R5 AMPL. R6
7
S3 9M
9R
NA
12a 13a F 0 9P
C
144
(MT11 - Gb2012)
SERVICE MODULES
4+1 INTERCOMS
65 65 65
2 9 /16" 2 9 /16" 2 9 /16"
70 54 70
89 89 89
2 3 /4" 1 2 3 /4"
2 /8"
*
3 1 /2" 3 1 /2" 3 1 /2"
7+1
1471E. RELAY UNIT. 1471. RELAY UNIT. 1472. 2- CONTACT RELAY UNIT.
It is used when it is not possible to actuate As 1471E, with lower number of terminals and As 1471E, with higher number of exchanges
VIDEOINTERCOMS
commands directly. For example: in a small housing. and without terminals 9P and 9T.
- stair light switching ON,
- activation of additional bells, Technical data Technical data
- additional door lock release, etc. Power supply: 13Vac; 12÷24Vdc Power supply: 13Vac; 12÷24Vdc
Can be fixed on DIN bar or screwed to the wall Current consumption: 0.05A Current consumption: 0.05A
with 2 expansion plugs. Number of exchanges: 1 Number of exchanges: 2
Switching current: 5A (50V) Switching current: 1A (24V)
Housing: DIN 3 modules A Housing: DIN 4 modules A
Technical data
Operating temperature: 0° ÷ 50°C Operating temperature: 0° ÷ 50°C
Power supply: 13Vac; 12÷24Vdc
Maximum permissible humidity: 90% RH Maximum permissible humidity: 90% RH
Current consumption: 0,05A
Number of exchanges: 1
Terminals Terminals
Switching current: 1A (24V)
1 Alternate current input 13Vac-dc 1 Alternate current input 13Vac-dc
2 Continuous current input 21Vdc 2 Continuous current input 21Vdc
Operating temperature: 0° ÷ 50°C
3 Negative half-wave input or ground 3 Negative half-wave input or ground
5 Common relay contact 5 Common contact of exchange 1
6 Normally open contact of relay 6 Normally open contact of exchange 1
Terminals
7 Normally closed contact of relay 7 Normally closed contact of exchange 1
1 Alternate current input 13Vac-dc
11 Common contact of exchange 2
2 Continuous current input 21Vdc
12 Normally open contact of exchange 2
3 Negative half-wave input or ground
13 Normally closed contact of exchange 2
5 Common contact of relay
6 Normally open contact of relay 1 6 - Ground
7 Normally closed contact of relay
9P Electronic call input without resistive load 2 7
9T Electronic call input timed operation (1 sec.)
- Ground
5 6 7 12 13
3 1
2
9S
5 11
145
(MT11 - Gb2012)
General characteristics
4+1 INTERCOMS
- The cable runs of intercom and video intercom installations must be Background noise
kept separate from the mains or any other electrical installation as To avoid possible background noise over the speech line, it is advis-
required by the International Safety Standards and the entire able:
installation must be realized in compliance with the safety rules in 5) not to lay intercom or telephone cables in the same runaway as the
force in any specific Country. wires used to power alternate current loads;
- It is necessary to provide a disconnecting and safety switch before the 6) to avoid using the same multi-core cable to transmit audio signals
power supply. Use a single general switch in case of several power and alternate current power supplies (lamps, amplified external door
supplies (also in multiple entrance). stations, electrical door locks). Always use separate wires for alter-
nate current power supplies;
*
- Before connecting the power supply make sure that its rating data
corresponds to this of the mains. 7) not to connect name-plate lamps (or other devices powered with
7+1
- For electromagnetic reasons, all service modules must be installed alternate current) to terminal 4 (-) of the speaker unit; 2 wires must
near their power supply. originate from terminal - (minus sign) of the power supply, one for
terminal 4 of the speaker unit and one for the lamps (or other devices
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Wires powered with alternate current);

1) For the correct operation of the intercom system you must choose the 8) for name-plate lamps, to use an additional 12Vac transformer
correct type of cable. (PRS210 type) with suitable power (consumption is 75mA for each
2) Wires must be dimensioned according to the distance of the differ- lamp) with 2 power supply wires separate from audio wires;
ent devices and their current consumption. 9) in case of long distances between the external door station and the
3) Do not connect wires in parallel to reach the required cross-section last intercom, to place the power supply near the external door station
(for example multi-pair telephone cables). Only use a single wire with and use a relay for the electric door lock in order to avoid alternate
suitable cross-section. When using multi-core cables you must current induction along the riser (see diagram on page 152).
select them with low parasite parameters (low capacitance per
metre, low inductance over Ohm).
4) If the installation includes additional power supplies you must place
them near the device to be powered.
WIRE CROSS-SECTION
Intercom system
Distance Audio and calls Door lock and ground

(wires in bold face type)
m. feet mm² mm AWG mm² mm AWG

S Ø S Ø
50 165 0,35 0,6 22 0,75 1 18

100 330 0,35 0,6 22 1 1,2 16
200 660 0,5 0,8 20 2 1,4 14
300 990 0,75 1 18 2,5 1,8 13
400 1300 1 1,2 16 - - -
Videointercom system
Distance Terminals
1 . 2 . 1D . 2D . 3D . 4 . 5 F.H.S.
3+ . 7 . A . C+ . 9M (calls) (wires in bold face type)
m. feet mm² mm AWG mm² mm AWG

S Ø S Ø
50 165 0,5 0,8 20 0,75 1 18

100 330 0,75 1 18 1 1,2 16
200 660 1 1,2 16 1,5 1,4 14
300 990 1,5 1,4 15 2,5 1,8 13
For the video signal use a TV 75Ω low loss coaxial cable or a twisted pair (see next pages).
146
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1 INTERCOMS
VIDEO SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION WITH COAXIAL CABLE
For the video signal use a TV 75Ω low loss coaxial cable.
Monitors terminal board DV2-DV4. VIDEO SIGNAL DISTRIBUTORS.

The resistance for terminate the video signal Technical data
(75Ω) is located on the terminal board of the 122 25 Power supply 12Vdc±2
monitor wall bracket. 4 13 /16" 1" Operating current DV2 50mA
*
DV4 100mA
Insertion loss 0.8dB
7+1
75 Ohm
Max. input video signal 2Vpp
68 Bandwidth >5MHz
2 11 /16"
VIDEOINTERCOMS
+
+
+
IN IN
They allow the distribution of the video signal
on 2 or 4 outputs. It can be installed on the wall,
on a wall box, with expansion plugs or it can be OUT 2 OUT 1
placed in the junction box.
OUT 4 OUT 3
Serial connection of the coaxial cable (in- Connection of the coaxial cable with video distributors
put and output from monitor)
To carry out the video connection in a serial For multi-way video systems it is advisable to outputs that are not used must be closed with
mode it is necessary to cut the resistance of use video distributor that, being powered by the resistances of 75Ω that are provided in kit.
Ω located on the wall-bracket terminal board.
75Ω monitors connected to it (terminal 8), do not Maximum 12 video distributors can be con-
Leave it only on the last monitor. The monitors create overloads on the video power supply. The nected together.
serially connectable are max. 20.
75 W
VC 20 VC 12
8 VC
V 8 + IN + 8
M V V
75 W V M DV2-4 M
75 W V OUT1 OUT2 V 75W
IN
VC 1 VC 1 VC
8
V 8 + IN + 8
M V V
V M DV2-4 M
75 W 75 W V OUT1 OUT2 V 75 W
IN
PL40P PL40P
PL41P MA42 MA42
MA43 MD41 PL41P
PL42P PL42P MA43 MD41
V
V
M
M
147
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Technical data
476. VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR-AMPLIFIER.
4+1 INTERCOMS
Terminals Power supply 21 ± 3Vdc

It allows for the distribution of the video signal F General ground Operating current at max. load 250mA
coming from the cameras on 5 independent 14 Positive power supply Gain at max. load from 0 to 3.5dB (adjustable)
lines. It is not necessary to terminate on 75Ω IN Video signal input Gain with one output terminated to 75Ω
the unused outputs. 1-2-3-4-5 Video signal outputs from 0 to 9dB (adjustable)
Video ground (shield of the coaxial Bandwidth >5MHz
cable) Operating temperature 0°÷+50°C
Maximum permissible humidity 90% RH
Housing DIN 8 modules A
Connection of the coaxial cable with distribution on maximum 5 column rising (serial and/or with video distributors)
*
7+1
75 W
In video systems with different
VC 20 VC 12 VC
columns rising or with a high
8 8 + IN + 8
number of users, it is necessary to
VIDEOINTERCOMS
V V V
use the video distributor-ampli- M M DV2-4 M
75 W V 75 W V OUT1 OUT2 V 75 W
fier art.476. IN
It is not necessary to terminate the
unused outputs on the 75Ω resist-
ance.
1
VC 1 VC VC
8 8 + IN + 8
V V V
M M DV2-4 M
75 W V 75 W V OUT1 OUT2 V 75 W
IN
1 2 3 4 5
PL40P
MA42 OUT
PL41P
PL42P MA43 MD41 476
V IN 14 H
M F F
1282E
Connection of the coaxial cable with video signal distribution on more than 5 risers
If more than one video distributor is to be

used, an extra power supply, art. 1281 is
1 2 3 4 5 IN 1 2 3 4 5
necessary. PL40P
PL41P MA42 OUT OUT
PL42P MA43 MD41 476
V IN
14 F 14 F
476
M
VC 20
8 H F 230V
V 127V
M 0
75 W V 1282E 1281
Connection of art. 476 as video amplifier for long distance systems

VC 1
8
V For this use, one output is to be connected; do not terminate the other outputs on the 75Ω resistance.
M
75 W V
1 2 3 4 5
PL40P OUT
PL41P MA42
PL42P MA43 MD41 476
V IN 14 H
M F F 1282E
148
(MT11 - Gb2012)
VIDEO SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION WITH TWISTED PAIR
4+1 INTERCOMS
If the distance between the camera and the last video intercom in the CONNECTION WITH FLOOR DISTRIBUTOR
system is lower than 200 m, the connection can be made with The video wires of each video intercom are insulated from the riser.
2x0.35mm² wires (Ø=0,6mm) instead of the coaxial cable. For dis- Connections are made on the DV2D or DV4D floor video signal
tances from 100m to 200m a twisted pair must be used. distributor box.
DV2D-DV4D. FLOOR VIDEO SIGNAL DISTRIBUTORS.

X X They allow for the distribution of the video signal taken from the riser on
Y Y 2 or 4 outputs. They can be installed on the wall on a wall box, with
expansion plugs or it can be placed in the junction box.
*
For the connection of the video signal you can choose from: Technical data
7+1
- connection with junction box
Operating current 60mA 122 25
- serial connection (input and output) 4 13 /16" 1"
Max. input video signal 2Vpp
- connection with floor distributor
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Insertion loss 0.8dB
Bandwidth >5MHz
68
2 11 /16"
CONNECTION WITH JUNCTION BOX

All wires are distributed in the floor junction box.
Due to the signal loss introduced by each connection, the maximum 83
3 1 /4 "
number of video intercoms that can be connected in shunted mode is X3 Y3 H F F H Y X F H Y2 X2
20. Two 75Ω resistances must be inserted between X and F and

between Y and F in the last video intercom. The maximum distance
between the video intercoms and the connector block is 2.5 metres. X4 Y4 H F F H Y X F H Y1 X1
Connection of the video signal on a single riser

X
Y
H unused outputs. 2 x
F 75 W
ST7100
X Y H F
X X1 X2 X
X Y Y1 DV2D Y2 Y
Y H H DV4D H H
H F F F F
F X Y H F
ST7100 ST7100
ST7100
X Y H F
SERIAL CONNECTION X X1 X2 X
Y Y1 DV2D Y2 Y
Connections are made on the video intercom brackets, and not in the H H DV4D H H
F F F F
junction box. Due to the signal loss introduced by each connection, the X Y H F
ST7100 ST7100
maximum number of video intercoms that can be connected in serial
mode is 20. Two 75Ω resistances must be inserted between X and F
and between Y and F in the last video intercom.
Connection of the video signal with distribution on several risers

X In video systems with different risers you must user 1 or more video
Y distributors art. DV2D or DV4D.
H
F Terminals X and Y of the last distributor must be terminated with the 75Ω
ST7100
unused outputs.
X “A” “B” “C” “D” “E” “F” “G” “H”

Y
H
F
ST7100
X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 1X4
Y 1Y4
X
MD41D
X X X X X
Y Y DV2D Y Y DV2D Y 2x
H H DV4D H H DV4D H 75W
F F F F F
Example of connection on 8 risers
149
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1 INTERCOMS
VIDEO SIGNAL CONVERSION FROM COAXIAL CABLE TO BALANCED LINE
The Studio video intercom line allows for the realisation of video SYSTEMS WITH CCTV CAMERAS
intercom systems by simply using a twisted pair and the camera
MD41D. If the system includes colour cameras Matrix or Profilo series
Installation
or models for CCTV, you must use a video converter to transform the
video signal from coaxial to balanced. The board CV01 permits this type
of conversion and can be fixed on the back of Mody, Matrix or Profilo - Place the CV01 board in the outdoor housing of the CCTV camera or
cameras (all models, except for MD41D) or near any CCTV camera (in in any other housing.
- Make the connections as shown on the diagram.
*
outdoor housings, connector blocks, etc).

7+1
CV 01. Connection with 12Vdc CCTV camera

Video signal converter from coaxial cable to balanced line (twisted
pairs).
VIDEOINTERCOMS
This type of connection allows for powering the board with the camera
Wires power supply.
V (white) video signal input - Move the jumper J1 from position 2-3 to 1-2 (power supply=12Vdc).
M (green) video ground
-F (black) ground
+H (red) 12÷21Vdc power supply input (according to the position of ADDITIONAL TERMINAL BOARD
jumper J1) J1
Terminals 1 2 3
X negative balanced video signal output VIDEO OUTPUT

Y positive balanced video signal output
White
V X
BALANCED VIDEO OUTPUT
SYSTEMS WITH MODY, MATRIX OR PROFILO CAM- Green
M Y
ERAS
POWER SUPPLY
Red
Installation 12Vdc
+H
Black
-F
- Fix the CV01 board on the back of the housing of the camera with the
screw supplied (a). CAMERA CV01
- Make the connections as shown on the diagram.
- Check that the jumper J1 is in position 2-3 (power supply =21Vdc).
POWER SUPPLY
Mody Matrix/Profilo APS -
To terminal (or F) of the 1282E timer.
230V
V
V H+ M
V 1 3 H+ 1 3
M J1 X H M
V
J1 X
M
JP2 JP2
-F -F
F
H
Y Y
Connection with 24Vac or 230Vac CCTV camera
a a
This type of connection allows for powering the board in timed mode.
J1 J1
- Check that the jumper J1 is in position 2-3 (power supply=21Vdc).
1 23 1 23
ADDITIONAL TERMINAL BOARD

Mody J1 J1
1 2 3 1 2 3
VIDEO OUTPUT
Bianco BALANCED VIDEO White

V V X V X
Verde OUTPUT BALANCED VIDEO OUTPUT
M M Y Green Y
Nero M
F -F
H Rosso +H
POWER SUPPLY
Red
24VAC +H
MD41 CV01 230VAC
Black
-F
MD41C to timer
CAMERA CV01
Matrix/Profilo J1
1 2 3
1282E
MA42
MA43 H F
Bianco BALANCED VIDEO TIMER
V V X OUTPUT
Verde M Y
M
H Nero -F
Rosso +H
PL40P÷42P
to timer CV01
150
(MT11 - Gb2012)
INTERCOMS
4+1 INTERCOMS
Technical manual 11 Edition 2012
Installation diagrams
*
7+1
INDEX Page
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Basic installation diagrams 152
- Si 21MO/1 Intercoms connected to 1 external door station 153
- Si 22MO/1 Intercoms connected to 2 automatically switched external door stations 155
- Si 23MO/1 Intercoms connected to 3 automatically switched external door stations 157
- Si 26MO/1 Intercom system with secondary door stations and 1 main common station (multiple entrance) 159
- Si 26MO/2 One-way intercom system with secondary door stations and 1 main common station (multiple entrance) 161
- Si 27MO/1 Intercom system with secondary door stations and 2 main common stations (multiple entrance) 163
Intercommunicating installation diagrams 164

- Si 200L/7 Studio intercommunicating intercoms (2 to 7 users) 165
- Si 200L/8 Exhito intercommunicating intercoms (2 to 8 users) 165
- Si 215L/5 5 intercommunicating intercoms connected to 1 external door station with single calls 167
- Si 211L/5 5 intercommunicating intercoms connected to 1 external door station with common call. Call from external door station 169
with alternate current.
- Si 211L/5S 5 intercommunicating intercoms connected to 1 external door station with common call 171
- Si 221L/5S 5 intercommunicating intercoms connected to 2 external door stations with common call 173
- Si 261L/1S One-way intercommunicating system with secondary door stations and 1 main common station (multiple entrance) 175
Application diagrams 176

- For intercommunicating systems with single call from external door station 176
- For intercommunicating systems with common alternate current call from external door station and electronic internal call. 178
- For intercommunicating systems with common electronic call from external door station and electronic internal call. 180
- For the realisation of one-way intercommunicating services in apartment building systems. External electronic call. 181
- For the realisation of one-way intercommunicating services in apartment building systems. External call on electronic buzzer 182

Troubleshooting 184
151
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 21MO/1
INTERCOMS CONNECTED TO 1 EXTERNAL DOOR STATION

4+1 INTERCOMS
Floor call
This work diagram allows for differ-
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS entiating the floor-call from the call
from the push-button panel.
PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series
FP
9
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD71÷MD74 Floor-button
1 PL81÷PL89 1 MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1 MD81÷MD812
1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD91÷MD912 * EX320
1 PL10P÷PL12P 1 MAS10P÷MAS12P 1 MD10÷MD124
*
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228

... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50 EX310
7+1
1 MD30
KM810
INTERNAL STATIONS
VIDEOINTERCOMS
FP
9
... EX310 Exhito series intercom with 2 call buttons Floor-button
... KM810W Compact series intercom with 1 call button ST720
... ST720W Studio series modular intercom
PT510E
VARIOUS ARTICLES
1 PRS240 Power supply with electronic ringing generator

1 PA ** Door release push-button (optional) 7
1 SE ** Electric door lock (12VAC-1A) C+

(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
PRS240
* Rain shelters are used instead of back boxes and hood
covers.
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. Electric door lock activation by means of an additional relay
to terminal 5 of 1471
Working instructions. See page 183. the intercom
3 1
2
2
Notes
- For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes 6, 7 and 8 additional
6 5 intercom power supply
2
relay
of the installation instructions on page 146. in the installation
- For wires dimensioning refer to the installation recommenda-
PRS240
tions and table on page 146.
SE PA X
Application diagram
When using MD100, MD200, RP100, RP200 and UP amplified external door stations, place this diagram on the diagram on page 153 and line
it up with the riser.
One or two-way systems can be realized with RP and UP series. As regards the Mody series, multi-family systems can be realized by adding the
required quantity of button modules.
Warning.
- Cut jumper W1 in the RP100 and RP200 xn
external door stations.
E - In UP series external door stations do not
connect and insulate the yellow wire.
X3
X - For alternate current wires refer to note 6 of

X2 P2
- the installation instructions on page 146.
P1
K C
M 1
2
MD7.
MD100
1
2
- PRS240 MD200
MD2.
S C+
X
T 230V UP11
- 127V
0
PA
RP100
UP100
UP12
P SE
RP200 UP200
T
152
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 21MO/1
INTERCOMS CONNECTED TO 1 EXTERNAL DOOR STATION
4+1 INTERCOMS
1
2
xn 9
3
0
5
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Exhito Compact Studio Project
1
2
9
3
0
5
Mody Matrix
Profilo
xn P
x2 P
P
C
1
2
1
2
E
3 3 X
4 4 -
K
PRS240
A M
C+ PA
-
230V
S
127V SE T
0
-
P
T
153
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 22MO/1

4+1 INTERCOMS

Floor call
PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series This work diagram allows for differ-
entiating the floor-call from the call
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD71÷MD74 from the push-button panel.
2 PL81÷PL89 2 MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 2 MD81÷MD812
2 PL91÷PL99 * 2 MA91÷MA93 * 2 MD91÷MD912 * FP
9
*
Floor-button
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228
7+1
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50 EX320

2 MD30
VIDEOINTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS EX310
... EX310 Exhito series intercom with 2 call buttons KM810

FP
... KM810W Compact series intercom with 1 call button 9
... ST720W Studio series modular intercom Floor-button
ST720
VARIOUS ARTICLES
1 1473 Exchanger PT510E

7
... Refers to number of users. C+
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
PRS240
- The audio functions and door lock opening are automatically switched to the door station which has
made the call and remain in this state until a call from another entrance is received.
Notes
- For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the installation instructions on page
146.
Connection of 2 door locks with simultaneous opening
power supply in the to terminal 3 of to terminal 5 of

installation the intercom the intercom
PRS240 PRS210
E additional
X PA
6
2 2 3 32 62 transformer
- PA
K
M 5 1 12 52
2 2
SE 1471 1471 SE
- additional relay additional relay
S
T
-
P
T
154
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 22MO/1
4+1 INTERCOMS
1
2
xn 9
3
0
5
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
1
2
9
3
0
5
PRS240
C+
230V
127V
0
Mody Profilo Matrix
xn P
x2 P
P
9 8 7 5 4 3 C
4 4
3 3
8b 2 2
1473
9b 1 1
1
2
A
9a 8a 7a 6 7b PA entrance "b"
SE
Mody Matrix
E
xn
Profilo
P
X
x2 P
-
P K
4
C
4
M
3
2
3
2
-
1 1
S
A
T
PA entrance "a"
-
P
SE
T
155
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 23MO/1

4+1 INTERCOMS

Floor call
3 PL81÷PL89 3 MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 3 MD81÷MD812
3 PL91÷PL99 * 3 MA91÷MA93 * 3 MD91÷MD912 * FP
9
*
Floor-button
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228
7+1
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50 EX320

3 MD30
VIDEOINTERCOMS

FP
ST720
VARIOUS ARTICLES
2 1473 Exchanger PT510E

7
... Refers to number of users. C+
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
PRS240
Notes
146.
E
X
-
K
M
-
S
T
-
P
T
156
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 23MO/1
4+1 INTERCOMS
1
2
xn 9
3
0
5
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
1
2
9
3
0
5
PRS240
C+
230V
127V
0
Mody Profilo Matrix
xn P
x2 P
P
9 8 7 5 4 3 C
4 4
3 3
8b 2 2
1473
9b 1 1
1
2
A
9a 8a 7a 6 7b PA entrance "c"
SE
Profilo Matrix Mody Mody Profilo Matrix E

P xn xn P X
P x2 x2 P -
P
C 6 9 8 7 5 4 3
P
C
K
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
M
2
1
2
1
8a
9a
8b
9b
2
1
2
1
-
1473 1
2
S
A 7a 7b A
T
entrance "a" PA PA entrance "b" -
SE SE P
T
157
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 26MO/1
4+1 INTERCOMS

Floor call
1+X PL81÷PL89 1+X MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1+X MD81÷MD812
1+X PL91÷PL99 * 1+X MA91÷MA93 * 1+X MD91÷MD912 * FP
9
1+X PL10P÷PL12P 1+X MAS10P÷MAS12P 1+X MD10÷MD124
*
Floor-button
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228
7+1
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50 EX320

1+X MD30
VIDEOINTERCOMS

FP
ST720
VARIOUS ARTICLES
X 1473 Exchanger PT510E
1+X PRS240 Power supply with electronic ringing generator

1 PRS220 Power supply
1+X SE ** Electric door lock (12VAC-1A) 7
C+

(1) Or MA61÷MA63. PRS240
Working instructions. Connection of 2 door locks, one of which always activable, in

As the basic system described on page 183, with the following varia- a system with multiple entrance
tions: to terminal 5 of to terminal 3 of
- The audio functions and door lock opening are automatically switched the intercom the intercom
to the door station which has made the call and remain in this state until
additional 1471
- Services to secondary door stations are independent and can be relay 6
2 3
2
PA
Notes
- You can also use Prestige and TM push-button panels. For the latter 5
2 1
2
power supply in the installation
series you must request the version with separate common terminals. SE
- For wires dimensioning refer to the installation recommendations and PRS240
table on page 146. 72
analog 1473
E The main entrance push-button panel must have
exchanger
of the stair
7b 7a
X separate common terminals. One common terminal

diode
- for each secondary door station. The common termi-
nals of push-buttons Profilo and Matrix series can be
(100V-1A)
K separated only module by module.

to the other stairs
M In Mody series the

common terminals of
1471
6
2 3
2
- push-buttons can be
Common of
button 1 and 2
additional
relay
separated module by
S module or every 2 To separate
common of
5
2 1
2
PRS240
T push-buttons by
cutting opportunely
buttons cut here
SE
PRS220
- the common rail

which connects the
Common of
button 3 and 4
PA
power supply in the
installation
P common terminals of
push-buttons.
T
158
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 26MO/1
4+1 INTERCOMS
“A” “B”
“ C - D - .. ”
1 1
2 2
9 xn(A) 9 Xn(B)
3 3
0 0
5 5
*
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Exhito Compact Studio Project Exhito Compact Studio Project
1 1
2 2
9 9
3 3
0 0
5 5

PRS240 PRS240
C+ C+
230V 230V
127V 127V
0 0
Profilo Matrix Profilo Matrix

xn(A) xn(B)
P P
P P
C 3 4 5 7 8 9 C 3 4 5 7 8 9
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 8b 2 2 8b
1473 1473
1 1 9b 1 1 9b
1 1
2 2
A A
7b 6 9a 8a 7a 7b 6 9a 8a 7a
PA PA
Mody SE Mody SE
main entrance
Profilo Matrix Mody
P xn(C)
P x1(C)
C 6(C)
P xn(B)
P
C
xn(A)
E
X
P
P
C
1
2
1
2
-
3
4
3
4 230V
127V
K
A
PRS220
0
M
SE PA -
S
T
-
P
T
159
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 26MO/2
ONE WAY INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON STATION (multiple
4+1 INTERCOMS
entrance)
Main DOOR STATION
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD71÷MD74

1 PL81÷PL89 1 MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1 MD81÷MD812
1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD91÷MD912 *
*

7+1
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228

... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50
1 MD30
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Secondary DOOR STATIONS

Application diagram
When using MD100, RP100, UP11 and UP100
X PL71 X MA71 X MD71 amplified external door stations as one-way second-
X PL81 X MAS61 (1) X MD81 ary door stations, place this diagram on the diagram
X PL91 * X MA91 * X MD91 * on page 161 and line it up with the riser.
X PL11P X MA11P X MD11
X MD30 Warning.
- Cut jumper W1 in the RP100 external door stations.
INTERNAL STATIONS - In UP series external door stations do not connect
and insulate the yellow wire.
... EX310 Exhito series intercom with 2 call buttons - For alternate current wires refer to note 6 of the
... EX320 Exhito series modular intercom installation instructions on page 146.
PRS240
VARIOUS ARTICLES
230V
X 1473 Exchanger 127V
X
1+X PRS240 Power supply with electronic ringing generator 0
C+

C
P 3 4 5 7 8 9
X Refers to the number of stairways. MD100
RP100
2
1
(1) Or MA61÷MA63. UP11
UP100 2 8b
1473
1 9b
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. PA
SE
7b 6 9a 8a 7a
- The audio functions and door lock opening are automatically switched to the door station
which has made the call and remain in this state until a call from another entrance is
received.
- Services to secondary door stations are independent and can be operated at the same
time.
E Notes
- For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the installation
X instructions on page 146.
- - For wires dimensioning refer to the installation recommendations and table on page
146.
K
M
-
S
T
-
P
T
160
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 26MO/2
ONE WAY INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON STATION (multiple
4+1 INTERCOMS
entrance)
“A” “B”
“ C - D - .. ”
1 1
2 2
9 9
3 3
0 0
5 5
*
7+1
Compact Studio Project Compact Studio Project
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Exhito Exhito
PRS240 PRS240
230V 230V
127V C+ 127V C+
0 0
P P
C 3 4 5 7 8 9 C 3 4 5 7 8 9
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 8b 2 2 8b
1473 1473
1 1 9b 1 1 9b
1 1
2 2
A A
7b 6 9a 8a 7a 7b 6 9a 8a 7a
PA PA
Profilo Matrix Mody SE Profilo Matrix Mody

SE
main entrance
Profilo Matrix Mody
P x(N)
P x(C)
P E
P
C
X
1
2
1
2 C+ -
3
4
3
4 230V
127V
K
A
PRS240
0
M
SE PA -
S
T
-
P
T
161
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 27MO/1
4+1 INTERCOMS
entrance)

Floor call
This work diagram allows for differ-
PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series entiating the floor-call from the call
from the push-button panel.
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD71÷MD74
2+X PL81÷PL89 2+X MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 2+X MD81÷MD812 FP
9
2+X PL91÷PL99 * 2+X MA91÷MA93 * 2+X MD91÷MD912 *
*
Floor-button
2+X PL10P÷PL12P 2+X MAS10P÷MAS12P 2+X MD10÷MD124
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228
7+1
EX320
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50
2+X MD30
VIDEOINTERCOMS
EX310
INTERNAL STATIONS
KM810
... EX310 Exhito series intercom with 2 call buttons
FP
... EX320 Exhito series modular intercom 9
... KM810W Compact series intercom with 1 call button Floor-button
... PT510EW Project series intercom with 1 call button ST720
VARIOUS ARTICLES
PT510E
2xX 1473 Exchanger
X PRS240 Power supply with electronic ringing generator
2+X PA ** Door release push-button (optional) 7
2+X SE ** Electric door lock (12VAC-1A) C+

(1) Or MA61÷MA63. PRS240
- Services to secondary door stations are independent and can be operated at the same time.
Notes
- You can also use Prestige and TM push-button panels. For the latter series you must request the version
with separate common terminals.
146.
The main entrance push-button panel must have

separate common terminals. One common terminal
for each secondary door station. The common termi-
nals of push-buttons Profilo and Matrix series can be
E
In Mody series the
X common terminals of Common of
- push-buttons can be
separated module by
button 1 and 2
K module or every 2
push-buttons by
To separate
common of
buttons cut here
M cutting opportunely
the common rail
- which connects the
Common of
button 3 and 4
S common terminals of
push-buttons.
T
-
P
T
162
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 27MO/1
4+1 INTERCOMS
entrance)
“A” “B”
“ C - D - .. ”
1 1
2 2
9 xn(A) 9 Xn(B)
3 3
0 0
5 5
*
7+1
Exhito Compact Studio Project Exhito Compact Studio Project
1 1
2 2
VIDEOINTERCOMS
9 9
3 3
0 0
5 5

PRS240 PRS240
C+ C+
230V 230V
127V 127V
0 0
Profilo Matrix Profilo Matrix

xn(A) Xn(B)
P P
P P
C 3 4 5 7 8 9 C 3 4 5 7 8 9
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 8b 2 2 8b
1473 1473
1 1 9b 1 1 9b
1 1
2 2
A A
Mody 7b 6 7a 8a 9a Mody 7b 6 7a 8a 9a
PA PA
SE SE
4 5 7 8 9 4 5 7 8 9
1 1
1473 1473
2 2
6 9a 8a 7a 7b 8b 9b 3 6 9a 8a 7a 7b 8b 9b 3
main entrance "1"
Profilo Matrix Mody main entrance "2"

P xn(C) xn(C) P
P x1(C) x1(C) P
C 6(C) 3(C) C
P xn(B) xn(B) P
P P
C
P xn(A) xn(A)
C
P
E
P
C
P
C
X
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2 -
K
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
A A
M
SE PA PA SE
-
Mody
Matrix Profilo S
230V
127V
T
0 PRS220
-
P
T
163
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 200L/7
STUDIO series INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS (2 to 7 us- COMPACT series INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS (max.
4+1 INTERCOMS
ers) 2 users)
Q.ty Article Description Q.ty Article Description
... ST 720W Studio series modular intercom 2 KM810W Compact series intercom
... ST 701 Single button module 2 ST 701 Single button module
1 PRS226E Power supply-switcher 1 PRS226E Power supply-switcher
... Refers to number of users. Working instructions. See page 183.

*
Working instructions. See page 183. Notes

- Do not use KEY button for intercommunication calls (5 terminal).
7+1
Notes
- Do not forget to connect all terminals C of the additional buttons. - For wires dimensioning refer to the installation instructions and
- Do not use KEY button for intercommunication calls (5 terminal). table on page 146.
VIDEOINTERCOMS
- For wires dimensioning refer to the installation instructions and table on

page 146.
Si 200L/8
EXHITO series INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS (2 to 8 us- EXHITO series INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS (max. 3
ers) users)
Q.ty Article Description Q.ty Article Description
... EX320 Exhito series modular intercom ... EX310 Exhito series intercom
... EX301 Single button module ... EX301 Single button module
1 PRS226E Power supply-switcher 1 PRS226E Power supply-switcher
... Refers to number of users. ... Refers to number of users.
Working instructions. See page 183. Working instructions. See page 183.
Notes Notes
- Do not forget to connect terminals C and the common terminal of all the - Do not forget to connect terminals C and the common terminal of
additional buttons. the additional button.
- Do not use KEY button for intercommunication calls (5 terminal). - Do not use KEY button for intercommunication calls (5 terminal).
- For wires dimensioning refer to the installation instructions and table on - For wires dimensioning refer to the installation instructions and
page 146. table on page 146.
Table for choosing intercoms and accessories for the required type of installation
Number of inter- Exhito Exhito Studio Compact
communicating EX320 EX301 EX310 EX301 ST 720W ST 701 KM810W ST701
E 2 2 0 2 0 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 6
X
4 4 8 4 12
- 5 5 15 5 20
S 6 6 24 6 30
T 7 7 35 7 42
- 8 8 48
K
M
164
(MT11 - Gb2012)
2 intercommunicating 3 intercom- 4 intercom- 5 intercom- 6 intercom- 7 intercom-
users)
municating municating municating municating municating
ST720
+ST701
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4 CT5 CT6 CT7
PRS226E
G 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
230V 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
127V 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
0 7 9 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
1
C C C C C C C
2 intercommunicating P1 9 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
2
C C C C C C C
3 intercommunicating P2 P2 9 P3 P3 P3 P3
3
C C C C C C C
4 intercommunicating P3 P3 P3 9 P4 P4 P4
4
C C C C C C C
5 intercommunicating P4 P4 P4 P4 9 P5 P5
5
C C C C C C C
6 intercommunicating P5 P5 P5 P5 P5 9 P6
6
C C C C C C C
7 intercommunicating P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 9
Si 200L/7
165
ers)
(MT11 - Gb2012)
2 intercommunicating 3 intercom- 4 intercom- 5 intercom- 6 intercom- 7 intercom- 8 intercom-
municating municating municating municating municating municating
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4 CT5 CT6 CT7 CT8

EX320
PRS226E +EX301
G 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
230V 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
127V 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
0 7 C C C C C C C C
1
9 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
2 intercommunicating P1 9 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
2
C C C C C C C C
3 intercommunicating P2 P2 9 P3 P3 P3 P3 P3
3
C C C C C C C C
4 intercommunicating P3 P3 P3 9 P4 P4 P4 P4
4
C C C C C C C C
5 intercommunicating P4 P4 P4 P4 9 P5 P5 P5
5
C C C C C C C C
6 intercommunicating P5 P5 P5 P5 P5 9 P6 P6
6
C C C C C C C C
7 intercommunicating P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 9 P7
7
C C C C C C C C
8 intercommunicating P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 9
Si 200L/8
STUDIO series INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS (2 to 7 EXHITO series INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS (2 to 8 us-
-
-
VIDEOINTERCOMS *
T
S
X
E
K
7+1 4+1 INTERCOMS
M
Si 215L/5
5 INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS CONNECTED TO 1 EXTERNAL DOOR

4+1 INTERCOMS
STATION WITH SINGLE CALLS EX320
INTERNAL STATIONS
EXHITO series STUDIO series COMPACT series

... EX320 ... EX310 ... ST720W ... KM810W
... EX301 ... EX301 ... ST701 ... ST701
*

7+1

ST 720
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD71÷MD73
VIDEOINTERCOMS
1 PL81÷PL83 1 MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1 MD81÷MD83

1 PL91÷PL93* 1 MA91÷MA93* 1 MD91÷MD93*
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228
... PL20-PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20-MD50
1 MD30
VARIOUS ARTICLES
Application diagram
1 PRS226E Power supply-switcher
When using MD100, MD200, RP200, UP12 and UP200 ampli-
fied external door stations (RP and UP series for two-way
systems only) place this diagram on the diagram on page 167
... Refers to number of users (see table on the bottom of this page). and line it up with the riser.
(1) Or MA61÷MA63. Warning.
* Rain shelters are used instead of back boxes and hood covers. - In the external door stations RP200
127V
230V
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. cut the jumper W1.

0
- In the external door stations UP do

Working instructions. See page 183. G 2 7 not connect the yellow wire and insu-
late it.
Notes PRS226E - For alternate current wires refer to
- Do not forget to connect terminals C of the additional buttons. note 6 of the installation instructions
- For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes 6 and 7 of the on page 146.
installation instructions on page 146. X C+ D Y
xn
- For wires dimensioning refer to installation instructions and table on page
146. X3
X2 P2
P1
C
1 1
MD7.
2 MD100 2
MD200
MD2.
PA UP12
RP200 UP200
SE
E Number of Exhito Exhito Studio Compact Application dia-
X
intercommunicating EX320 EX301 EX310 EX301 ST720W ST701 KM810W ST 701 gram on page:
H
I 2 2 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 176
T 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 176
O
4 4 8 4 12 176
S 5 5 15 5 20 167
T 6 6 24 6 30 177
U
7 7 35 7 42 177
D
* upon request
I 8 8 48 *
O
166
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 215L/5
5 INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS CONNECTED TO 1 EXTERNAL DOOR STATION WITH SINGLE CALLS
4+1 INTERCOMS
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4 CT5
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5
*
9 P1 P1 P1 P1
7+1
1
C C C C C
x2 P1 9 P2 P2 P2
2
C C C C C
VIDEOINTERCOMS
x3 P2 P2 9 P3 P3
3
C C C C C
x4 P3 P3 P3 9 P4
4
C C C C C
xn P4 P4 P4 P4 9
EX320 ST720 EX320 ST720 EX320 ST720 EX320 ST720 EX320 ST720
+EX301 +ST701 +EX301 +ST701 +EX301 +ST701 +EX301 +ST701 +EX301 +ST701
127V
230V
0
G 2 7
PRS226E
C+ D Y
Mody Profilo Matrix
xn P
x2 P
P
C
1 1 E
2 2 X
3
4
3
4
H
I
T
A
O
PA
S
SE
T
U
D
I
O
167
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 211L/5

4+1 INTERCOMS
STATION WITH COMMON CALL. Call from external door station with alternate EX320
current.
INTERNAL STATIONS
EXHITO series STUDIO series COMPACT series

... EX320 ... EX310 ... ST720W ... KM810W
... EX301 ... EX301 ... ST701 ... ST701
... SR41 ... SR41 ... SR41 ... SR41
*
7+1
EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS ST 720

JP2
3 2 9 1 5 0
VIDEOINTERCOMS
1 PL71 1 MA71 1 MD71 C

P1
P
1 PL81 1 MAS61 (1) 1 MD81
C
1 PL91 * 1 MA91 * 1 MD91 * P2
4 3 P
1 PL11P 1 MA11P 1 MD11
1 MD30 SR41
VARIOUS ARTICLES
Application diagram
When using MD100, RP100, UP11 and UP100 amplified exter-
nal door stations place this diagram on the diagram on page 169
and line it up with the riser.
... Refers to number of users (see table on the bottom of this page).
(1) Or MA61. Warning.
127V
230V
* Rain shelters are used instead of back boxes and hood covers. - In the external door stations RP100
0
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. cut the jumper W1.

G 2 7
- In the external door stations UP do
Working instructions. See page 183. not connect the yellow wire and
PRS226E insulate it.
Notes - For alternate current wires refer to
- Do not forget to connect terminals C of the additional buttons and install the note 6 of the installation instruc-
SR41 electronic buzzer in each intercom. tions on page 146.
- For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes 6 and 7 of the X C+ D A

146.
P2
P1
C
1 MD71 1
2 MD100 2
UP11
PA RP100 UP100
SE
E N. of intercom- Exhito Exhito Studio Compact Application dia-
X
municating EX320 EX301 SR41 EX310 EX301 SR41 ST720W ST701 SR41 KM810W ST 701 SR41 gram on page:
H
I 2 2 0 2 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 178
T 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 178
O
4 4 8 4 4 12 4 178
S 5 5 15 5 5 20 5 169
T 6 6 24 6 6 30 6 179
U
7 7 35 7 7 42 7 179
D
I 8 8 48 8 *
O
* upon request
168
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 211L/5
5 INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS CONNECTED TO 1 EXTERNAL DOOR STATION WITH COMMON CALL.
4+1 INTERCOMS
Call from external door station with alternate current.
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4 CT5
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
4 4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 3 SR41
3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5
*
9 P1 P1 P1 P1
1
C C C C C
7+1
P1 9 P2 P2 P2
2
C C C C C
P2 P2 9 P3 P3
3
VIDEOINTERCOMS
C C C C C
P3 P3 P3 9 P4
4
C C C C C
P4 P4 P4 P4 9
+SR41 +SR41 +SR41 +SR41 +SR41 +SR41 +SR41 +SR41 +SR41 +SR41
127V
230V
0
G 2 7
PRS226E
C+ D A
Mody Profilo Matrix
P
C
1 1
2
3
2
3
E
4 4 X
H
A
I
T
PA
O
SE
S
T
U
D
I
O
169
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 211L/5S

4+1 INTERCOMS
STATION WITH COMMON CALL EX320
INTERNAL STATIONS
EXHITO series STUDIO series

... EX320 ... EX310 ... ST720W
... EX301 ... EX301 ... ST701
... ST704 ... ST704 ... ST704
*
7+1

ST 720
VIDEOINTERCOMS
1 PL71 1 MA71 1 MD71

1 PL81 1 MAS61 (1) 1 MD81
1 PL91 * 1 MA91 * 1 MD91 *
1 PL11P 1 MA11P 1 MD11
1 MD30
VARIOUS ARTICLES
1 PRS226E Power supply-switcher Application diagram

... PRS210 Transformer When using MD100, RP100, UP11 and UP100 amplified exter-
... RL 37 Relay module nal door stations place this diagram on the diagram on page 171
1 PA ** Door release push-button (optional) and line it up with the riser.
Warning.
127V
230V
... Refers to number of users (see table on the bottom of this page). - In the external door stations RP100
0
(1) Or MA61. cut the jumper W1.

* Rain shelters are used instead of back boxes and hood covers. G 2 7 - In the external door stations UP do
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. not connect the yellow wire and
PRS226E insulate it.
Working instructions. See page 183. - For alternate current wires refer to
note 6 of the installation instruc-
Notes tions on page 146.
X C+ D Y
- Do not forget to connect terminals C of the additional buttons and install the
EX304 or ST704 speaker module in every intercom.
- For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes 6 and 7 of the
installation instructions on page 146. P2
- For wires dimensioning refer to installation instructions and table on page P1
146. C
1 MD71 1
2 MD100 2
UP11
PA RP100 UP100
SE
E N. of intercom- Exhito Exhito Studio Accessories Application dia-

X municating EX320 EX301 EX304 EX310 EX301 EX304 ST720W ST701 ST704 RL37 PRS210 gram on page:
H
I 2 2 0 2 2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 180
T 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 0 0 180
O 4 4 8 4 4 12 4 1 1 180
S 5 5 15 5 5 20 5 1 1 171
T
U
D
I
O
170
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 211L/5S
5 INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS CONNECTED TO 1 EXTERNAL DOOR STATION WITH COMMON CALL
4+1 INTERCOMS
PRS210
RL37
230V
127V
9P 9R 9M 0
*
CT5
7+1
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
VIDEOINTERCOMS
9 9 9 9 9
3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5
AP
3A 3A 3A 3A 3A
9A P1 P1 P1 P1
1
C C C C C
P1 9A P2 P2 P2
2
C C C C C
P2 P2 9A P3 P3
3
C C C C C
P3 P3 P3 9A P4
4
C C C C C
P4 P4 P4 P4 9A
127V
230V
0
G 2 7
PRS226E
C+ D Y
Mody Profilo Matrix

E
P X
C H
1
2
1
2
I
3 3 T
4 4
O
A
S
PA T
SE
U
D
I
O
171
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 221L/5S

4+1 INTERCOMS
STATIONS WITH COMMON CALL EX320
INTERNAL STATIONS

... EX320 ... EX310 ... ST720W
... EX301 ... EX301 ... ST701
... ST704 ... ST704 ... ST704
*
7+1

ST 720
VIDEOINTERCOMS
2 PL71 2 MA71 2 MD71

2 PL81 2 MAS61 (1) 2 MD81
2 PL91 * 2 MA91 * 2 MD91 *
2 PL11P 2 MA11P 2 MD11
2 MD30
VARIOUS ARTICLES

1 1473 Exchanger
... PRS210 Transformer
... RL 37 Relay module
... Refers to number of users (see table on the bottom of this page).
(1) Or MA61.
Working instructions
- the audio functions and door lock opening are automatically switched to
the door station which has made the call and remain in this state until a call
from another entrance is received.
Notes
- Do not forget to connect terminals C of the additional buttons and install the
EX304 or ST704 speaker module in every intercom.
- For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes 6 and 7 of the
146.
E N. of intercom- Exhito Exhito Studio Accessories Application dia-
X
municating EX320 EX301 EX304 EX310 EX301 EX304 ST720W ST701 ST704 RL37 PRS210 gram on page:
H
I 2 2 0 2 2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 180
T 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 0 0 180
O
4 4 8 4 4 12 4 1 1 180
S 5 5 15 5 5 20 5 1 1 173
T
U
D
I
O
172
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 221L/5S
5 INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS CONNECTED TO 2 EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS WITH COMMON
4+1 INTERCOMS
CALL
PRS210
RL37
230V
127V
9P 9R 9M 0
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4 CT5
*
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
7+1
9 9 9 9 9
3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5
AP
3A 3A 3A 3A 3A
9A P1 P1 P1 P1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
1
C C C C C
P1 9A P2 P2 P2
2
C C C C C
P2 P2 9A P3 P3
3
C C C C C
P3 P3 P3 9A P4
4
C C C C C
P4 P4 P4 P4 9A
127V
230V
0
G 2 7
PRS226E
C+ D Y
Mody Profilo Matrix
P
9 8 7 5 4 3 C
8b 1 1
1473 9b 2 2
3 3
4 4
1
2
A
9a 8a 7a 6 7b PA
SE
E
X
H
Mody Profilo Matrix I
P
T
C O
1 1
2 2
3
4
3
4 S
T
A
U
PA
D
SE I
O
173
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 261L/1S
ONE-WAY INTERCOMMUNICATING SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON
4+1 INTERCOMS

INTERNAL STATIONS

... EX320 ... EX310 ... ST720W
... EX301 ... EX301 ... ST701
... ST704 ... ST704 ... ST704
*
Main EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS

7+1
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD71÷MD74

VIDEOINTERCOMS
1 PL81÷PL89 1 MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1 MD81÷MD812

1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD91÷MD912 *
1 PL10P÷PL12P 1 MAS10P÷MAS12P 1 MD10÷MD124 EX320
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50
1 MD30
Secondary EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS
X PL71 X MA71 X MD71

X PL81 X MAS61 (1) X MD81
X PL91 * X MA91 * X MD91 *
X PL11P X MA11P X MD11
X MD30 ST 720
VARIOUS ARTICLES
X PRS226E Power supply-switcher

X 1473 Exchanger
... PRS210 Transformer
... RL 37 Relay module
... Refers to number of users (see table on the Notes Working instructions
bottom of this page). - Do not forget to connect terminals C of the additional As the basic system described on
(1) Or MA61÷MA63. buttons and install the EX304 or ST704 speaker page 183, with the following variations:
* Rain shelters are used instead of back module in every intercom. - the audio functions and door lock
boxes and hood covers. - For the connection of name-plate lamps, read notes opening are automatically switched
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. 6 and 7 of the installation instructions on page 146. to the door station which has made
- For wires dimensioning refer to installation instruc- the call and remain in this state until a
tions and table on page 146. call from another entrance is received.
- The diagram shows 2 and 3 intercommunicating - services to secondary door stations
intercoms. In case of a higher number of intercoms are independent and can be oper-
see pages 171 and 180. ated at the same time.
E
X
H Table for choosing intercoms and accessories for the required type of installation
I
T N. of intercom- Exhito Exhito Studio Accessories Application dia-
O municating EX320 EX301 EX304 EX310 EX301 EX304 ST720W ST701 ST704 RL37 PRS210 gram on page:
2 2 0 2 2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 175
S
T 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 3 0 0 175
U 4 4 8 4 4 12 4 1 1 180
D 5 5 15 5 5 20 5 1 1 171
I
O
174
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 261L/1S
ONE-WAY INTERCOMMUNICATING SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON
4+1 INTERCOMS
“A” “B”
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT1 CT2
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
9 9 9 9 9
3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5
AP AP
3A 3A 3A 3A 3A
*
9A P1 P1 9A P1
1 1
C C C C C
P1 9A P2 P1 9A
2
7+1
C C C
P2 P2 9A
VIDEOINTERCOMS
EX310 EX320 ST720
+EX301 +EX301 +ST701
+EX304 +EX304 +ST704
EX310 EX320 ST720
+EX301 +EX301 +ST701
+EX304 +EX304 +ST704
127V
230V
127V
230V
0
0
G 2 7 4b G 2 7 4b
PRS226E PRS226E
4 Y C+ D 9 4 Y C+ D 9
Matrix Profilo Mody Matrix Profilo Mody
P P
C 3 8 9 5 7 4 C 3 8 9 5 7 4
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 8b 2 2 8b
1473 1473
1 1 9b 1 1 9b
1 1
2 2
A A
7b 6 9a 8a 7a 7b 6 9a 8a 7a
PA PA
SE SE
“ C - D - .. ”
Profilo Matrix Mody
P x(N)
P x(C)
E
P
X
P
C
H
1
2
1
2
I
3
4
3
4 230V
T
A
127V
0 O
PRS220
SE PA S
T
U
D
I
O
175
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Application diagrams
APPLICATION DIAGRAMS FOR INTERCOMMUNICATING SYSTEM WITH SINGLE CALL FROM EXTERNAL STATION
4+1 INTERCOMS
- To match with diagrams: Si 215L/5
2 INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS 3 INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS
CT1 CT2 CT1 CT2 CT3
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
*
3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5
7+1
9 P1 9 P1 P1
1 1
C C C C C
xn P1 9 x2 P1 9 P2
2
C C C
xn P2 P2 9
VIDEOINTERCOMS
EX310 EX320 ST720 KM810

+ST701 +ST701
EX310 EX320 ST720
+EX301 +EX301 +ST701
EX320
EX320
to power supply EX310 to power supply

EX310
ST720 ST 720
- Do not forget to connect terminals C

of the additional buttons.
KM810
4 INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 ST 720
3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5
9 P1 P1 P1
1
C C C C
x2 P1 9 P2 P2
2
C C C C
x3 P2 P2 9 P3
3
C C C C
xn P3 P3 P3 9
EX320
E
X
- EX320 ST720
+EX301 +ST701
S
- Do not forget to connect terminals C
T of the additional buttons.
-
K to power supply
M
176
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1 INTERCOMS
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4 CT5 CT6
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5 5
9 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
1
C C C C C C
x2 P1 9 P2 P2 P2 P2
2
*
C C C C C C
x3 P2 P2 9 P3 P3 P3
3
C C C C C C
7+1
x4 P3 P3 P3 9 P4 P4
4
C C C C C C
x5 P4 P4 P4 P4 9 P5
5
C C C C C C
VIDEOINTERCOMS
xn P5 P5 P5 P5 P5 9
EX320 ST720
+EX301 +ST701
EX320 ST720
to power supply - Do not forget to connect termi-
nals C of the additional buttons.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
9 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
1
C C C C C C C
x2 P1 9 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
2
C C C C C C C
x3 P2 P2 9 P3 P3 P3 P3
3
C C C C C C C
x4 P3 P3 P3 9 P4 P4 P4
4
C C C C C C C
x5 P4 P4 P4 P4 9 P5 P5
5
C C C C C C C
x6 P5 P5 P5 P5 P5 9 P6
6
C C C C C C C
xn P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 9
E
X
H
EX320 ST720
I
+EX301 +ST701 T
O
EX320 ST720
- Do not forget to connect termi-
to power supply
nals C of the additional buttons. S
T
U
D
I
O
177
(MT11 - Gb2012)
APPLICATION DIAGRAMS FOR INTERCOMMUNICATING SYSTEMS WITH COMMON ALTERNATE CURRENT CALL FROM EXTER-
4+1 INTERCOMS
NAL STATION AND ELECTRONIC CALL FOR EXTENSIONS

- To match with diagrams Si 211L/5

CT1 CT2 CT1 CT2 CT3
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
4 4 4 4 4
3 3 SR41 3 3 3 SR41
3 3 3 3 3
*
5 5 5 5 5
9 P1 9 P1 P1
1
C C C C C
7+1
P1 9 P1 9 P2
2
C C C
P2 P2 9
VIDEOINTERCOMS
EX310 EX320 ST720 KM810

+SR41 +SR41 +ST701 +ST701
+SR41 +SR41 EX310 EX320 ST720
+EX301 +EX301 +ST701
+SR41 +SR41 +SR41
ST720
JP2 ST720
3 2 9 1 5 0
to power supply to power supply
C
P1
P
KM810
EX310 C
P2
4 3 P
SR41
EX320
EX310
EX320
- Do not forget to install the

SR41 electronic buzzer in - Do not forget to connect terminals C of the
every intercom. additional buttons and install the SR41 elec-
tronic buzzer in every intercom.
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 SR41
3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5
9 P1 P1 P1
1 JP2 ST720
C C C C
P1 9 P2 P2 3 2 9 1 5 0
2
C C C C
P2 P2 9 P3 C
3 P1
C C C C P
P3 P3 P3 9
C
P
P2
4 3
SR41
E EX320 ST720
+EX301 +ST701
EX320
X +SR41 +SR41
-
S
to power supply
T
- Do not forget to connect terminals C of the
- additional buttons and install the SR41 elec-
K
M
178
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1 INTERCOMS
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4 CT5 CT6
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
4 4 4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 3 3 SR41
3 3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5 5
9 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
1
C C C C C C
P1 9 P2 P2 P2 P2
2
*
C C C C C C
P2 P2 9 P3 P3 P3
3
C C C C C C
7+1
P3 P3 P3 9 P4 P4
4
C C C C C C
P4 P4 P4 P4 9 P5
5
C C C C C C
VIDEOINTERCOMS
P5 P5 P5 P5 P5 9
EX320 ST720
+EX301 +ST701
+SR41 +SR41
EX320 JP2 ST720

- Do not forget to connect termi-
3 2 9 1 5 0
to power supply nals C of the additional buttons
and install the SR41 electronic C
P1
buzzer in every intercom. P
C
P
P2
4 3
SR41
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 SR41
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
9 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
1
C C C C C C C
P1 9 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
2
C C C C C C C
P2 P2 9 P3 P3 P3 P3
3
C C C C C C C
P3 P3 P3 9 P4 P4 P4
4
C C C C C C C
P4 P4 P4 P4 9 P5 P5
5
C C C C C C C
P5 P5 P5 P5 P5 9 P6
6
C C C C C C C
P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 9
E
X
H
I
EX320 ST720
+EX301 +ST701 T
+SR41 +SR41
O
EX320 JP2 ST720
to power supply - Do not forget to connect termi-
nals C of the additional buttons 3 2 9 1 5 0 S
and install the SR41 electronic C
P1
T
buzzer in every intercom. P
U
C
4 3 P
P2
D
SR41 I
O
179
(MT11 - Gb2012)
APPLICATION DIAGRAMS FOR INTERCOMMUNICATING SYSTEMS WITH COMMON ELECTRONIC CALL FROM EXTERNAL
4+1 INTERCOMS
STATION AND ELECTRONIC CALL FOR EXTENSIONS

- To match with diagrams: Si 211L/5S; Si 221L/5S; Si261L/1S
CT1 CT2 CT1 CT2 CT3
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
9 9 9 9 9
*
3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5
AP AP
3A 3A 3A 3A 3A
7+1
9A P1 9A P1 P1
1
C C C C C
P1 9A P1 9A P2
2
C C C
VIDEOINTERCOMS
P2 P2 9A
EX310 EX320 ST720

+EX304 +EX304 +ST701
+ST704
EX310 EX320 ST720
+EX301 +EX301 +ST701
+EX304 +EX304 +ST704
to power supply
EX320 to power supply
EX320
ST720
ST720
EX310
EX310
- Do not forget to install the - Do not forget to connect terminals C of

EX304 or ST704 speaker the additional buttons and install the
module in every intercom. EX304 or ST704 speaker module in
every intercom.
4 INTERCOMMUNICATING INTERCOMS PRS210

RL37
230V
127V
9P 9R 9M 0
EX320
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
9 9 9 9
3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5
AP
3A 3A 3A 3A
9A P1 P1 P1
1
C C C C
P1 9A P2 P2
2
ST720 C C C C
P2 P2 9A P3
E C C C C
3
X P3 P3 P3 9A
H
I
T
O
- Do not forget to connect EX320 ST720
+EX301 +ST701
terminals C of the additional +EX304 +ST704
S buttons and install the
T EX304 or ST704 speaker
module in every intercom.
U
D
I
to power supply
O
180
(MT11 - Gb2012)
APPLICATION DIAGRAMS FOR ONE-WAY INTERCOMMUNICATING SERVICES IN APARTMENT BUILDING SYSTEMS. ELEC-
4+1 INTERCOMS
TRONIC CALL FROM THE DOOR STATION.
- To match with diagrams: Si 21MO/1; Si 22MO/1; Si 23MO/1; Si 26MO/1; Si 27MO/1.
127V
230V
0
PRS226E
*
CT1 CT2 CT3
7+1
D G 1 1 1
C+ 2 2 2 2
9 4B 9 9 9
VIDEOINTERCOMS
3 3 3
5 5 5
AP
3A 3A 3A
9A P1 P1
to riser 4 Y 7 C C C
1
P1 9A P2
2
C C C
P2 P2 9A
EX320 ST720
EX310 EX320 ST720

+EX301 +EX301 +ST701
+EX304 +EX304 +ST704

additional buttons and install the EX304 or
ST704 speaker module in every intercom.
PRS210
RL37
230V
127V
9P 9R 9M 0
127V
230V
0
PRS226E
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4 CT5
D G 1 1 1 1 1
C+ 2 2 2 2 2 2
9 4B 9 9 9 9 9
3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5
AP
3A 3A 3A 3A 3A
9A P1 P1 P1 P1
to riser 4 Y 7
1
C C C C C
P1
C
9A
C
P2
C
P2
C
P2
C
2 E
P2 P2 9A P3 P3
3 X
C C C C C
P3 P3 P3 9A P4
4
H
C
P4
C
P4
C
P4
C
P4
C
9A
I
T
EX320 ST720 O
S
T
EX320 ST720
+EX301 +ST701 U
+EX304 +ST704
- Do not forget to connect terminals C of the D
additional buttons and install the EX304 or
ST704 speaker module in every intercom. I
O
181
(MT11 - Gb2012)
APPLICATION DIAGRAMS FOR ONE-WAY INTERCOMMUNICATING SERVICES IN APARTMENT BUILDING SYSTEMS. EXTERNAL
4+1 INTERCOMS
CALL ON ELECTRONIC BUZZER.

- To match with diagrams: Si 21MO/1; Si 22MO/1; Si 23MO/1; Si 26MO/1; Si 27MO/1.
127V
230V
0
PRS226E
CT1 CT2 CT3
*
D G 1 1 1
7+1
C+ 2 2 2 2
9 4B 4 4 4
to riser 3 3 3 SR41
3 3 3
VIDEOINTERCOMS
5 5 5
9 P1 P1
1
4 A 7 C C C
P1 9 P2
2
C C C
P2 P2 9
EX320 ST720 EX310 EX320 ST720

JP2
+EX301 +EX301 +ST701
3 2 9 1 5 0 +SR41 +SR41 +SR41
C
P1
P
C
P
P2
4 3
SR41
additional buttons and install the SR41 elec-
127V
230V
0
PRS226E
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4 CT5
D G 1 1 1 1 1
C+ 2 2 2 2 2 2
9 4B 4 4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 3 SR41
3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5 5
9 P1 P1 P1 P1
1
4 A 7 C C C C C
P1 9 P2 P2 P2
to riser 2
C C C C C
P2 P2 9 P3 P3
3
C C C C C
P3 P3 P3 9 P4
4
C C C C C
P4 P4 P4 P4 9
E
X
H
I
EX320 ST720
T +EX301 +ST701
+SR41 +SR41
O EX320 JP2 ST720
3 2 9 1 5 0
S C
P1
T P
U 4 3 P
P2
D SR41
I additional buttons and install the SR41 elec-
O
182
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Application diagrams WORKING INSTRUCTIONS
ADDITIONAL BELL
4+1 INTERCOMS
Basic systems
For all the intercom systems, simply lift the handset to speak to the door
If the ringing volume is not sufficient or if you need to chime the call in a station. The call is indicated by a sound signal on the loudspeaker of the
different place, you can add an additional bell enabled by a relay. handset. If the handset of the intercom is not properly hung-up the sound
is not reproduced.
To activate the door release, press the push-button with the key symbol.
Additional bell enabled by a relay to be installed inside the In systems with two or more entrances the communication and door
intercom release are switched automatically on the entrance from which the call
is made while the other entrances are isolated.
*
Systems with private conversation module
7+1
intercom
terminals In all standard intercom systems (not intercommunicating) a private
audio system can be provided (only the intercom which has been called
VIDEOINTERCOMS
can speak to the door station) by installing the “private conversation
module” art.SM50E in every intercom.
After the call, the user has about 30 seconds to lift handset and answer.
There is no time limit for the private conversation. When the handset is
replaced the system returns to the OFF condition. If a user does not
12 ÷ 48Vac/dc replace the handset properly, the next call from another intercom,
automatically cuts him out of the audio connection with the door station.
Additional bell enabled by a relay in a DIN

housing Intercommunicating systems
Intercommunicating systems allow users to speak to one another by
simply lifting the handset; any user can join in to a conversation already
intercom
in progress.
terminals To avoid interference it is necessary to observe the following instruc-
tions:
- lift the handset;
power supply - make sure that there is not a conversation already in progress;
terminal - then press the call push-button corresponding to the desired user.
12Vac/dc ÷ 230Vac
Intercommunicating systems connected to door station
ADDITIONAL AUDIO AMPLIFIER Such systems allow conversation between two or more inside users with
the exclusion of the door station, or between one inside user and the
door station.
In intercommunicating systems with long distances between intercoms
When there is a call from an external push-button panel the audio line of
and power supply, to increase the intercommunication audio level, it is
the electric door speaker is activated automatically; when a call is made
advisable to install an amplifier art. 2443 (see page 144 for character-
from one of the intercoms, the internal intercommunicating audio line is
istics). The following diagram can be applied to all intercommunicating
automatically activated.
systems (from page 167 to page 173).
The user called has simply to lift the handset.
Any user can join in to a conversation already in progress.
To avoid interference it is necessary to observe the following instruc-
tions:
- lift the handset;
12 - make sure that there is not a conversation already in progress;
13 - then press the call push-button corresponding to the desired user.
F Internal calls have a different sound (continuous tone) from external calls
14
(modulate tone or electronic buzzer).
127V
230V
To actuate the electric door lock you must press the button with the key.
0
G 2 7
2443 In some dia-
PRS226E grams termi-
nals A or 9) are
used.
X C+ D Y
B
12a
13a
183
(MT11 - Gb2012)
TROUBLESHOOTING
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
4+1 INTERCOMS
- Check for the presence of the mains voltage protector), to restore power, it is necessary to supply chapter).
in the terminals 230Vac (or 127Vac) of the cut OFF the mains voltage for about one - Check that the cross section of the cables
power supply. minute. Reconnect power after having elimi- corresponds to what is indicated on page
- The power supply is not provided with fuses, nated the problem. 146 and in the descriptions of each individual
but it is protected against overloading or - Check the voltage output of the power supply diagram.
short-circuiting by a heat sensor (thermo- (see in detail the values indicated in the power
*
PROBLEM, REASON AND SOLUTIONS

7+1
Nothing at all is working A whistle is heard at the external door SYSTEM WITH MORE ENTRANCES
Absence of main voltage. Short-circuit or over- station (Larsen effect)
load of the terminals of the power supply output. The electric door-speaker (amplifier) is badly Entrance A is never activated
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Faulty power supply. housed in the push-button panel. The micro- Short-circuit between 5 and 6 of the exchanger.
phone hole of the external door station might be Faulty exchanger.
The lock does not work clogged. Lower the volume.
Faulty lock. Faulty door release push-button. Entrance B is never activated
The cross section of the cables indicated in Radio reception on the door station Short-circuit between 3 and 4 of the exchanger.
bold type is insufficient. A connecting cable to The defect can occur when there is a transmit- Faulty exchanger. No power supply to 1 and 2
the lock has been interrupted. Faulty power ter working in the proximity. Apply a capacitor of the exchanger (13Vac).
supply. from 0.1µF between terminals 1 and 3 of the
electric door speaker (amplifier).
Calls from the door station do not work
The common connection of the push-buttons
on the push-button panel has been interrupted. INTERCOMMUNICATING SYSTEMS
Faulty power supply.
No audio in both channels. Intercommuni-
A call to an individual intercom does not cating service is not working
work Short-circuit between + and - of the power
The connecting wire from the door station to the supply. Faulty power supply.
intercom has been interrupted. The handset
has not been replaced correctly (in electronic Calls from the door station work. No audio
call systems the ringing sound is reproduced in both channels. Intercommunicating ser-
directly by the loudspeaker of the handset which vice is working
is disconnected when the handset is lifted to No power supply between 3 (+) and 4 (-) of the
avoid ringing sound during the conversation). electric door-speaker (8Vdc). Faulty power
Faulty intercom. supply.
No audio from both channels No audio from the intercoms to the door
Absence of power between 3 (+) and 4 ( - ) of station
the electric door-speaker (6÷8Vdc). Short-cir- The connection between 1 of the intercoms and
cuit between + and - of the power supply. Faulty G of the power supply has been interrupted.
power supply. The connection between D of the power supply
and 1 of the electric door-speaker (amplifier)
No audio from the intercoms to door sta- has been interrupted. Faulty electric door-
tion speaker (amplifier). Faulty power supply.
Connection 1 from the intercoms to the electric
door-speaker has been interrupted or short- No audio from the door station to the inter-
circuited. There is no ground connection to coms
terminal 4 of the electric door-speaker (ampli- The connection between 2 of the intercoms and
fier). Faulty electric door-speaker (amplifier). 2 of the power supply has been interrupted. The
connection between C+ of the power supply
No audio from the door station to the inter- and 2 of the electric door-speaker (amplifier)
coms has been interrupted. Faulty electric door-
Connection 2 from the intercoms to the electric speaker (amplifier). Faulty power supply.
door-speaker (amplifier) has been interrupted
or short-circuited. Faulty electric door-speaker The intercommunicating calls work, but
(amplifier). the door station is still connected
Audio with humming in the background
(50/60Hz) The intercommunicating calls do not work
The wires have been canalized together with Check that cable 7 is connected to 7 of the
the cables that power AC loads. Wrong con- power supply. Faulty power supply.
nections or under dimensioned cross-section
of wires (see recommendation and table on No audio in the intercommunicating ser-
page 35). Faulty power supply. vice
184
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Technical manual 11 VIDEO INTERCOM Edition 2012
Installation diagrams
INDEX Page
Basic installation diagrams 186

- Si 411O/1 One-way video intercom system connected to one external door station (coaxial cable) 186
- Si 411O/2 One-way video intercom system connected to one external door station (twisted pair) 187
- Si 411O/3 One-way video intercom system with long distance between video intercom and main power supply (coaxial cable) 187
- Si 41MO/1 Video intercom system connected to one external door station (coaxial cable) 189
- Si 41MO/2 Video intercom system connected to one external door station (twisted pair) 191
- Si 41MO/3 Mixed intercom and video intercom system connected to one external door station (coaxial cable) 193
- Si 41MO/5 Video intercom system connected to one external door station with surveillance camera (coaxial cable) 195
- Si 42MO/1 Video intercom system connected to two external door stations (coaxial cable) 197
- Si 42MO/2 Video intercom system connected to two external door stations (twisted pair) 199
- Si 42MO/3 Video intercom system connected to two external door stations, one of which only audio (coaxial cable) 201
- Si 43MO/1 Video intercom system connected to three external door stations (coaxial cable) 203
- Si 46MO/1 Video intercom system with secondary video stations and 1 main common video station (coaxial cable) 205
- Si 46MO/2 Video intercom system with secondary video stations and 1 main common video station (twisted pair) 207
- Si 46MO/3 Video intercom system with secondary door stations only audio and 1 main common video station (coaxial cable) 209
- Si 46MO/5 Video intercom system with secondary video stations and 1 main common station only audio (coaxial cable) 211
- Si 46MO/7 Video intercom system with one-way secondary door stations only audio and 1 main common video station (coaxial cable) 213
- Si 46MO/8 Video intercom system with one-way secondary door stations only audio and 1 main common video station (twisted pair) 215
- Si 47MO/1 Video intercom system with secondary video stations and 2 main common video stations (coaxial cable) 217

Troubleshooting 218
Additional diagrams 219

- floor call 221
- additional diagrams for Echos series 222
- additional diagrams for Compact series 223
- additional diagrams for one-way Exhito series 224
- additional diagrams for multi-way Exhito series 225
- additional diagrams for one-way Studio series 226
- additional diagrams for multi-way Studio series 228
185
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 411O/1
4+1
ONE-WAY VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO ONE EXTERNAL DOOR STATION. Video connection
with coaxial cable.
INTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
ECHOS series EXHITO series COMPACT series STUDIO series
1 EH9100CT/CW 1 EX3100C 1 KM8100W 1 ST7100CW
EH9160CT/CW EX3160C KM8600W ST7100W
1 9083 EX3160 KM8800W 1 ST720W
1 WA9100T/W 1 WB3160 1 WB8600 1 WB7100
1 TA9160 1 TA3160 1 8083 1 WB700
*
1 TA7100
7+1
1 TA700
PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series Connection of 1281E power supply-timer instead of
VIDEOINTERCOMS
1281 plus 1282E.

... PL71 ... MA71 ... MD72
1 PL81 ... MAS61 (1) 1 MD82 By adding 1281E to the sche-
1 PL91 * 1 MA91 * 1 MD92 * matics on pages 186 and 187
1 PL41PC-PL41P 1 MAS43C-MAS43 1 MD11 (si411O/1, si411O/2 and
1 MD41 si411O/3) instead of 1281
1 MD30 plus 1282E, the installation will
VARIOUS ARTICLES be switched OFF at the end of
the timing only.
1 1281 Power supply
1 1282E Timer
1 PA ** Door release button (optional)
1 SE ** Electric door lock (12Vac-1A)
(1) Or MA61.
* The rain shelter is used in the place of the back box
1304. MULTI-CORE CABLE
and hood cover.
Video intercom cable with 10 wires of different
cross-sections and 75Ω coaxial cable. It can be
used in systems with a maximum distance of 100
meters (50m between timer and camera unit and
Notes 50m between timer and video intercom).
- If the control switching ON is necessary, connect Wire characteristics
terminal 4 of the timer (dashed wire).
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect Colour Cross-section
door stations MODY series with internal devices (mm²) AWG
ECHOS series. Red 1 16 White 0.25 23
- For the connection of name plate lamps read notes 6 Yellow 0.5 20 Pink 0.25 23
and 7 of the installation instructions on page 146. Blue 0.5 20 Light blue 0.25 23
- For wires dimensioning refer to the installation in- Black 0.35 21 Grey 0.25 23
structions and table on page 146. Green 0.35 21 75Ω low loss coaxial cable.
Orange 0.35 21
ONE-WAY VIDEO INTERCOM CONNECTION WITH MULTI-CORE CABLE art. 1304
art.1304
art.1304
V coaxial
M
H VC
MAS43
MAS61 coaxial V
MA71
light blue M
light blue 9M
black C+ 8
green H blu H
1 white 1 1D white 1
2 pink 2 2D pink 2
MD41 3 orange 3+ 9R
MD11 4 grey 3D yellow 3
MD30 4 black 4
MD72 5 green 5
SE
red F red F
yellow S
blue X
A H IV
PL41P PA 1282E
PL71 COMPACT EXHITO
A I
230V
1281 127V ECHOS
MAX 50 m. 0 MAX 50 m. STUDIO
186
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 411O/3
4+1
One-way video intercom system with long distance between video intercom and main power supply
IV I 1281
476
INTERCOMS
RL37 230V
A 127V
9P
OUT 9P H 9M 0
F
V 9P
IN 14
M
H VC
MAS43
MAS61 V
MA71
M
9M
*
C+ 8
H H
1 1 1D 1
7+1
2 2 2D 2
MD41 3 3+ 9R
MD11 4 3D 3
MD30 PA 4 4
VIDEOINTERCOMS
MD72 5 5
SE F F
S
X
A H IV
PL41P 1282E
PL71 COMPACT EXHITO
The following articles must be added to the list on page 186:

A I
1 RL37 Relay module 230V ECHOS
1281 127V
1 1281 Power supply 0 STUDIO
1 476 Video amplifier
IV I 1281
One-way video intercom system with long distance and 2
RL37 230V
intercommunicating videointercoms A 127V
9P H B 7 9M 0
The following articles must be added to the list on page 186: VC1 VC2
1 RL37 Relay module
V V
1 1281 Power supply M M
1 476 Video amplifier 9M 9M
8 8
1 2443 Amplifier-switcher for intercommunicating H H
1 PRS210 Transformer 1 1
2 2
X (1282E) X
3 3
4 4
Notes 5 5
- On brackets the jumper J1 must be moved from position 2- F F
9R P
3 to 1-2. 1C PC
- On the bracket of the first video intercom (VC1) you must cut P1 9R
the 75Ω resistance.
- To have the intercommunicating service with the Echos 230V 13a 12a 12 13 F 14
ECHOS
127V
series it is necessary: -use model EH9160; - move jumper 0 EXHITO
STUDIO
COMPACT
J5 from position 2-3 to 1-2;- make the “X” connection PRS210 2443
between art. 1282E and the 2 videointercoms EH9160.
Si 411O/2
ONE-WAY VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO ONE EXTERNAL DOOR STATION. Video connection
with twisted pair
MD41D X
Y
H VC
F
X
Y
9M
C+ 8
H H
1 1 1D 1
2 2 2D 2
MD11 3 3+ 9R
MD30 4 3D 3
MD72 PA 4 4
5 5
SE F F
S
X
A H IV
1282E ST7100+WB7100
Notes +ST720+WB700
- In order to use Profilo or Matrix push button panels, it is required
to add CV01 video signal converter (please see on page 150). A I
230V
- In order to use Exhito, Echos or Compact videointercoms, it is 1281 127V
required to add CV03 video signal converter (please see on page 0
199).
187
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 41MO/1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO ONE EXTERNAL DOOR STATION
4+1
INTERNAL STATIONS
INTERCOMS
... EH9100CT/CW ... EX3100C ... KM8100W ... ST7100CW

... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700
*
... TA7100
... TA700
7+1

Connection of 1281E power supply-timer
PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series instead of 1281 plus 1282E.
VIDEOINTERCOMS
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74

1 PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1 MD82÷MD812
230V
127V
1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD92÷MD912 *
0
1 PL40PC÷PL42PC 1 MAS42C-MAS43C 1 MD10÷MD124
PL40P÷PL42P MAS42-MAS43 1 MD41
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 1 MD30 1281E
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD21÷MD228 C+ S X F H 4 5 3+ A
... MD20, MD50
For si41mo1
only
VARIOUS ARTICLES
... DV2-DV4 Video distributors By adding 1281E to the schematics on pages

1 1281 Power supply 188 and 189 instead of 1281 plus 1282E, the
1 1282E Timer system working will modify as follows:
1 PA ** Door release button (optional) - switching-OFF at the end of the timing only
1 SE ** Electric door lock (12Vac-1A) - no control switch-ON interruption with the video
intercoms during external audio-video con-
... Refers to number of users. nection. If the service is necessary, add 1471
(1) Or MA61÷MA63. relay in order to interrupt conductor 4.
* The rain shelter is used in the place of the back box and hood cover.
Working instructions. See page 218. When using MD100 and MD200 amplified external door stations, it is advisable
to place this diagram on the diagram of page 189 and line it up with the riser.
Notes For AC powered wires refer to the indications on page 146.
- If the control switching ON is necessary, connect terminal 4
of the timer (dashed wire).
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door
stations MODY series with internal devices ECHOS series.
- For the connection of name plate lamps read notes 6, 7 and 1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281
IV I
8 of the installation instructions on page 146. 1282E 230V
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the H 127V
C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A 0
installation instructions and table on pages 146÷148.
- For one-way systems connect the coaxial cable to the moni-
tor bracket directly, without using the video distributor.
- For other types of push-button panels see the general cata-
X2 X3 Xn
logue.
MD2..
MD7.
2 MD100
1 MD200
H
V
M
PA MD41
SE
188
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 41MO/1
4+1
75W
INTERCOMS
IN 8
OUT V
ECHOS
M
F
IN
H
1
DV2 2
DV4 EXHITO
3
*
4
5
xn 9M
7+1
STUDIO
VIDEOINTERCOMS
COMPACT
IN 8
OUT V
ECHOS
M
F
IN
H
1
DV2 2
DV4 EXHITO
3
4
5
9M
STUDIO
COMPACT
1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281
IV I
1282E 230V
H 127V
C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A 0
Mody Profilo Matrix

xn P
x2 P
P
C
4 MD30 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
H MD41 H MAS4.
V V
PA M M PL4.P
SE
189
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 41MO/2
4+1
INTERNAL STATIONS
INTERCOMS

... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700
... CV03 ... CV03 ... CV03 ... TA7100
*
... TA700
7+1
PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series Connection of 1281E power supply-timer
instead of 1281 plus 1282E.
VIDEOINTERCOMS
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74

1 PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1 MD82÷MD812
1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD92÷MD912 *
230V
127V
0
PL40P÷PL42P MAS42-MAS43 1 MD41D
1 CV01 1 CV01 1 MD30
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228 1281E
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50 C+ S X F H 4 5 3+ A
For si41mo2
VARIOUS ARTICLES only
1 1281 Power supply By adding 1281E to the schematics on pages
1 1282E Timer 190 and 191 instead of 1281 plus 1282E, the
1 PA ** Door release button (optional) system working will modify as follows:
1 SE ** Electric door lock (12Vac-1A) - switching-OFF at the end of the timing only
- no control switch-ON interruption with the video
... Refers to number of users. intercoms during external audio-video con-
(1) Or MA61÷MA63. nection. If the service is necessary, add 1471
* The rain shelter is used in the place of the back box and hood cover. relay in order to interrupt conductor 4.

When using MD100 and MD200 amplified external door stations, it is advis-
Notes
able to place this diagram on the diagram of page 191 and line it up with the
riser.
For AC powered wires refer to the indications on page 146.
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door
- For one-way systems connect the twisted pair to the monitor
bracket directly, without using the video distributor.
1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281
- For the connection of name plate lamps read notes 6, 7 and IV I
8 of the installation instructions on page 146. 1282E 230V
H 127V
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A 0
installation instructions and table on pages 146 and 149.
- For other types of push-button panels see the general cata-
logue.
X2 X3 Xn
MD2..
MD7.
2 MD100
1 MD200
H
X
Y
PA F
MD41D
SE
190
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 41MO/2
4+1
2x
75W
INTERCOMS
CV03 ECHOS EXHITO COMPACT
F
Y X F H
8 8 8 8
X1 X V V V V
Y1 Y M M M M
F F F F
H H H H
DV2D 1 1 1
DV4D
2 2 2
Y X F H 3 3 3
*
4 4 4
5 5 5
xn 9M 9M 9M
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
STUDIO
Y X F H
8
X1 X
Y1 Y
F F
H H
DV2D 1
DV4D
2
Y X F H 3
4
5
9M
1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281
IV I
1282E 230V
H 127V
C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A 0
Mody Profilo Matrix
xn P
x2 P
P
C
4 MD30 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
PA
H H MAS4.
F M
X V PL4.P
Y MD41D
Y X
H F MV
SE CV01
191
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 41MO/3
MIXED INTERCOM AND VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO ONE EXTERNAL DOOR STATION
4+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
INTERCOMS

... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700
... TA7100
*
... TA700
INTERCOMS
7+1
EXHITO series EXHITO series COMPACT series STUDIO series

... EX310 ... EX320 ... KM810W ... ST720W
VIDEOINTERCOMS
... SM50E ... SM50E ... SM50E ... SM50E

... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74
1 PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1 MD82÷MD812
1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD92÷MD912 *
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 1 MD30
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD21÷MD228
... MD20, MD50
VARIOUS ARTICLES
... DV2-DV4 Video distributors
1 1281 Power supply
1 1282E Timer

(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
Working instructions. See page 218. Private conversation

All the videointercoms have the privacy function which allows
Notes
only the called videointercom to talk with the door station. To
- If the control switching ON is necessary, connect terminal 4 of the timer
(dashed wire). guarantee the same function to the user with a simple intercom
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations device it is necessary to install inside the intercom the privacy
MODY series with internal devices ECHOS series. module SM50E and:
- For one-way systems connect the coaxial cable to the monitor bracket - (ST 720) - remove the mobile jumper inside the connector
directly, without using the video distributor. JP2
- For the connection of name plate lamps read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the - (EX310, EX320 and KM 810) - cut the jumper W1
installation instructions on page 146. - connect terminal 0 of the intercom to terminal - (minus) of the
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the installation SM50E module.
instructions and table on pages 146÷148.
- For other types of push-button panels see the general catalogue.
- By using MD100 and MD200 amplified external door stations, we
recommend to place schematic on page 188 on the other on page 193.
Connection of 1281E power supply-timer instead of 1281 plus

1282E.
By adding 1281E to the schematics
on page 193 instead of 1281 plus
230V
127V
1282E, the system working will

0
modify as follows:
- switching-OFF at the end of the
1281E timing only
C+ S X F H 4 5 3+ A - no control switch-ON interruption
with the video intercoms during
external audio-video connection. If
the service is necessary, add 1471
relay in order to interrupt conduc-
tor 4.
192
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 41MO/3
MIXED INTERCOM AND VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO ONE EXTERNAL DOOR STATION
4+1
75W
INTERCOMS
IN 8
OUT V
ECHOS
M
F
IN
H
1
DV2 2
DV4 EXHITO
3
4
*
5
xn 9M
7+1
STUDIO
COMPACT
VIDEOINTERCOMS
IN 8
OUT V
ECHOS
M
F
IN
H
1
DV2 2
DV4 EXHITO
3
Intercom without pri- 4
vate conversation 5
9M
EX310 EX320 1
2 STUDIO
9
3
COMPACT
0
5
KM810 ST720
Intercom with private conversation

1 1 B
2 2 C
9 9 9
JP2
3 3
0
W1
5
EX310+ EX320+ KM810+ ST720+

SM50E SM50E SM50E SM50E 1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281
IV I
1282E 230V
H 127V
C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A 0
Mody Profilo Matrix

xn P
P
P
C
4 MD30 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
H MD41 H MAS4.
V V
PA M M PL4.P
SE
193
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 41MO/5
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO ONE EXTERNAL DOOR STATION WITH SURVEILLANCE
4+1
CAMERA
INTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700
*
... TA7100
... TA700
7+1

VIDEOINTERCOMS
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74

1 PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1 MD82÷MD812
1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA91÷MA93 * 1 MD92÷MD912 *
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 1 MD30
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD21÷MD228
... MD20, MD50
VARIOUS ARTICLES When using MD100 and MD200 amplified external door stations, it is
... DV2-DV4 Video distributors advisable to place this diagram on the diagram of page 195 and line it up
1 1281 Power supply with the riser.
1 1282E Timer For AC powered wires refer to the indications on page 146.
1 1471 Relay unit
1 TVT.. CCTV camera
1 H.. Lens with or without autoiris
1 CU.. Outdoor heated housing 1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281
1 AST.. Bracket for camera or housing 1282E
IV I
230V
1 APS.. Power supply for camera H 127V
C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A
1 LL** Lamp with maximum power 800W (optional) 0


(1) Or MA61÷MA63. CU..
* The rain shelter is used in the place of the back box and LL
AST..
APS..
hood cover.
2 6 TVT..
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. 3 5 H..
1471 230V
Notes X2 X3 Xn
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door MD2..
- For the connection of name plate lamps read notes 6, 7 and
8 of the installation instructions on page 146.
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the
installation instructions and table on pages 146÷148.
- For one-way systems connect the coaxial cable to the moni-
tor bracket directly, without using the video distributor. MD7.
MD100
- For the selection of CCTV equipment or other types of push- 2
1
MD200
button panels see the general catalogue. PA
Connection of 1281E power supply-timer instead of SE
1281 plus 1282E.

230V
127V
By adding 1281E to the schematics on pages 194 and

0
195 instead of 1281 plus 1282E, the system working will

modify as follows:
1281E - switching-OFF at the end of the timing only
C+ S X F H 4 5 3+ A - no control switch-ON interruption with the video inter-
only for coms during external audio-video connection. If the
si41mo5 service is necessary, add 1471 relay in order to inter-
rupt conductor 4.
194
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 41MO/5
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO ONE EXTERNAL DOOR STATION WITH SURVEILLANCE
4+1
CAMERA 75W
INTERCOMS
IN 8
OUT V
ECHOS
M
F
IN
H
1
DV2 2
DV4 EXHITO
3
4
*
5
xn 9M
7+1
STUDIO
COMPACT
VIDEOINTERCOMS
IN 8
OUT V
ECHOS
M
F
IN
H
1
DV2 2
DV4 EXHITO
3
4
5
9M
STUDIO
COMPACT
1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281
IV I
1282E 230V
H 127V
C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A 0
CU..
AST..
LL APS..
2 6 TVT..
3 5 H..
1471 230V
xn P
x2 P
P
C
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Profilo
A
PA
Mody
SE
Matrix
195
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 42MO/1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO TWO EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS
4+1
INTERNAL STATIONS
INTERCOMS

... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700
... TA7100
*
... TA700
7+1

VIDEOINTERCOMS
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74

2 PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 2 MD82÷MD812
2 PL91÷PL99 * 2 MA91÷MA93 * 2 MD92÷MD912 *
230V
127V
0
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 2 MD30
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD21÷MD228
... MD20, MD50 1281E
VARIOUS ARTICLES C+ S X F H 4 5 3+ A

1 1281 Power supply
1 1282E Timer
1 1273TV Exchanger
By adding 1281E to the schematics on page
197 instead of 1281 plus 1282E, the system
working will modify as follows:
... Refers to number of users. - switching-OFF at the end of the timing only.
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
As the basic system described on page 218, with the following variations: Control switching ON deactivation
- The audio-video functions and door lock opening are automatically switched to the door To deactivate the monitoring function during the
station which has made the call (or control switching ON) and remain in this state until a conversation and to keep it only when the system is
call from another entrance is received. in standby, it is necessary to install a 2-exchange
relay (type 1472) and connect it as shown on the
Notes diagram.
- If monitoring function is required it is necessary to connect the dashed conductors and: to the video-
- Echos series - verify that jumper J5, located on the back of videointercom, is in the intercoms
position 2-3;
- Exhito series (possibility of monitoring only the “a” entrance);
- Compact series - connect together terminals 1C and PC on the wall bracket;
- Studio series - connect together terminals 1C and PC on the wall bracket.
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations MODY series with
internal devices ECHOS series.
- For the connection of name plate lamps read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the installation
instructions on page 146.
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the installation instructions and
table on pages 146÷148.
- For one-way systems connect the coaxial cable to the monitor bracket directly, without
using the video distributor.
to 5 of the videointercoms
Connection of 2 door locks with simulta-
1282E
neous opening F S A 5
PRS210
1281E
If it is necessary to operate the 2 door locks
of the system at the same time, you must:
- add a 12Vac transformer with suitable
power (type PRS210)
- add a 12Vac relay (type 1471) 32 62
- make the connections as shown in the
PA
diagram below.
PA
12 52
SE 1471 SE
196
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 42MO/1
4+1
75W
INTERCOMS
ECHOS EXHITO COMPACT
IN 8 8 8
OUT V V V
M M M
F F F
IN
H H H
1 1 1
DV2 2 2 2
DV4
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
*
xn 9M 9M 9M
1C 1C 1C
9R 9R 9R
7+1
1 P1 PC
P1 P
STUDIO
VIDEOINTERCOMS
ECHOS EXHITO COMPACT
IN 8 8 8
OUT V V V
M M M
F F F
IN
H H H
1 1 1
DV2 2 2 2
DV4
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
9M 9M 9M
1C 1C 1C
9R 9R 9R
1 P1 PC
P1 P
STUDIO
1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281
IV I
1282E 230V
H 127V
C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A
0
“a “ “b“
Matrix Profilo Mody Mody Profilo Matrix
P xn xn P
P x2 8 9 4 5 7 1 2 10 11 12 x2 P
P P
C 6 3 C
4 MD30 4 4 MD30 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 12a 12b 2 2
1 1 11a 11b 1 1
A A
MAS4. H MD41 H 10a 10b H MD41 H MAS4.

V V 9a 9b V V
PL4.P M M 8a 8b M M PL4.P
1273TV
PA 7a 7b PA
SE SE
197
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 42MO/2
4+1
INTERNAL STATIONS
INTERCOMS

... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700
... CV03 ... CV03 ... CV03 ... TA7100
*
... TA700
7+1

VIDEOINTERCOMS
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74

2 PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 2 MD82÷MD812
2 PL91÷PL99 * 2 MA91÷MA93 * 2 MD92÷MD912 *
230V
127V
0
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 2 MD30
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD21÷MD228
... CV01 ... CV01 ... MD20, MD50 1281E
C+ S X F H 4 5 3+ A
VARIOUS ARTICLES
1 1281 Power supply
1 1282E Timer
By adding 1281E to the schematics on page
1 1273TV Exchanger
199 instead of 1281 plus 1282E, the system
- switching-OFF at the end of the timing only.
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
Working instructions. Control switching ON deactivation

As the basic system described on page 218, with the following variations: To deactivate the monitoring function during the
- The audio-video functions and door lock opening are automatically switched to the door conversation and to keep it only when the system is
station which has made the call (or control switching ON) and remain in this state until a in standby, it is necessary to install a 2-exchange
call from another entrance is received. relay (type 1472) and connect it as shown on the
diagram.
Notes to the video-
- If monitoring function is required it is necessary to connect the dashed conductors and: intercoms
- Echos series - verify that jumper J5, located on the back of videointercom, is in the
position 2-3;
- Compact series - connect together terminals 1C and PC on the wall bracket;
- Studio series - connect together terminals 1C and PC on the wall bracket.
table on pages 146 and 149.
1282E
PRS210
1281E
power (type PRS210)
PA
diagram below.
PA
12 52
SE 1471 SE
198
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 42MO/2
4+1
2x
INTERCOMS
75W
CV03 ECHOS EXHITO COMPACT
F
X Y F H
8 8 8 8
X1 X V V V V
Y1 Y M M M M
F F F F
H H H H
DV2D 1 1 1
DV4D
2 2 2
X Y F H 3 3 3
4 4 4
*
5 5 5
xn 9M 9M 9M
1C 1C 1C
7+1
9R 9R 9R
1 P1 PC
P1 P
VIDEOINTERCOMS
STUDIO
X Y F H
8
X1 X
Y1 Y
F F
H H
DV2D 1
DV4D
2
X Y F H 3
4
5
9M
1C
9R
PC
P
1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281
IV I
1282E 230V
H 127V
C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A
0
“a “ “b“
P xn xn P
P x2 8 9 4 5 7 1 2 10 11 12 x2 P
P P
C 6 3 C
4 MD30 4 4 MD30 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 12a 12b 2 2
1 1 11a 11b 1 1
A A
MAS4. M MD41D F F MD41D M MAS4.

H H 10a 10b H H
PL4.P V Y 9a 9b Y V PL4.P
1273TV
X 8a 8b X
PA 7a 7b PA
Y X X Y
V M F H SE SE H F MV
CV01 CV01
199
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 42MO/3
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO TWO EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS, ONE OF WHICH ONLY AUDIO
4+1
INTERNAL STATIONS
INTERCOMS

... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700
... TA7100
*
... TA700
7+1

VIDEOINTERCOMS
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74

2 PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 2 MD82÷MD812 instead of 1281 plus 1282E.
2 PL91÷PL99 * 2 MA91÷MA93 * 2 MD92÷MD912 *
230V
127V
1 MA10P÷12P 1 MAS10P÷MAS12P 2 MD30
0
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50
1281E
VARIOUS ARTICLES C+ S X F H 4 5 3+ A

1 1281 Power supply
1 1282E Timer
1 1473 Exchanger By adding 1281E to the schematics on page
2 PA ** Door release button (optional) 201 instead of 1281 plus 1282E, the system
2 SE ** Electric door lock (12Vac-1A) working will modify as follows:
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
Working instructions. Control switching ON deactivation

As the basic system described on page 218, with the following variations: To deactivate the monitoring function during the
- The audio-video functions and door lock opening are automatically switched to the door conversation and to keep it only when the system is
station which has made the call and remain in this state until a call from another entrance in standby, it is necessary to install a relay (type
is received. 1471 or 1472) and connect it as shown on the
diagram.
Notes to the video-
4
- If the control switching ON is necessary, connect terminal 4 of the timer (dashed wire). intercoms
7
2 3
2 F
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the installation instructions and 1472 1281E
table on pages 146÷148. 1282E
- For one-way systems connect the coaxial cable to the monitor bracket directly, without H
5
2 2
2
using the video distributor.
6
1473
1282E
PRS210
1281E
power (type PRS210)
PA
diagram below.
PA
12 52
SE 1471 SE
200
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 42MO/3
4+1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO TWO EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS, ONE OF WHICH ONLY AUDIO
75W
INTERCOMS
IN 8
OUT V
ECHOS
M
F
IN
H
1
DV2 2
DV4 EXHITO
3
4
5
xn
*
9M
STUDIO
7+1
COMPACT
VIDEOINTERCOMS
IN 8
OUT V
ECHOS
M
F
IN
H
1
DV2 2
DV4 EXHITO
3
4
5
9M
STUDIO
COMPACT
1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281
IV I
1282E 230V
H 127V
C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A
0
“a“ “b“
P xn xn P
P x2 4 5 7 1 2 10 9 8 x2 P
P P
C 6 3 C
4 MD30 4 4 MD30 4 MAS1.P
3 3 3 3
2 2 8a 8b 2 2
PL1.P
1 1 9a 9b 1 1
A A
MAS4. H H 10a
MD41 1473
V V 7a 7b
PL4.P M M
PA PA
SE SE
201
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 43MO/1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO THREE EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS
4+1
INTERNAL STATIONS
INTERCOMS

... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700
... TA7100
*
... TA700
7+1

VIDEOINTERCOMS
... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74

3 PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 3 MD82÷MD812
3 PL91÷PL99 * 3 MA91÷MA93 * 3 MD92÷MD912 *
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 3 MD30
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD21÷MD228
... MD20, MD50
VARIOUS ARTICLES
1 1281 Power supply Connection of 1281E power supply-timer
1 1282E Timer
2 1273TV Exchanger
230V
127V
0
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
* The rain shelter is used in the place of the back box and hood cover. 1281E
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. C+ S X F H 4 5 3+ A
- The audio-video functions and door lock opening are automatically switched to the door station
which has made the call (or control switching ON) and remain in this state until a call from another By adding 1281E to the schematics on page
entrance is received. 203 instead of 1281 plus 1282E, the system
Notes - switching-OFF at the end of the timing only.
- If monitoring function is required it is necessary to connect the
dashed conductors and:
- Echos series - verify that jumper J5, located on the back of
videointercom, is in the position 2-3;
- Compact series (possibility of monitoring the “a” and "b" entrances
- connect together terminals 1C and PC on the wall bracket;
To deactivate the monitoring function during the conversation and to
- Studio series - connect together terminals 1C, PC and C on the wall
keep it only when the system is in standby, it is necessary to install a 2-
bracket.
exchange relay (type 1472) and connect it as shown on the diagram.
- For the connection of name plate lamps read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the to the video-
intercoms
instructions and table on pages 146÷148.
- For one-way systems connect the coaxial cable to the monitor
bracket directly, without using the video distributor.
DS1 and DS2 are diagram references.
202
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 43MO/1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM CONNECTED TO THREE EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS
4+1
75W
ECHOS EXHITO COMPACT STUDIO
INTERCOMS
IN 8 8 8 8
OUT V V V V
M M M M
F F F F
IN
H H H H
1 1 1 1
DV2 2 2 2 2
DV4
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
xn 9M 9M 9M 9M
1C 1C 1C 1C
9R 9R 9R 9R
1 P1 PC PC
*
P1 P2 P P
2
P2 P1 1
C ST701
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
ECHOS EXHITO COMPACT STUDIO
IN 8 8 8 8
OUT V V V V
M M M M
F F F F
IN
H H H H
1 1 1 1
DV2 2 2 2 2
DV4
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
9M 9M 9M 9M
1C 1C 1C 1C
9R 9R 9R 9R
1 P1 PC PC
P1 P2 P P
2
P2 P1 1
C ST701
1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281
IV I
1282E 230V
H 127V
C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A
0
Mody Profilo Matrix

xn P
8 9 4 5 7 1 2 10 11 12 x2 P
P
3 C
4 4
MD30
3 3
12b 2 2
11b 1 1
A
1273TV
10b H H
MD41 MA4.
9b V V
8b M M PL4.P
6 7a 8a 9a 10a 11a 12a 7b PA
SE
P xn xn P
P x2 4 5 7 8 9 10 1 2 11 12 x2 P
P P
C 6 3 C
4 MD30 4 4 4
MD30
3 3 3 3
2 2 12a 12b 2 2
1 1 11a 11b 1 1
A A
MA4. H MD41 H 10a 10b H H

MD41 MA4.
V V 9a 9b V V
M M 8a 8b M M
PL4.P 1273TV PL4.P
PA 7a 7b PA
SE SE
203
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MO/1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY VIDEO STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON VIDEO STATION
4+1
(multiple entrance)
INTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700
*
... TA7100
... TA700
7+1
PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series The main entrance push-button panel must
VIDEOINTERCOMS
have separate common terminals. One common

... PL71÷PL73 ... MA71÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74 terminal for each secondary door station. Buttons of
1+X PL81÷PL89 ... MAS61÷MAS63 (1) 1+X MD82÷MD812 the Mody series can be divided into 2-button groups.
1+X PL91÷PL99 * 1+X MA91÷MA93 * 1+X MD92÷MD912 * The common terminals of push-buttons Profilo and
1+X PL40PC÷PL42PC 1+X MAS42C-MAS43C 1+X MD10÷MD124 Matrix series can be separated only module by
PL40P÷PL42P MAS42-MAS43 1+X MD41 module.
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 1+X MD30
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD21÷MD228 Mody series button module
... MD20, MD50
common of buttons 1 and
2
VARIOUS ARTICLES
to separate the common of
... DV2-DV4 Video distributors buttons cut here
1+X 1281 Power supply common of buttons 3 and
1+X 1282E Timer 4
X 1273TV Exchanger
1+... 476 Video distributor-amplifier
1+X PA ** Door release button (optional) Connection of 1281E power supply-timer in-
1+X SE ** Electric door lock (12Vac-1A) stead of 1281 plus 1282E.
... Refers to number of users. Power supply-timer of the secondary entrance

X Refers to number of secondary door stations.
127V
230V
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
0
1281E
Working instructions. A 3+ S F 4 X H C+ 5
- The audio-video functions and door lock opening are automatically switched to the door
station which has made the call (or control switching ON) and remain in this state until
a call from another entrance is received. Power supply-timer of the main entrance
time.
F S H 3+ 4 X 5 C+
Notes 230V
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations MODY series with 127V 1281E
0
- If the control switching ON is necessary, connect terminal 4 of the timer (dashed wire).
- For the connection of name plate lamps read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the installation By adding 1281E to the schematics on page 205
instructions on page 146. instead of 1281 plus 1282E, the system working will
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the installation instructions and modify as follows:
table on pages 146÷148. - switching-OFF at the end of the timing only.
Connection of two door locks, of which the

secondary is always activable, in a system with
Control switching ON deactivation to the video- multiple entrance
To deactivate the monitoring function intercoms
during the conversation and to keep it For this option it is necessary to
only when the system is in standby, it is install a diode (100V-1A; type
necessary to install a relay (type 1471 or 1N4007) between terminals 7
1472) and connect it as shown on the (cathode) and 7a (anode) of every
diagram. secondary exchanger. The diode
allows to activate also the door
look of your own entrance when the door look of the
main entrance is activated. On the contrary when the
door lock of your own entrance is activated the door
look of the main entrance is not activated.
204
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MO/1
4+1
(multiple entrance)
INTERCOMS
“A” “B”
75 75 “ C - D - .. ”
8 IN 8 IN
V OUT V OUT
M M
F F
IN IN
H H
COMPACT EXHITO COMPACT EXHITO
1 1
2
DV2 2
DV2
DV4 DV4
3 3
4 4
*
5 5
ECHOS STUDIO 9M ECHOS STUDIO 9M
9R xn(A) 9R Xn(B)
1C 1C
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
8 IN 8 IN
V OUT V OUT
M M
F F
IN IN
H H
1 1
2
DV2 2
DV2
DV4 DV4
3 3
4 4
5 5
9R 9R
1C 1C
1281 3D 4 7 2D 1D 1281 3D 4 7 2D 1D
H H
I IV I IV
230V 1282E 230V 1282E
127V 127V
0 A A 3+ S F X H C+ 5 2 1 0 A A 3+ S F X H C+ 5 2 1
P Xn(A) P Xn(B)
P 1 5 7a 12 11 7 10 9 8 P 1 5 7a 12 11 7 10 9 8
C 6 C 6
4 MD30 4 4 MD30 4
3 3 2 3 3 2
2 2 12a 2 2 12a
11a 1273TV 11a 1273TV
1 1 1 1
A A
MAS4. H MD41 H 10a MAS4. H MD41 H 10a

V V 9a V V 9a
PL4.P M M 8a PL4.P M M 8a
PA PA
“ C - D - .. ”
4 3 12b 11b 10b 7b 9b 8b 4 3 12b 11b 10b 7b 9b 8b
SE SE
OUT1 OUT2
OUT3
F OUT4
Matrix Profilo Mody 14 476 OUT5
P IN
xn(C)
P
x1(C)
C 4 (C)
P xn(B)
P
C
P
xn(A)
P
C
4 MD30 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
MAS4. MD41
H H
V V
PL4.P M M
SE PA
1281 S F 3+ 3D C+ 2 X H 5
I IV
230V A A
127V H 1282E
0
205
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MO/2
4+1
(multiple entrance)
INTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700
*
... CV03 ... CV03 ... CV03 ... TA7100

7+1
... TA700
PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series The main entrance push-button panel must
VIDEOINTERCOMS

PL40P÷PL42P MAS42-MAS43 1+X MD41D module.
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 1+X MD30
... CV01 ... CV01 ... MD20, MD50 common of buttons 1 and
2
VARIOUS ARTICLES to separate the common of
buttons cut here
1+X 1282E Timer 4
X 1273TV Exchanger
1+X PA ** Door release button (optional)
1+X SE ** Electric door lock (12Vac-1A) Connection of 1281E power supply-timer in-
stead of 1281 plus 1282E.
X Refers to number of secondary door stations. Power supply-timer of the secondary entrance
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
127V
230V
0
Working instructions. 1281E

As the basic system described on page 218, with the following variations: A 3+ S F 4 X H C+ 5
- Services to secondary door stations are independent and can be operated at the same Power supply-timer of the main entrance
time.
Notes F S H 3+ 4 X 5 C+
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations MODY series with 230V
internal devices ECHOS series. 127V 1281E
0
By adding 1281E to the schematics on page 207
instead of 1281 plus 1282E, the system working will
modify as follows:
table on pages 146 and 149.
- For other types of push-button panels see the general catalogue. - switching-OFF at the end of the timing only.

Control switching ON deactivation to the video- multiple entrance
To deactivate the monitoring function intercoms
during the conversation and to keep it For this option it is necessary to
only when the system is in standby, it is install a diode (100V-1A; type
necessary to install a relay (type 1471 or 1N4007) between terminals 7
1472) and connect it as shown on the (cathode) and 7a (anode) of every
diagram. secondary exchanger. The diode
206
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MO/2
4+1
(multiple entrance)
INTERCOMS
“A” “B” “ C - D - .. ”
2x 2x
75 75
CV03 CV03
F F
F H Y X F H Y X
8 8 8 8
V V X X1 V V X X1
M M Y Y1 M M Y Y1
F F F F
*
H H H H
1 DV2D 1 DV2D
DV4D DV4D
2 2
3 F H Y X 3 F H Y X
7+1
4 4
5 5
9M 9M
9R xn(A) 9R Xn(B)
ECHOS 1C ECHOS 1C
EXHITO PC EXHITO PC
COMPACT P COMPACT P
VIDEOINTERCOMS
F H Y X F H Y X
8 8
X X1 X X1
Y Y1 Y Y1
F F F F
STUDIO STUDIO
H H H H
1 DV2D 1 DV2D
DV4D DV4D
2 2
3 F H Y X 3 F H Y X
4 4
5 5
9M 9M
9R 9R
1C 1C
PC PC
P P
1281 3D 4 7 2D 1D 1281 3D 4 7 2D 1D
H H
I IV I IV
230V 1282E 230V 1282E
127V 127V
0 A A 3+ S F X H C+ 5 2 1 0 A A 3+ S F X H C+ 5 2 1
P Xn(A) P Xn(B)
P 1 5 7a 12 11 7 10 9 8 P 1 5 7a 12 11 7 10 9 8
C 6 C 6
4 MD30 4 4 MD30 4
3 3 2 3 3 2
2 2 12a 2 2 12a
11a 1273TV 11a 1273TV
1 1 1 1
A A
PA PA
MAS4. M F MAS4. M F
H H 10a H H 10a
PL4.P V Y 9a PL4.P V Y 9a
MD41D X 8a MD41D X 8a “ C - D - .. ”
4 3 12b 11b 10b 7b 8b 9b 4 3 12b 11b 10b 7b 8b 9b
Y X Y X
V M F H V M F H
CV01 SE CV01 SE
Y1 F H X2
X1 Y2
Y DV2D Y
Matrix Profilo Mody X DV4D X
P xn(C)
P
x1(C)
C 4 (C)
P xn(B)
P
C
P
xn(A)
P
C
4 MD30 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
MAS4. M F
H H
PL4.P V Y
MD41D X
SE
PA
Y X
V M F H
CV01
1281 S F 3+ 3D C+ 2 X H 5
I IV
230V A A
127V H 1282E
0
207
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MO/3
4+1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS ONLY AUDIO AND 1 MAIN COMMON VIDEO
INTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
*
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700

... TA7100
7+1
... TA700
The main entrance push-button panel must
VIDEOINTERCOMS

1 PL40PC÷PL42PC 1 MAS42C-MAS43C 1+X MD10÷MD124 Matrix series can be separated only module by
PL40P÷PL42P MAS42-MAS43 1 MD41 module.
X PL10P÷PL124P X MAS10P÷MAS12P 1+X MD30
Mody series button module
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50 common of buttons 1 and
2
VARIOUS ARTICLES to separate the common
of buttons cut here
1+X 1282E Timer 4
X 1273TV Exchanger
Connection of 1281E power supply-timer in-
1+X SE ** Electric door lock (12Vac-1A)
... Refers to number of users. Power supply-timer of the secondary entrance

127V
230V
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
0
1281E
Working instructions. A 3+ S F 4 X H C+ 5
a call from another entrance is received. Power supply-timer of the main entrance
time.
F S H 3+ 4 X 5 C+
Notes 230V
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations MODY series with 127V 1281E
0
By adding 1281E to the schematics on page 209
modify as follows:

multiple entrance
For this option it is necessary to
install a diode (100V-1A; type
1N4007) between terminals 7
(cathode) and 7a (anode) of every
secondary exchanger. The diode
208
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MO/3
4+1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS ONLY AUDIO AND 1 MAIN COMMON VIDEO
INTERCOMS
“A” “B” “ C - D - .. ”
75 75
8 IN 8 IN
V OUT V OUT
M M
F F
IN IN
H H
1 1
2
DV2 2
DV2
DV4 DV4
*
3 3
4 4
5 5
xn(A) Xn(B)
7+1
9R 9R
1C 1C
VIDEOINTERCOMS
8 IN 8 IN
V OUT V OUT
M M
F F
IN IN
H H
1 1
2
DV2 2
DV2
DV4 DV4
3 3
4 4
5 5
9R 9R
1C 1C
1281 3D 4 7 2D 1D 1281 3D 4 7 2D 1D
H H
I IV I IV
230V 1282E 230V 1282E
127V 127V
0 A A 3+ S F X H C+ 5 2 1 0 A A 3+ S F X H C+ 5 2 1
P Xn(A) P Xn(B)
P 1 5 7a 12 11 7 10 9 8 P 1 5 7a 12 11 7 10 9 8
C 6 C 6
MAS1.P 4 MD30 4 MAS1.P 4 MD30 4
3 3 2 3 3 2
PL1.P 2 2 12a PL1.P 2 2 12a
11a 1273TV 11a 1273TV
1 1 1 1
A A
10a 10a
9a 9a
8a 8a
PA PA
“ C - D - .. ”
4 3 12b 11b 10b 7b 9b 8b 4 3 12b 11b 10b 7b 9b 8b
SE SE
OUT1 OUT2
OUT3
F OUT4
Matrix Profilo Mody 14 476 OUT5
P IN
xn(C)
P
x1(C)
C 4 (C)
P xn(B)
P
C
P
xn(A)
P
C
4 MD30 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
MAS4.
H H
V V
PL4.P M M
MD41
SE PA
1281 S F 3+ 3D C+ 2 X H 5
I IV
230V A A
127V H 1282E
0
209
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MO/5
4+1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY VIDEO STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON STATION ONLY
AUDIO (multiple entrance)
INTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
*
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700

... TA7100
7+1
... TA700
The main entrance push-button panel must
VIDEOINTERCOMS

X PL40PC÷PL42PC X MAS42C-MAS43C 1+X MD10÷MD124 Matrix series can be separated only module by
PL40P÷PL42P MAS42-MAS43 X MD41 module.
1 PL10P÷PL124P 1 MAS10P÷MAS12P 1+X MD30
Mody series button module
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50 common of buttons 1 and
2
VARIOUS ARTICLES to separate the common
of buttons cut here
1+X 1282E Timer 4
X 1273TV Exchanger
1+X SE ** Electric door lock (12Vac-1A)
X Refers to number of secondary door stations. Power supply-timer of the secondary entrance
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
127V
230V
0
Working instructions. 1281E
As the basic system described on page 218, with the following variations: A 3+ S F 4 X H C+ 5
- Services to secondary door stations are independent and can be operated at the same Power supply-timer of the main entrance
time.
F S H 3+ 4 X 5 C+
Notes
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations MODY series with 230V
127V 1281E
internal devices ECHOS series. 0
- For the connection of name plate lamps read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the installation By adding 1281E to the schematics on page 211
instructions on page 146. instead of 1281 plus 1282E, the system working will
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the installation instructions and modify as follows:
table on pages 146÷148. - switching-OFF at the end of the timing only.

Control switching ON deactivation to the video- secondary is always activable, in a system with
To deactivate the monitoring function intercoms multiple entrance
during the conversation and to keep it
only when the system is in standby, it is
install a diode (100V-1A; type
necessary to install a relay (type 1471 or
1N4007) between terminals 7
1472) and connect it as shown on the
(cathode) and 7a (anode) of every
diagram.
secondary exchanger. The diode
210
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MO/5
4+1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY VIDEO STATIONS AND 1 MAIN COMMON STATION ONLY
AUDIO (multiple entrance)
INTERCOMS
“A” “B” “ C - D - .. ”
75 75
8 IN 8 IN
V OUT V OUT
M M
F F
IN IN
H H
1 1
2
DV2 2
DV2
*
DV4 DV4
3 3
4 4
5 5
7+1
9R xn(A) 9R Xn(B)
1C 1C
VIDEOINTERCOMS
8 IN 8 IN
V OUT V OUT
M M
F F
IN IN
H H
1 1
2
DV2 2
DV2
DV4 DV4
3 3
4 4
5 5
9R 9R
1C 1C
1281 3D 4 7 2D 1D 1281 3D 4 7 2D 1D
H H
I IV I IV
230V 1282E 230V 1282E
127V 127V
0 A A 3+ S F X H C+ 5 2 1 0 A A 3+ S F X H C+ 5 2 1
P Xn(A) P Xn(B)
P 1 5 7a 12 11 7 10 9 8 P 1 5 7a 12 11 7 10 9 8
C 6 C 6
4 MD30 4 4 MD30 4
3 3 2 3 3 2
2 2 12a 2 2 12a
11a 1273TV 11a 1273TV
1 1 1 1
A A
MAS4. H MD41 H 10a MAS4. H H 10a

MD41
V V 9a V V 9a
PA PA
“ C - D - .. ”
4 3 12b 11b 10b 7b 9b 8b 4 3 12b 11b 10b 7b 9b 8b
SE SE
Matrix Profilo Mody

P xn(C)
P
x1(C)
C 4 (C)
P xn(B)
P
C
P
xn(A)
P
C
MAS1.P 4 MD30 4
3 3
PL1.P 2 2
1 1
SE PA
1281 S F 3+ 3D C+ 2 X H 5
I IV
230V A A
127V H 1282E
0
211
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MO/7
4+1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH ONE-WAY SECONDARY DOOR STATIONS ONLY AUDIO AND 1 MAIN
INTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700
*
... TA7100
7+1
... TA700
MAIN EXTERNAL DOOR STATION
PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series Connection of 1281E power supply-timer in-
VIDEOINTERCOMS

... PL71÷PL73 ... MA72÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74
1 PL81÷PL89 ... MAS62÷MAS63 (1) 1 MD82÷MD812
1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA92÷MA93 * 1 MD92÷MD912 * Power supply-timer of the main entrance
F S H 3+ 4 X 5 C+
1 MD30
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228 230V
127V 1281E
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50 0
SECONDARY EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS By adding 1281E to the schematics on page 213
PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series modify as follows:
... PL71 ... MA71 ... MD71 - switching-OFF at the end of the timing only.
X PL81 ... MAS61 (1) X MD81
X PL91 * X MA91 * X MD91 *
X MD11 Connection of two door locks, of which the
X PL11P X MA11P X MD30 secondary is always activable, in a system with
multiple entrance
VARIOUS ARTICLES
... DV2-DV4 Video distributors install a diode (100V-1A; type
1 1281 Power supply 1N4007) between terminals 7
1 1282E Timer (cathode) and 7a (anode) of every
X 1473 Exchanger secondary exchanger. The diode
X PRS240 Power supply allows to activate also the door
X 1471 Relay unit look of your own entrance when the door look of the
1+... 476 Video distributor-amplifier main entrance is activated. On the contrary when the
1+X PA ** Door release button (optional) door lock of your own entrance is activated the door
1+X SE ** Electric door lock (12Vac-1A) look of the main entrance is not activated.
Connection of the MD100 amplified external door sta-
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
tion to the secondary door station instead of electric
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. door speaker MD30 and module MD11.
- The audio-video functions and door lock opening are automatically switched to 4 5 7 12 8 9 10
the door station which has made the call (or control switching ON) and remain 6
in this state until a call from another entrance is received.

MD71
- Services to secondary door stations are independent and can be operated at MD100 1473
2 8a
the same time. 1 9a
2
- By making the call from the secondary audio station, the video intercom 1
remains switched OFF.

7a 13 3 8b 9b 10b 7b
Notes SE
PA
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations MODY
series with internal devices ECHOS series.
- If the control switching ON is necessary, connect terminal 4 of the timer (dashed 230V X C+ 1 5 6 3
I
wire). 127V
0 PRS240 1471
- DV.. distributors can be used instead of the video distributors 476 by adding
a power supply wire (from + to terminal 8 of every video intercom).
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the installation instruc-
tions and table on pages 146÷148.
212
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MO/7
4+1
INTERCOMS
“A” “B” “ C - D - .. ”
8 8
V V
M M
EXHITO F EXHITO F
H H
1 1
2 2
3 3
STUDIO 4 STUDIO 4
5 5
9M 9M
9R 9R
*
1C 1C
COMPACT COMPACT
7+1
8 8
V V
M M
F F
H H
VIDEOINTERCOMS
1 1
ECHOS 2 ECHOS 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
9M 9M
9R 9R
1C 1C
X X
P P
C C
Matrix Matrix
MAS11P 4 MAS11P 4
3 3
PL11P 2 PL11P 2
1 1
Profilo Profilo
A A
4 5 7 12 8 9 10 4 5 7 12 8 9 10
6 6
MD30 4 MD30 4
3 1473 3 1473
Mody 2 8a Mody 2 8a
1 9a 1 9a
2 2
1 1
7a 13 3 8b 9b 10b 7b 7a 13 3 8b 9b 10b 7b
SE SE
PA PA
230V X C+ 1 5 6 3 230V X C+ 1 5 6 3
“ C - D - .. ”
I
127V 127V
0 PRS240 1471 0 PRS240 1471
OUT1 OUT2
OUT3
Matrix Profilo Mody
F OUT4
14 476 OUT5
P
IN
P
C
4 4
MD30
3 3
2 2
1
To communicate with your
1
own secondary entrance it is
A
necessary to remove the
MAS4.
H H audio privacy to the
V V
PL4.P M MD41 M videointercoms.
SE
On bracket of the Exhito,
PA
Compact and Studio video
intercoms you must move
1281 S F 3+ 3D 4 C+ 2 X H 5
jumper J1 from position 2-3
I IV to 1-2.
230V A A
127V H
1282E On the Echos series
0
videointercoms (EH9160)
connect terminal X as shown
in the installation diagram.
213
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MO/8
4+1
INTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
*
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700

... CV03 ... CV03 ... CV03 ... TA7100
7+1
... TA700
MAIN EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS
VIDEOINTERCOMS

... PL71÷PL73 ... MA72÷MA73 ... MD72÷MD74
1 PL81÷PL89 ... MAS62÷MAS63 (1) 1 MD82÷MD812
1 PL91÷PL99 * 1 MA92÷MA93 * 1 MD92÷MD912 * Power supply-timer of the main entrance
F S H 3+ 4 X 5 C+
1 CV01 1 CV01 1 MD30
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 ... MD21÷MD228 230V
127V 1281E
... PL20, PL50 ... MAS20 ... MD20, MD50 0
SECONDARY EXTERNAL DOOR STATIONS By adding 1281E to the schematics on page 215
PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series modify as follows:
... PL71 ... MA71 ... MD71 - switching-OFF at the end of the timing only.
X PL81 ... MAS61 (1) X MD81
X PL91 * X MA91 * X MD91 *
X MD11 Connection of two door locks, of which the
X PL11P X MA11P X MD30 secondary is always activable, in a system with
multiple entrance
VARIOUS ARTICLES
... DV2D-DV4D Video distributors install a diode (100V-1A; type
1 1281 Power supply 1N4007) between terminals 7
1 1282E Timer (cathode) and 7a (anode) of every
X 1473 Exchanger secondary exchanger. The diode
X PRS240 Power supply allows to activate also the door
X 1471 Relay unit look of your own entrance when the door look of the
1+X PA ** Door release button (optional) main entrance is activated. On the contrary when the
1+X SE ** Electric door lock (12Vac-1A) door lock of your own entrance is activated the door
(1) Or MA61÷MA63. Connection of the MD100 amplified external door sta-
* The rain shelter is used in the place of the back box and hood cover. tion to the secondary door station instead of electric
** Articles not supplied by ACI Farfisa. door speaker MD30 and module MD11.
- The audio-video functions and door lock opening are automatically switched
4 5 7 12 8 9 10
to the door station which has made the call (or control switching ON) and 6
remain in this state until a call from another entrance is received.
MD71
- Services to secondary door stations are independent and can be operated at MD100 1473
2 8a
the same time. 1 9a
2
- By making the call from the secondary audio station, the video intercom 1
remains switched OFF.

7a 13 3 8b 9b 10b 7b
Notes SE
PA
- For audio compatibility we do not suggest to connect door stations MODY
series with internal devices ECHOS series.
- If the control switching ON is necessary, connect terminal 4 of the timer
230V X C+ 1 5 6 3
I
(dashed wire). 127V

0 PRS240 1471
- For wires dimensioning and video connection refer to the installation instruc-
tions and table on pages 146 and 149.
214
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 46MO/8
4+1
INTERCOMS
“A” “B”
CV03 CV03 “ C - D - .. ”
F F
8 8 8 8 8 8
V V X X V V X X
M M Y Y M M Y Y
F F F F
H H H H
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
*
9M 9M 9M 9M
9R 9R 9R 9R
1C 1C 1C 1C
7+1
EXHITO STUDIO EXHITO STUDIO
COMPACT COMPACT
CV03 CV03
VIDEOINTERCOMS
F F
8 8 8 8
V V X V V X
M M Y M M Y
F F
H H
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
9M 9M
9R 9R
1C 1C
X X
ECHOS ECHOS
P P
C C
Matrix Matrix
MAS11P 4 MAS11P 4
3 3
PL11P 2 PL11P 2
1 1
Profilo Profilo
A A
4 5 7 12 8 9 10 4 5 7 12 8 9 10
6 6
MD30 4 MD30 4
3 1473 3 1473
Mody 2 8a Mody 2 8a
1 9a 1 9a
2 2
1 1
7a 13 3 8b 9b 10b 7b 7a 13 3 8b 9b 10b 7b
SE SE
PA PA
230V X C+ 1 5 6 3 230V X C+ 1 5 6 3
“ C - D - .. ”
I
127V 127V
0 PRS240 1471 0 PRS240 1471
X1 F H Y2
Y1 X2
P
Y DV2D Y
X DV4D X
P
P
C
4 4
MD30
3 3
2 2
1
To communicate with your own
1
A
secondary entrance it is
necessary to remove the audio
MAs4.
M
H
F
H privacy to the videointercoms.
PL4.P V
MD41D
Y
X On bracket of the Exhito,
SE PA
Compact and Studio video
V M F H
Y X intercoms you must move
CV01
jumper J1 from position 2-3 to
1281 S F 3+ 3D 4 C+ 2 X H 5 1-2.
I IV
230V A A
1282E
On the Echos series video-
127V
0
H
intercoms (EH9160) connect
terminal X as shown in the
installation diagram.
215
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 47MO/1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY VIDEO STATIONS AND 2 MAIN COMMON VIDEO STATIONS
4+1
(multiple entrance)
INTERCOMS
INTERNAL STATIONS
... 9083 EX3160 KM8800W ... ST720W
... WA9100T/W ... WB3160 ... WB8600 ... WB7100
... TA9160 ... TA3160 ... 8083 ... WB700
*
... TA7100
7+1
... TA700
PROFILO series MATRIX series MODY series The main entrance push-button panels must
VIDEOINTERCOMS

PL40P÷PL42P MAS42-MAS43 2+X MD41 module.
... PL21÷PL228 ... MAS22-MAS24 2+X MD30
... MD20, MD50 common of buttons 1 and
VARIOUS ARTICLES 2
... DV2-DV4 Video distributors to separate the common

of buttons cut here
2+X 1281 Power supply
1+X 1282E Timer common of buttons 3 and
2xX 1273TV Exchanger 4
1 1471 Relay unit
2+X PA ** Door release button (optional) Connection of 1281E power supply-timer in-
2+X SE ** Electric door lock (12Vac-1A) stead of 1281 plus 1282E.
2 D ** 100V-1A diodes (type 1N4007)
Power supply-timer of the secondary entrance
127V
230V

0
(1) Or MA61÷MA63.
1281E
A 3+ S F 4 X H C+ 5
station which has made the call (or control switching ON) and remain in this state until Power supply-timer of the main entrance
F S H 3+ 4 X 5 C+
time.
230V
127V 1281E
Notes 0
internal devices ECHOS series. By adding 1281E to the schematics on page 217
- If the control switching ON is necessary, connect terminal 4 of the timer (dashed wire). instead of 1281 plus 1282E, the system working will
- For the connection of name plate lamps read notes 6, 7 and 8 of the installation modify as follows:
instructions on page 146. - switching-OFF at the end of the timing only.
- For other types of push-button panels see the general catalogue. Connection of two door locks, of which the
Control switching ON deactivation multiple entrance
to the video-
To deactivate the monitoring function intercoms For this option it is necessary to
during the conversation and to keep it install a diode (100V-1A; type
only when the system is in standby, it is 1N4007) between terminals 7
necessary to install a relay (type 1471 or (cathode) and 7a (anode) of every
1472) and connect it as shown on the secondary exchanger. The diode
diagram. allows to activate also the door
look of your own entrance when the
door look of the main entrance is activated. On the
contrary when the door lock of your own entrance is
DS1 is a diagram reference
activated the door look of the main entrance is not
activated.
216
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Si 47MO/1
VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY VIDEO STATIONS AND 2 MAIN COMMON VIDEO STATIONS
4+1
(multiple entrance)
INTERCOMS
“A” “B” “ C - D - .. ”
75 75
8 IN 8 IN
V OUT V OUT
M M
F F
IN IN
H H
1 1
2
DV2 2
DV2
DV4 DV4
3 3
4 4
5 5
9R xn(A) 9R Xn(B)
*
1C 1C
7+1
VIDEOINTERCOMS
8 IN 8 IN
V OUT V OUT
M M
F F
IN IN
H H
1 1
2
DV2 2
DV2
DV4 DV4
3 3
4 4
5 5
9R 9R
1C 1C
1281 3D 4 7 2D 1D 1281 3D 4 7 2D 1D
H H
I IV I IV
230V 1282E 230V 1282E
127V 127V
0 A A 3+ S F X H C+ 5 2 1 0 A A 3+ S F X H C+ 5 2 1
P Xn(A) P Xn (B)
P 1 5 7a 12 11 7 10 9 8 P 1 5 7a 12 11 7 10 9 8
C 6 C 6
4 MD30 4 4 MD30 4
3 3 2 3 3 2
2 2 12a 2 2 12a
1273TV 1273TV
1 1 11a 1 1 11a
(DS1) (DS1)
A A
MAS4. H MD41 H 10a MAS4. H MD41 H 10a

V V 9a V V 9a
PA 4 3 12b 11b 10b 9b 8b 7b PA 4 3 12b 11b 10b 9b 8b 7b
SE SE
4 5 12 11 10 9 8 7 4 5 12 11 10 9 8 7
1273TV 1273TV “ C - D - .. ”
1 1
(DS2) (DS2)
2 2
6 12a 11a 10a 7a 9a 8a 12b 11b 10b 9b 8b 7b 3 6 12a 11a 10a 7a 9a 8a 12b 11b 10b 9b 8b 7b 3
OUT1 OUT2
OUT3
F OUT4
14 476 OUT5
IN
Matrix Profilo Mody
P xn(C) xn(C) P
OUT1 OUT2
P OUT3 P
x1(C) OUT4
x1(C)
C F 3 (C) C
6 (C) OUT5
14 476
P xn(B) xn(B) P
IN
P x1(B) P
C C
P
xn(A) xn(A) P
P P
C C
4 MD30 4 4 MD30 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
A D D A
MAS4. MD41 MAS4.

H H H H
V V V V
PL4.P M M M M PL4.P
MD41
SE PA
PA SE
Matrix Profilo
1281 S H 3+ 3D 2 4 X 5 C+
Mody
I A 1 5 3 6
I IV 230V 1471
230V A A 127V
127V H 1282E
1281 0
0
D The 2 diodes in the schematic are not necessary if, instead of 1281 plus 1282E of the main entrances, 1281E power supply-timer is used (please see
relative drawing on previous page).
217
(MT11 - Gb2012)
WORKING INSTRUCTIONS TROUBLESHOOTING
4+1
Check that the connections of the system The probability of breakdown in the video-intercom The electric door lock does not function.
are carried out correctly. systems is obviously greater than in the intercom Faulty lock. The cross section of the wires indi-
Put the system in use by connecting the system. Consequently this brief troubleshooting cated in bold type is insufficient. A connecting wire
takes into consideration the most common de- to the lock has been interrupted. The 5 wire is
INTERCOMS
power supply to the mains.

By pushing a call button from the external fects. When a defect is limited to only one interrupted. Faulty timer.
push-button panel, the call is sent to the videointercom it is evident that the trouble is a short
corresponding video intercom, the system circuit to the videointercom itself, to the connecting Audio section
terminal board or to the wires that go to the riser.
is activated for about 50 seconds (100 sec-
The simplest way to test the efficiency of a No audio from both channels.
onds with 1281E power supply-timer) and videointercom is to connect it in another flat where Absence of power supply voltage between 3 and 4
the image appears on the monitor a few everything functions correctly. of the electric door speaker (6÷8Vdc). Short circuit
seconds after the call.
*
between 3 and F of the timer. The 3D wire is

By lifting the handset, the called user can Preliminary checks interrupted. Faulty timer.
speak with the external station and increases
7+1
- Check for the presence of the mains voltage

at the same time the activation time of the between terminals 230 (or 127) and 0 of the No audio from the videointercoms to the door
system (about 3 minutes) (feature not avail- power supply. station.
able for 1281E power supply-timer). - The power supply is not provided with fuses, but The 1D or 1 wire (from the timer to the door station)
VIDEOINTERCOMS
If a call to another internal station occurs in all of its outputs are protected against overload- is interrupted or has a short circuit. Absence of the
the meantime, the monitor switches OFF ing and short circuiting by temperature sensors. ground connection to terminal 4 of the electric door
and the last monitor called is activated. To reset the power supply, power must be cut speaker (amplifier). Faulty electric door speaker.
By using 1281 power supply and 1282E OFF for about one minute and can be restored
timer, the installation can be switched OFF after having eliminated the problem. No audio from the door station to the
- Check the voltage output of the power supply videointercoms.
by replacing the handset or at the end of the
(see in detail the values indicated in the power The 2D or 2 wire (from the timer to the door station)
timing; by using 1281E the installation can supply and control chapter-page 142). is interrupted or has a short circuit. Defective elec-
be switched OFF only at the end of the - Check that the cross section of the wire corre- tric door speaker (amplifier).
timing. sponds to what is indicated on page 146 and on
By making a call to a video intercom with off- the descriptions of each diagram. Audio with humming in the background (50/
hook handset, the monitors is activated with- - Check that the connection of the wire corre- 60Hz).
out hearing the ringing call. sponds to the installation diagram. The wires have been canalized together with the
If more calls occur simultaneously, a pro- cables that power AC loads. Separate the ground
tection circuit against overloading and short Problem, reason and solutions connection of the electric door speaker (amplifier)
circuiting is provided to disable the timer and of the name plate lights, or power them with an
and switch OFF the system. If provided for in Videointercoms shut OFF. Ringing tone not additional transformer (see recommendations on
the system, from any monitor it is possible to present. Control switching ON not function- page 146). Faulty power supply.
control the entrance by pressing the but- ing.
ton (control switch ON). It is not possible to Absence of main voltage. Short circuits or over- A whistle is heard at the external door station
make this control using 1281 power supply loading of the output terminals of the power supply (Larsen effect).
and/or timer. Faulty power supply. Faulty timer. The microphone hole of the external door station
together with 1282E timer during a conver-
might be clogged. Lower the volume.
sation. Vice versa using 1281E power sup-
Videointercoms shut OFF. Ringing tone not
ply-timer the control switch ON is always present. Control switch ON functioning. Radio reception on the door station.
possible. The C+ wire is interrupted. Faulty timer. The defect can occur when there is a transmitter
To operate the electric door lock release working in the proximity. Apply a capacitor from
press the button. Videointercoms turn ON. Absence of image. 0.1µF between terminals 1 and 3 of the electric door
In systems with 2 or more entrances, audio, The wire H that powers the camera is interrupted. speaker (amplifier).
video and door lock release switching be- The coaxial cable is interrupted or has a short
tween two entrances is automatic upon the circuit. The shield of the coaxial cable is inter- Intercommunicating systems
call or control switching ON. rupted. The video distributors (if present) are not
In systems with 2 or more entrances, the being powered. Faulty camera unit. During the intercommunication the door
control switch ON from the monitors inter- speaker is still connected.
Control switch ON by videointercoms does The video system is ON (privacy towards the
rupt the communication in progress, conse-
not function. outside only when the video system is in standby).
quently in multi-way systems it is advisable
Wire 4 is interrupted. Faulty timer. The system is The module for intercommunicating has not been
to interrupt during a communication the working.
switch ON function by means of a relay art. plugged in the timer art.1443E. Faulty timer.
1471 or 1472, giving the priority to the com- The system does not shut OFF by replacing
No audio in the intercommunicating service.
munication to the external door stations (see the handset.
The wall-brackets of the videointercoms have the
installation diagrams of video intercom sys- Such a defect can be due to the non-working audio
J1 jumper in position of audio privacy. Defective
tems with several entrances). section from the door station to the videointercoms
module for intercommunicating. Faulty timer.
In systems with intercommunicating service, (see related section). Faulty timer. Faulty electric
the communication between monitors and/ door speaker.
The intercommunicating calls does not work.
or intercoms is possible only when the sys- Unfocused image. Faulty timer. Check that wire 7 is connected cor-
tem is in stand-by. Dirty optics or lens. Faulty camera. rectly. Check the button connections inside the
intercoms.
Adjustments Image only slightly contrasted and/or out of
Being subject to the environmental lighting synchronism. System with more entrances
conditions, contrast and brightness can be Bad quality of coaxial cable or coaxial cable in
adjusted by means of external knobs. dispersion. Nominal impedance of coaxial cable Entrance A is never activated.
All the other adjustments can be carried out not of 75Ω. High distance system (use video Short circuit between 5 and 6 of the exchanger.
inside the monitor. For any necessary main- amplifier art.476). Check the correct connection of Faulty exchanger.
tenance intervention of a specialized tech- the coaxial cable (see pages 147 and 148).
nician is mandatory. Entrance B is never activated.
Short circuit between 3 and 4 of the exchanger.
Faulty exchanger. No power supply to 1 and 2 of the
exchanger (12Vac; 17÷21Vdc).
218
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Additional diagrams
EXTENSION OF VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM
4+1
All installation diagrams in this technical manual are drawn with only one video intercom for each user. It is possible to “personalise” the installation
by properly matching the applications on the following pages (page 222 to 229) to the basic diagrams (page 189 to page 217). Such examples
INTERCOMS
refer to applications with one video intercom entrance. To realise systems with 2 or more audio/video entrances were more than one control switch
ON is needed, use for this function the first buttons of the video intercom (P, P1, P2, etc.) and the lower ones (P3, P4, etc.) for the intercommunicating
calls.
In the basic diagrams the dashed lines identify the wires for control switch ON, whereas in the additional diagrams the dashed lines also refer to
the wires for intercommunicating service.
When the simultaneous switch ON of several video intercoms is needed and extra power supplies are to be added, do not forget that terminal IV
of timer 1282E can be connected to a maximum of 3 power supplies 1281.
*
NOTES 4) (Only Studio series)
7+1
1) To provide the intercommunicating service, 1443E Additional diagrams refer to video connection with coaxial cable.
make the dashed connections, install the mod- If the system is realized with twisted pair, it is necessary to:
ule 1443E inside timer 1282E. - connect the pair to terminals X and Y and leave terminals V and
VIDEOINTERCOMS
M unconnected;
- move the jumper J2 of bracket WB7100 from position 1-2 to 2-
2) The diode shown in this installation diagram 1282E 3.
must be connected to power video distributors - if the installation diagram includes more than 2 video intercoms
DV2 and DV4. If the system is realized with in parallel make the video connection with distributors DV..D (or
twisted pair, or if video distributors are not connect them serially cutting the 75Ω resistances R7 and R10 of
used, the diode must not be connected. bracket WB7100 and leaving them only on the last video inter-
com). R10 R7
3) If the video system is realized with coaxial cable R10 R7
connected in serial mode (input and output from JP3 JP4 JP1
1
the video intercom), you must cut the 75Ω resis- R8 Y X P 1 2 3 1 2 3 J2
V V J2
tance R8 of the bracket and leave it only on the R10 R7
JP5
M
last video intercom. 1 4
14
JP4
C JP3
F
5 R8 Y X P
V V
9M
M
R8
RL37
IV I 1281
230V
B A 127V
9P H 9R 7 9M 0
VC1 VC2 VC3
IN 8 8 8
OUT V V V
M M M
F F F CT1
IN
H H H
1 1 1 1
DV2
2 2 2 2
DV4
3 3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5 5
9M 9M 9M 9
1C 1C 1C 3A
9R 9R 9R
ST
PC PC PC 704
P P P
To terminal P of the video inter- 9 P1 P1 P1

1
coms. It is also necessary to con- C
P1
C
9
C
P2
C
P2
2
nect 1C and PC. C C C C
P2 P2 9 P3
3
C C C C
P3 P3 P3 9A
ST7100+ ST7100+ ST7100+ ST720+

WB7100+ WB7100+ WB7100+ ST701+
ST720+ ST720+ ST720+ ST704
1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281 WB700+ WB700+ WB700+
IV I ST701 ST701 ST701
1282E 230V
H 127V
C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A
0
Example of combination of an additional diagram with a basic

diagram for the realisation of a one-way system with intercoms and
video intercoms in parallel with or without intercommunicating
service (description on page 220).
P xn xn P
P x2 8 9 4 5 7 1 2 10 11 12 x2 P
P P
C 6 3 C
MA2. 4 MD1. 4 4 MD1. 4 MA2.
MA6. 3 MD2. 3 3 MD2. 3 MA6.
MA7. MD30 MD30 MA7.
2 2 12a 12b 2 2
MD7. MD7.
1 1 11a 11b 1 1
A A
H H 10a 10b H H
V V 9a 9b V V
M M 8a 8b M M
1273TV
MA4. PA 7a 7b PA MA4.
MD41 MD41
SE SE
219
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Additional diagrams
4+1
EXTENSION OF VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM
Extension of ONE-WAY system Extension in one apartment of a MULTI-WAY system

INTERCOMS
To realise a one-way system with several monitors and/or To realise a multi-way system with several video intercoms and/or intercoms in
intercoms in parallel, with or without intercommunicating parallel in one apartment with or without intercommunicating service, you
service, you must proceed as follows: must proceed as follows:
- make a photocopy of the additional diagram desired, select-
- make a photocopy of the additional diagram desired, selecting it among those
ing it among those of pages 222, 223, 224, 226 and 227;
of pages 223, 225, 228 and 229;
- place the diagram on the basic diagram so as to cover the
- place the diagram on the basic diagram so as to cover the existing video
*
existing video intercom and line up the wires of the two

intercom and line up the wires of the two diagrams;
diagrams;
7+1
- to obtain the intercommunicating service, make the connections which have

- if specified in the additional diagram, connect the wires I and
been drawn with a dashed line and move the jumper J1 of the videointercom
C (common terminal of additional buttons) to terminals IV and
bracket from position 2-3 to 1-2.
7 of art. 1282E;
VIDEOINTERCOMS
- to obtain the intercommunicating service, make the connec-

Example: by making a photocopy of the additional diagram of page 224 (2
tions which have been drawn with a dashed line, install the
videointercoms and 1 intercom in parallel with or without intercommunicating
1443E module inside timer 1282E and move the jumper J1
service), placing it on the installation diagram of page 197 (Si 42MO/1), lining it
of the videointercom bracket from position 2-3 to 1-2.
up to the wires of the first video intercom, it is possible to obtain a multi-way
Example (see page 219): by making a photocopy of the system with 2 video intercoms and 1 intercom in parallel in one apartment and
additional diagram of page 224 (2 video intercoms and 1 intercommunicating connected to 2 external video stations.
intercom in parallel with or without intercommunicating serv-
ice), placing it on the installation diagram of page 197 (Si Extension of a MULTI-WAY system in several apartments
42MO/1), lining it up to the wires of the first video intercom and
eliminating the second video intercom and the video distribu- To realise a multi-way system with several video intercoms and/or intercoms in
tor, it is possible to obtain a one-way system with 2 video parallel in 2 or more apartments with or without intercommunicating service,
intercoms and 1 intercom in parallel connected to 2 external you must repeat the operations described in the preceding section several times.
video stations.
75W
IN 8
OUT V
M
F KM8100+WB8600
IN KM8600+WB8600+8083
H KM8800+WB8600
1
DV2 2
DV4
3
4
5
xn 9M ST7100+WB7100
1C +ST720+WB700
9R
Example of combination of an addi- PC

P
tional diagram with a basic diagram

for the realisation of a multi-way sys- 2443 RL37
IV I 1281
230V
tem with extension in one apartment 127V
0 12a 13a 13 12 14 F
B A
230V
127V
9P H 9R 7 9M 0
only. PRS210
VC1 VC2
D
IN 8 8
OUT V V
M M
F F CT1
IN
H H
1 1 1
DV2 2 2 2
DV4
3 3 3
4 4
5 5 5
Xn 9M 9M 9
1C 1C 3A
9R 9R
ST
PC PC 704
P P
To terminal P of the video inter- C

9
C
9 P1
C
1
coms. It is also necessary to con- P1

C
P1
C
P2
C
2
nect 1C and PC. P2 P2 9A
ST720+
ST7100+ ST7100+ ST701+
WB7100+ WB7100+ ST704
ST720+ ST720+
WB700+ WB700+
ST701 ST701
1D 2D 3D 4 5 7 1281
IV I
1282E 230V
H 127V
C+ S X F H 1 2 3+ A A
0
P xn xn P
P x2 8 9 4 5 7 1 2 10 11 12 x2 P
P P
C 6 3 C
MA2. 4 MD1. 4 4 MD1. 4 MA2.
MA6. 3 MD2. 3 3 MD2. 3 MA6.
MA7. MD30 MD30 MA7.
2 2 12a 12b 2 2
MD7. MD7.
1 1 11a 11b 1 1
A A
H H 10a 10b H H
V V 9a 9b V V
M M 8a 8b M M
1273TV
MA4. PA 7a 7b PA MA4.
MD41 MD41
SE SE
220
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Additional diagrams
4+1
Floor call
In all the installation schematics it is possible to have a floor call with different sound from the one coming from the push button panel, by adding
a conductor to the riser connected to all the buttons of the floor calls. The other terminal of each button has to be connected to the user intercom
INTERCOMS
or videointercom.
Connection of the floor call on an installation with 1281 power Connection of the floor call on an installation with 1281E power
supply and 1282E timer. supply-timer
Compact
Compact
FP FP
FP FP 9 9R
9 9R
Floor Floor
Floor Floor
Studio push-button push-button
*
Compact
Compact Studio push-button push-button
7+1
Studio Exhito
Project Exhito
VIDEOINTERCOMS
Studio Exhito
Project Exhito
Studio
0
Studio
0
3A Echos
FP FP
3A Echos 9A CP
FP FP
9A CP ST720+ Floor Floor
Floor SM50E+ Intercom with push-button push-button
ST720+ Intercom with Floor ST704 private conver-
SM50E+ push-button push-button
sation
ST704 private conver-
sation
S2
7 F A
1281E
1282E GN30
When in the installation 1281E power supply-timer is foreseen, in order

to have a differentiated chime, add GN30 ringer generator.
Installation of 1281E power supply-timer in ONE-WAY systems with intercommunicating service
In order to have the intercommunicating service amongst intercoms and/or videointercoms with privacy towards the external station, it is necessary
to install inside 1282E timer the 1443E intercommunicating module. If the installation has to use 1281E power supply-timer it is necessary to add,
and properly connect, a 2443 relay-amplifier and a PRS240 power supply (see schematics).
Application on all one- or multi-way systems with one or more Application on all multi-way systems with main and secondary
main entrances. Schematics from page 189 to page 203. entrances. Schematics from page 205 to page 217.
7
B 7
F B
14 F
13 230V 14
12 127V 12 230V
230V
127V
127V
230V
12a 0 13 127V
0
13a 13a 0
12a
1281E 2443 PRS240 1281E

C+ S X F H 4 5 3+ A
2443 PRS240
A 3+ S F 4 X H C+ 5
221
(MT11 - Gb2012)
ONE-WAY additional diagrams
4+1
1 VIDEO INTERCOM AND 1 INTERCOM WITH INTERCOMMUNI- 2 VIDEO INTERCOMS WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING SERVICE
CATING SERVICE FOR ONE-WAY SYSTEMS FOR ONE-WAY SYSTEMS
INTERCOMS
VC1 1281
1471
230V
8 3 127V
V 2 5 6 0
M
F CT1
H VC1 VC2
*
1 1 8 8
2 2 V V
7+1
3 3 M M
4 F F
5 5 H H
9M 9 1 1
D
VIDEOINTERCOMS
P1 2 2
7 C C 3 3
9R P 1 4 4
X X 5 5
EX310 9M 9M
7 and X are terminals of EH9160+9083 9R P1
7 C C
the 1282E or PRS240 P1 9R
KM810 X X X
+ST701
EX320 7 and X are terminals of EH9160+9083 EH9160+9083
D = 100V-1A diode (type 1N4007).
the 1282E or PRS240
Notes Notes
- On the videointercoms EH9160 verify that jumper J5 is in position 2-3 (see - On the videointercoms EH9160 verify that jumper J5 is in position 2-3 (see
page 94). page 94).
- If push-button P1 of the videointercom is used for other functions, use - If pushbutton P1 of the videointercom is used for other functions, use
pushbuttons from P3 to P6 and check that jumper J6 is in position 2-3. pushbuttons from P3 to P6 and check that jumper J6 is in position 2-3.
- Read note 1 of page 219. - Read notes 1 and 3 of page 219.
2 VIDEO INTERCOMS AND 1 INTERCOM WITH INTERCOMMUNI- 2 VIDEO INTERCOMS AND 2 INTERCOMS WITH INTERCOMMU-
CATING SERVICE FOR ONE-WAY SYSTEMS NICATING SERVICE FOR ONE-WAY SYSTEMS
E 1471
1281
C 1471 1281 230V

3
127V
230V 2 5 6
3 127V 0
2 5 6 0
H VC1
8
VC2
8
VC1 VC2
V V 8 8
O M
F
H
M
F
H
CT1
V
M
F
V
M
F CT1 CT2
1 1 1 H H
S 2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
2
3
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
9M 9M 9 5 5 5 5
D 9M 9M 9A 9A
P1 P1 EX
7 C C C X X X 3A 3A 304
P2 9R P1 1 7 C C C C
9R P2 P2 9R P1 P1 P1
2
X X X C P1
P2
9R
P2
P2
9
P2
P3
C
C
P3 P3 P3 9
EX320 EX310
7 and X are termi- EH9160+9083 EH9160+9083
EH9160+9083 EH9160+9083 EX320+ EX320+
nals of the 1282E EX304+ EX304+
EX301 EX301
or PRS240
7 and X are terminals of

the 1282E or PRS240
Notes Notes
- On the videointercoms EH9160 verify that jumper J5 is in position 2-3 (see - On the videointercoms EH9160 verify that jumper J5 is in position 2-3 (see
page 94). page 94).
- If pushbutton P1 and P2 of the videointercom is used for other functions, - If pushbutton P1 and P2 of the videointercom is used for other functions,
use pushbuttons from P3 to P6 and check that jumper J6 is in position 2- use pushbuttons from P3 to P6 and check that jumper J6 is in position 2-
3. 3.
- Read notes 1 and 3 of page 219. - Read notes 1 and 3 of page 219.
222
(MT11 - Gb2012)
ONE/MULTI-WAY additional diagrams
4+1
CATING SERVICE FOR ONE-WAY SYSTEMS FOR ONE-WAY SYSTEMS
INTERCOMS
VC1
1471 1281
8 230V
3 127V
V 2 5 6 0
M
F CT1
H VC1 VC2
1 1 8 8
*
2 2 V V
3 3 M M
7+1
4 F F
5 5 H H
9M 9 1 1
D 2 2
P
VIDEOINTERCOMS
7 PC C 3 3
9R P 1 4 4
to terminal 7 of 5 5
1282E or PRS240 9M 9M
9R P
KM8100+WB8600 KM810+ 7 PC PC
KM8600+WB8600+8083 ST701 P 9R
to terminal 7 of
KM8800+WB8600
1282E or PRS240
KM8100+WB8600
D = 100V-1A diode (type 1N4007). KM8600+WB8600+8083
KM8800+WB8600
Notes Notes
- On the videointercom bracket to move the jumper J1 from position 2-3 to - On the videointercom bracket to move the jumper J1 from position 2-3 to
1-2 (see page 100) for the intercommunicating service. 1-2 (see page 100) for the intercommunicating service.
CATING SERVICE FOR MULTI-WAY SYSTEMS FOR MULTI-WAY SYSTEMS
RL37
C
230V
127V
0 12a 13a 13 12 14 F 2443
GN30 S2
230V
127V
0
230V
127V
0
2443
12a 13a 13 12 14 F 9P H 9R
IV
7 9M
A
I
230V
127V
O
0
PRS210 PRS210 PRS210 1281

M
VC1 VC2
P
VC1 D
D
8 8
8
V V
V M M
M F F
A
F CT1
H H
H 1 1
1 1 2 2
2 2 3 3
C
3 3 4 4
4 5 5
5 5 Xn 9M 9M
Xn 9M 9 9R P
D PC PC
P
PC
9R
C
P 1
P 9R
T
KM8100+WB8600
KM8100+WB8600 KM8600+WB8600+8083
KM8600+WB8600+8083 KM8800+WB8600
KM8800+WB8600 KM810+
ST701

Notes Notes
223
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1
INTERCOMS
CATING SERVICE
VC1 VC1 VC2
8 8 8
V V V
M M M
F CT1 F F
H H
*
H
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
7+1
3 3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5 5
VIDEOINTERCOMS
9M 9 9M 9M
D
P1 7 1C 1C
7 C C 9R P1
9R P 1 P1 9R
7 is a terminal of the
EX310 1282E or PRS240
EX3160+WB3160 EX3160+WB3160 EX3160+WB3160
7 is a terminal of the
1282E or PRS240
EX320
Notes Notes
1 VIDEO INTERCOM AND 2 INTERCOMS WITH INTERCOMMU- 2 VIDEO INTERCOMS AND 1 INTERCOM WITH INTERCOMMUNI-
NICATING SERVICE CATING SERVICE
VC1 VC1 VC2
E 8
V
8
V
8
V
X M
F
H
CT1 CT2
M
F
H
M
F
H
CT1
1 1 1 1 1 1
H 2
3
4
2
3
2
3
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
I
5 5 5 5 5 5
9M 9A 9A EX 9M 9M 9A EX
3A 3A 304 3A 304
7 1C C C 7 1C 1C C
T 9R
P1
P2
P1
9R
P2
P1
P2
9
1
2
9R
P1
P2
P1
9R
P2
P1
P2
9
1
2
O EX3160+
WB3160
EX320+
EX304+
EX310+
EX304+
EX320+
EX304+
EX310+
EX304+
EX3160+
WB3160
EX3160+
WB3160
EX320+
EX304+
Ex310+
EX304+
EX301 EX301 EX301 EX301 EX301 EX301
7 is a terminal 7 is a terminal
of the 1282E or of the 1282E or
PRS240 PRS240
Notes Notes
224
(MT11 - Gb2012)
MULTI-WAY additional diagrams
4+1
INTERCOMS
CATING SERVICE
RL37
2443 IV I
2443 230V
230V 230V 127V 230V
127V 127V A 127V
0 12a 13a 13 12 14 F
0 GN30 S2 0 9P H 9R 7 9M 0
12a 13a 13 12 14 F
PRS210 1281
PRS210 PRS210
*
D VC1 VC2
D VC1
8 8
7+1
8 V V
V M M
M F F
F CT1 H H
H 1 1
1 1 2 2
VIDEOINTERCOMS
2 2 3 3
3 4 4
4
3
7 5 5
Xn 9M 9M
5 5
1C 1C
Xn 9M 9A EX 9R P1
3A 304
P1 9R
1C C
9R P1 1
EX3160+WB3160 EX3160+WB3160
P1 9
EX3160+ EX320+ EX310+

WB3160 EX304 EX304
D = 100V-1A diode (type 1N4007). D = 100V-1A diode (type 1N4007).
Notes Notes
1 VIDEO INTERCOM AND 2 INTERCOMS WITH INTERCOMMU- 2 VIDEO INTERCOMS AND 1 INTERCOM WITH INTERCOMMUNI-
230V
127V
2443
230V
127V
230V
127V
2443
RL37
IV
A
I
230V
127V
E
0 12a 13a 13 12 14 F
X
9P H 9R 7 9M 0
0 GN30 S2 0
12a 13a 13 12 14 F
PRS210 1281
PRS210 PRS210
D VC1 VC2
D VC1
8
V
M
M
8
V
F
M
8
V
F CT1
H
CT1 CT2 H H
I
F
1 1 1
H
2 2 2
1 1 1
3 3 3
2 2 2
4 4
3 3 3
5 5 5
T
4 Xn 9M 9M 9A EX
5 5 5 3A 304
Xn 9M 9A 9A EX 1C 1C C
3A 3A 304 9R P1 1
P1
1C C C P1 9R P2 2
9R P1 P1 1
O
P2 P2 9
P1 9R P2 2
P2 P2 9 EX3160+WB3160 EX3160+WB3160 EX320+ EX310+
EX304+ EX304+
EX3160+ EX320+ EX310+ EX320+ EX310+ EX301 EX301
WB3160 EX304+ EX304+ EX304+ EX304+
EX301 EX301 EX301 EX301
D = 100V-1A diode (type 1N4007). D = 100V-1A diode (type 1N4007).
Notes Notes
225
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1
INTERCOMS
CATING SERVICE
VC1 VC1 VC2
8 8 8
V V V
M M M
F CT1
F F
H H H
1 1 1 1
*
2 2
2 2
3 3
3 3
4
7+1
4 4
5 5
5 5
9M 9
9M 9M
1C 3A ST
9R P1 704 1C 1C
VIDEOINTERCOMS
PC C 9R P
1 PC PC
P 9A
to terminal 7 of P 9R
the 1282E or to terminal 7 of
PRS240 the 1282E or
ST720+ PRS240
ST701+
ST704
ST7100+
WB7100+ ST7100+ ST7100+
ST720+ WB7100+ WB7100+
WB700+ ST720+ ST720+
ST701 WB700+ WB700+
Notes Notes
- Read notes 1 and 4 of page 219. - Read notes 1, 3 and 4 of page 219.
1 VIDEO INTERCOM AND 2 INTERCOMS WITH INTERCOMMU- 2 VIDEO INTERCOMS AND 1 INTERCOM WITH INTERCOMMU-
NICATING SERVICE NICATING SERVICE
VC1 VC1 VC2
8 8 8
V
S
V V
M M M
F CT1 CT2 CT1
F F
H H H
T
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4
U 5
9M
1C
5
9
3A
5
9
3A
5
9M
1C
5
9M
1C
5
9
3A
9R 9R 9R
D
ST ST
PC 704 PC PC 704
P P P
9 P1 P1 9 P1 P1
1
I to terminal 7 of
C
P1
C
C
9A
C
C
P2
C
2
to terminal 7 of
C
P1
C
C
C
9
C
P2
C
1
the 1282E or P2 P2 9A
the 1282E or P2 P2 9A
O PRS240 PRS240
ST720+ ST720+
ST701+ ST701+ ST720+
ST704 ST704 ST701+
ST7100+ ST7100+ ST7100+ ST704
WB7100+ WB7100+ WB7100+
ST720+ ST720+ ST720+
WB700+ WB700+ WB700+
ST701 ST701 ST701
Notes Notes
226
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1
3 VIDEO INTERCOMS WITH INTERCOMMU- 1 VIDEO INTERCOM AND 3 INTERCOMS WITH INTERCOMMUNI-
INTERCOMS
RL37
I PRS210
1281 IV
to terminal IV A
230V
B
230V
127V 127V
of the 1282E 0 9P H 9R 7 9M 0
VC1 VC2 VC3 VC1
*
8 8 8 8
V V V V
M M M M
7+1
F CT1 CT2 CT3
F F F
H H H H
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
2 2 2
3 3 3 3
3 3 3
4
VIDEOINTERCOMS
4 4 4
5 5 5 5
5 5 5
9M 9 9 9
9M 9M 9M 1C 3A 3A 3A
1C 1C 1C 9R
9R 9R 9R ST
PC 704
PC PC PC P
P P P
9 P1 P1 P1
1
9 P1 P1 C C C C
C C C P1 9A P2 P2
2
P1 9 P2 C C C C
to terminal 7 of C C C P2 P2 9A P3
3
P2 P2 9 C C C C
the 1282E or P3 P3 P3 9A
PRS240
ST7100+ ST720+ ST720+ ST720+

ST7100+ ST7100+ ST7100+ ST701+ ST701+ ST701+
WB7100+ WB7100+ WB7100+ WB7100+
ST720+ ST704 ST704 ST704
ST720+ ST720+ ST720+
WB700+ WB700+ WB700+ WB700+
ST701 ST701 ST701 ST701
Notes Notes
- Read notes 1, 3 and 4 of page 219. - Read notes 1 and 4 of page 219.
4 VIDEO INTERCOMS WITH INTERCOMMU- RL37

NICATING SERVICE IV I 1281
B
9P H 9R 7 9M
A
230V
127V
0
S
VC1 VC2 VC3 VC4
T
8
V
8
V
8
V
8
V
U
M
F
H
M
F
H
M
F
H
M
F
H
D
1 1 1 1
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
I
5
9M
1C
5
9M
1C
5
9M
1C
5
9M
1C
O
9R 9R 9R 9R
PC PC PC PC
P P P P
9 P1 P1 P1
C C C C
P1 9 P2 P2
C C C C
P2 P2 9 P3
C C C C
P3 P3 P3 9
ST7100+ ST7100+ ST7100+ ST7100+

WB7100+ WB7100+ WB7100+ WB7100+
ST720+ ST720+ ST720+ ST720+
WB700+ WB700+ WB700+ WB700+
ST701 ST701 ST701 ST701
Notes
- On the videointercom bracket to move the jumper J1 from position 2-3 to
1-2 (see page 107) for the intercommunicating service.
- Read notes 1, 3 and 4 of page 219.
227
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1
INTERCOMS
CATING SERVICE
230V 230V
127V 127V
230V 230V 0 GN30 S2 0
12a 13a 13 12 14 F 2443
127V 127V
0 GN30 S2 0 PRS210 PRS210
12a 13a 13 12 14 F 2443
PRS210 PRS210
VC1 VC2
D
VC1
*
8 8
D V V
8 M M
V F F
7+1
M H H
F CT1
1 1
H 2 2
1 1 3 3
2 2 4 4
3 3 5 5
VIDEOINTERCOMS
4 Xn 9M 9M
5 5 1C 1C
Xn 9M 9 9R P
1C 3A ST PC PC
9R P1 704 P 9R
PC C
1
P 9A

ST7100+ ST7100+
WB7100+ WB7100+
ST7100+ ST720+ ST720+ ST720+
WB7100+ ST701+ WB700+ WB700+
ST720+ ST704
WB700+
Notes Notes
1 VIDEO INTERCOM AND 2 INTERCOMS WITH INTERCOMMUNI- 2 VIDEO INTERCOMS AND 1 INTERCOM WITH INTERCOMMUNI-
CATING SERVICE CATING SERVICE
2443 RL37 2443 RL37
S IV PRS210 IV I 1281
230V 230V
127V 230V 127V 230V
B B A
0 127V 0 127V
12a 13a 13 12 14 F 9P H 9R 7 9M 12a 13a 13 12 14 F 9P H 9R 7 9M
0 0
PRS210
T
PRS210
VC1 VC1 VC2

D D
8 8 8
U
V V V
M M M
F CT1 CT2 F F CT1
H H H
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
D Xn
3
4
5
9M
3
5
9
3
5
9 Xn
3
4
5
9M
3
4
5
9M
3
5
9
1C 3A 3A 1C 1C 3A
I 9R
PC
P
9 P1 P1
ST
704
9R
PC
P
9
9R
PC
P
P1 P1
ST
704
D = 100V-1A diode C C C
1
D = 100V-1A diode C C C
1
O (type 1N4007).
P1
C
P2
9A
C
P2
P2
C
9A
2
(type 1N4007).
P1
C
P2
C
9
P2
P2
C
9A
2
ST720+ ST720+ ST720+

ST7100+ ST701+ ST701+ ST7100+ ST7100+ ST701+
WB7100+ ST704 ST704 WB7100+ WB7100+ ST704
ST720+ ST720+ ST720+
WB700+ WB700+ WB700+
ST701 ST701 ST701
Notes Notes
228
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1
3 VIDEO INTERCOMS WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING SERV- 3 VIDEO INTERCOMS AND 1 INTERCOM WITH INTERCOMMUNI-
INTERCOMS
ICE CATING SERVICE
2443 RL37 2443 RL37

IV I 1281 IV I 1281
230V 230V
127V 230V 127V 230V
B A B A
0 127V 0 127V
12a 13a 13 12 14 F 9P H 9R 7 9M 12a 13a 13 12 14 F 9P H 9R 7 9M
0 0
PRS210 PRS210
VC1 VC2 VC3 VC1 VC2 VC3

D D
8 8 8 8 8 8
*
V V V V V V
M M M M M M
F F F CT1
F F F
H H H H H H
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
7+1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Xn 9M 9M 9M Xn 9M 9M 9M 9A ST
1C 1C 1C 3A 704
1C 1C 1C
9R 9R 9R 9R 9R 9R
PC PC PC
VIDEOINTERCOMS
PC PC PC
P P P P P P
9 P1 P1 9 P1 P1 P1
1
D = 100V-1A diode C
P1
C
9
C
P2 D = 100V-1A diode
C
P1
C
9
C
P2
C
P2
2
C C C C
(type 1N4007). C
P2
C
P2
C
9 (type 1N4007). P2
C
P2
C
9
C
P3
C
3
P3 P3 P3 9
ST7100+ ST7100+ ST7100+

WB7100+ WB7100+ WB7100+
ST720+ ST720+ ST7100+ ST7100+ ST7100+ ST720W+
ST720+ ST701+
WB700+ WB700+ WB700+ WB7100+ WB7100+ WB7100+
ST701 ST701 ST720+ ST720+ ST720+ ST704
ST701
WB700+ WB700+ WB700+
ST701 ST701 ST701
Notes Notes
- On the videointercom bracket to move the jumper J1 from position 2- - On the videointercom bracket to move the jumper J1 from position 2-
3 to 1-2 (see page 107) for the intercommunicating service. 3 to 1-2 (see page 107) for the intercommunicating service.
- Read notes 2, 3 and 4 of page 219. - Read notes 2, 3 and 4 of page 219.
4 VIDEO INTERCOMS WITH INTERCOMMUNICATING SERVICE
2443 RL37
IV I
230V
127V
0 12a 13a 13 12 14 F
B A
1281
230V
127V
S
9P H 9R 7 9M 0
PRS210 T
VC1 VC2 VC3 VC4
D
8 8 8 8
U
V V V V
M
F
H
M
F
H
M
F
H
M
F
H
D
1 1 1 1
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
I
O
5 5 5 5
Xn 9M 9M 9M 9M
1C 1C 1C 1C
9R 9R 9R 9R
PC PC PC PC
P P P P
D = 100V-1A diode (type 1N4007). 9 P1 P1 P1
C C C C
P1 9 P2 P2
C C C C
P2 P2 9 P3
C C C C
P3 P3 P3 9
ST7100+ ST7100+ ST7100+ ST7100+

WB7100+ WB7100+ WB7100+ WB7100+
ST720+ ST720+ ST720+ ST720+
WB700+ WB700+ WB700+ WB700+
Notes ST701 ST701 ST701 ST701
- On the videointercom bracket to move the jumper J1 from position 2-

3 to 1-2 (see page 107) for the intercommunicating service.
- Read notes 2, 3 and 4 of page 219.
229
(MT11 - Gb2012)
PRODUCT LIST Reduced wires technology
List of article that can be used in electronic call systems with page reference.
4+1
Article Description Page ref. Article Description Page ref.

INTERCOMS
241D Module with diodes for 2 users. Mody series 40 MD74 Back box with frames for 4 modules. Mody series 38
241DMA Module with diodes for 4 users. Matrix series 24-33 MD81 Hood cover for 1 module. Mody series 38
1181E Timed power supply 47 MD82 Hood cover for 2 modules. Mody series 38
1443ED Intercommunicating module 48 MD83 Hood cover for 3 modules. Mody series 38
1471 1-contact relay unit 49 MD84 Hood cover for 4 modules (2 frames with 2 modules) 38
1471E 1-contact relay unit 49 MD804 Hood cover for 4 modules (1 frame with 4 modules) 38
1472 2-contact relay unit 49 MD86 Hood cover for 6 modules (2 frames with 3 modules) 38
1473 4-contact exchanger 48 MD808 Hood cover for 8 modules (2 frames with 4 modules) 38
*
9083 Back-box for Echos videointercoms 5 MD89 Hood cover for 9 modules (3 frames with 3 modules) 38
AG20 Blank module for Agorà series 16 MD812 Hood cover for 12 modules (3 frames with 4 modules) 38
7+1
AG21 Single button module for Agorà series 16 MD91 Rain shelter for 1 module. Mody series 38
AG222 Double button unit for Agorà series 16 MD92 Rain shelter for 2 modules. Mody series 38
AG30ED Door speaker for Agorà series 16 MD93 Rain shelter for 3 modules. Mody series 38
VIDEOINTERCOMS
AG40CED Colour camera and door speaker for Agorà series 16 MD94 Rain shelter for 4 modules (2 frames with 2 modules) 38
AG100A Intercom door station for Agorà series 16 MD904 Rain shelter for 4 modules (1 frame with 4 modules) 38
AG100T Door station additional buttons for Agorà series 16 MD96 Rain shelter for 6 modules (2 frames with 3 modules) 38
AG100V Videointercom door station for Agorà series 16 MD908 Rain shelter for 8 modules (2 frames with 4 modules) 38
DV2D 2-output video distributor 51 MD99 Rain shelter for 9 modules (3 frames with 3 modules) 38
DV4D 4-output video distributor 51 MD912 Rain shelter for 12 modules (3 frames with 4 modules) 38
EH9161CT Hands-free colour videointercom for Echos series 4 MD222 Button module with 2 push-buttons, 2 row. Mody series 39
EH9161CW Hands-free colour videointercom for Echos series 4 MD224 Button module with 4 push-buttons, 2 row. Mody series 39
EX301 Single button module for Exhito intercoms 11-12 MD226 Button module with 6 push-buttons, 2 row. Mody series 39
EX304 Additional loudspeaker for Exhito intercoms 13 MD228 Button module with 8 push-buttons, 2 row. Mody series 39
EX311 Intercom with 2 expandable button to 3. Exhito series 11 PL10PED Module with door speaker, without buttons. Profilo series 23
EX321 Extendable intercom Exhito series 12 PL11PED Module with door speaker, with 1 button. Profilo series 23
EX332 3 Led module for EX321 intercom 13 PL12PED Module with door speaker, with 2 buttons. Profilo series 23
EX3100C Colour LCD videointercom with 3 buttons. Exhito series 9 PL20 Blank module Profilo series 23
EX3160 Flat videointercom. Exhito series 9 PL21 Module without door speaker, with 1 button. Profilo series 23
EX3160C Colour LCD videointercom. Exhito series 9 PL22 Module without door speaker and with 2 buttons. Profilo s. 23
FC52MAS Access control keypad. Matrix series 33 PL23 Module without door speaker and with 3 buttons. Profilo s. 23
FC52P Access control keypad. Mody series 39 PL24 Module without door speaker and with 4 buttons. Profilo s. 23
FC52PL Access control keypad. Profilo series 25 PL40PED Camera module, door speaker, without buttons. Profilo s. 24
FP52 Proximity reader for access control. Mody series 39 PL40PCED Colour camera module, speaker, without buttons. Profilo 24
FP52PL Proximity reader for access control. Profilo series 25 PL41PED Camera module, door speaker, 1 button. Profilo series 24
KM811W Intercom with 1 expandable button to 2. Compact series 15 PL41PCED Colour camera module, door speaker, 1 button. Profilo 24
KM8111CW Colour LCD videointercom. Compact series 14 PL42PED Camera module, door speaker, 2 buttons. Profilo series 24
KM8111W White Flat videointercom Compact series 14 PL42PCED Colour camera module, door speaker, 2 buttons. Profilo 24
MAS10PED Module with door speaker, without buttons. Matrix series 32 PL50 Information number module. Profilo series 23
MAS11PED Module with door speaker and with 1 button. Matrix series 32 PL71 Back box with frames for 1 module. Profilo series 22
MAS12PED Module with door speaker and with 2 buttons. Matrix series 32 PL72 Back box with frames for 2 modules. Profilo series 22
MAS20 Blank module Matrix series 33 PL73 Back box with frames for 3 modules. Profilo series 22
MAS22 Module without door speaker, with 2 buttons. Matrix series 33 PL81 Hood cover for 1 module. Profilo series 22
MAS24 Module without door speaker, with 4 buttons. Matrix series 33 PL82 Hood cover for 2 modules. Profilo series 22
MAS43CED Colour camera module, door speaker and 1 button. Matrix 32 PL83 Hood cover for 3 modules. Profilo series 22
MAS43ED Camera module with door speaker and 1 button. Matrix s. 32 PL84 Hood cover for 4 modules. Profilo series 22
MA61 Front frame for 1 module. Matrix series 31 PL86 Hood cover for 6 modules. Profilo series 22
MAS61 Front frame for 1 module. Matrix series 31 PL89 Hood cover for 9 modules. Profilo series 22
MA62 Front frame for 2 modules. Matrix series 31 PL91 Rain shelter for 1 module. Profilo series 22
MAS62 Front frame for 2 modules. Matrix series 31 PL92 Rain shelter for 2 modules. Profilo series 22
MA63 Front frame for 3 modules. Matrix series 31 PL93 Rain shelter for 3 modules. Profilo series 22
MAS63 Front frame for 3 modules. Matrix series 31 PL94 Rain shelter for 4 modules. Profilo series 22
MA71 Back box with frames for 1 module. Matrix series 31 PL96 Rain shelter for 6 modules. Profilo series 22
MA72 Back box with frames for 2 modules. Matrix series 31 PL99 Rain shelter for 9 modules. Profilo series 22
MA73 Back box with frames for 3 modules. Matrix series 31 PL226 Module with 6 buttons, 2 row, Profilo series 23
MA91 Rain shelter with frames for 1 module. Matrix series 31 PL228 Module with 8 buttons, 2 row, Profilo series 23
MA92 Rain shelter with frames for 2 modules. Matrix series 31 PRS210 Transformer 13Vac - 15VA 47
MA93 Rain shelter with frames for 3 modules. Matrix series 31 PRS210ED Transformer with electronic ringing 13Vac - 15VA 47
MD10ED Module with speaker and without buttons. Mody series 40 PT511EW White intercom with 1 push-button. Project series 15
MD11ED Module with speaker and with 1 button. Mody series 40 RL36 Relay module for intercoms 13
MD12ED Module with speaker and with 2 buttons. Mody series 40 RL37D Supplementary call module 47
MD20 Blank module. Mody series 39 SM50 Private conversation module for intercoms 13
MD21 Button module with 1 push-button. Mody series 39 SR41 Electronic buzzer module for intercoms 13
MD22 Button module with 2 push-buttons. Mody series 39 ST703 Ringing volume adjustment for Exhito intercom 13
MD23 Button module with 3 push-buttons. Mody series 39 TA320 Desk adapter for intercom. Exhito series 12
MD24 Button module with 4 push-buttons. Mody series 39 TA3160 Desk adapter for videointercom. Exhito series 10
MD41D Camera module Mody series 39 TA9160 Desk adapter for videointercom. Echos series 6
MD50 Information number module. Mody series 39 WA9100T Wall adaptor for the EH9161CT videointercom 6
MD71 Back box with frames for 1 module. Mody series 38 WA9100W Wall adaptor for the EH9161CW videointercom 6
MD72 Back box with frames for 2 modules. Mody series 38 WB3161 Wall bracket for videointercoms. Project series 9
MD73 Back box with frames for 3 modules. Mody series 38 WB8111 Wall bracket for videointercoms. Compact series 14
230
(MT11 - Gb2012)
PRODUCT LIST Traditional system
List of article that can be used in electronic call systems with page reference.
4+1
Article Description Page ref. Article Description Page ref.
INTERCOMS
337C Electric door-speaker for ErreP/R push-button panel 140 MD23 Button module with 3 push-buttons. Mody series 130
476 5-output video distributor 148 MD24 Button module with 4 push-buttons. Mody series 130
1273TV 7-contact exchanger 143 MD30 Electric door speaker. Mody series 130
1281 Video power supply 142 MD41 Camera module. Mody series 131
1281E Power supply-timer 142 MD41C Colour camera module. Mody series 131
1282E Audio-video timer 142 MD41D Camera module. Mody series 131
1304 Video intercom cable with 10 wires + coaxial 186 MD50 Number module. Mody series 130
1443E Intercommunicating module 143 MD71 Back box with frames for 1 module. Mody series 129
*
1471 Relay unit 145 MD72 Back box with frames for 2 modules. Mody series 129
1471E Relay unit 145 MD73 Back box with frames for 2 modules. Mody series 129
7+1
1472 2-contact relay unit 145 MD74 Back box with frames for 2 modules. Mody series 129
1473 4-contact exchanger 143 MD81 Hood cover for 1 module. Mody series 129
2443 Audio-relay amplifier 144 MD82 Hood cover for 2 modules. Mody series 129
VIDEOINTERCOMS
8083 Back-box for KM8600W videointercoms 100 MD83 Hood cover for 3 modules. Mody series 129
9083 Back-box for Echos videointercoms 94 MD84 Hood cover for 4 modules (2 frames with 2 modules) 129
CV01 Video signal converter 150 MD804 Hood cover for 4 modules (1 frame with 4 modules) 129
DV2 2-output video distributor 147 MD86 Hood cover for 6 modules (2 frames with 3 modules) 129
DV2D 2-output video distributor 149 MD808 Hood cover for 8 modules (2 frames with 4 modules) 129
DV4 4-output video distributor 147 MD89 Hood cover for 9 modules (3 frames with 3 modules) 129
DV4D 4-output video distributor 149 MD812 Hood cover for 12 modules (3 frames with 4 modules) 129
EH9100CW Hands-free colour videointercom for Echos series 94 MD91 Rain shelter for 1 module. Mody series 129
EH9160CT Hands-free colour videointercom for Echos series 94 MD92 Rain shelter for 2 modules. Mody series 129
EH9160CW Hands-free colour videointercom for Echos series 94 MD93 Rain shelter for 3 modules. Mody series 129
EX301 Single button module for Exhito intercoms 98 MD94 Rain shelter for 4 modules (2 frames with 2 modules) 129
EX304 Additional loudspeaker for Exhito intercoms 98 MD904 Rain shelter for 4 modules (1 frame with 4 modules) 129
EX310 Intercom with 2 expandable button to 3. Exhito series 98 MD96 Rain shelter for 6 modules (2 frames with 3 modules) 129
EX320 Extendable intercom Exhito series 99 MD908 Rain shelter for 8 modules (2 frames with 4 modules) 129
EX332 3 Led module for EX320 intercom 99 MD99 Rain shelter for 9 modules (3 frames with 3 modules) 129
EX3100C Colour LCD videointercom with 3 buttons. Exhito series 97 MD912 Rain shelter for 12 modules (3 frames with 4 modules) 129
EX3160 Flat videointercom. Exhito series 97 MD100 Amplified door station with 1 push-button. Mody series 132
EX3160C Colour LCD videointercom. Exhito series 97 MD122 Module for door speaker with 2 push-buttons, 2 row 130
FC52MAS Access control keypad. Matrix series 124 MD124 Module for door speaker with 4 push-buttons, 2 row 130
FC52P Access control keypad. Mody series 132 MD200 Amplified door station with 2 push-buttons. Mody series 132
FC52PL Access control keypad. Profilo series 116 MD222 Button module with 2 push-buttons, 2 row. Mody series 130
FP52 Proximity reader for access control. Mody series 132 MD224 Button module with 4 push-buttons, 2 row. Mody series 130
FP52PL Proximity reader for access control. Profilo series 116 MD226 Button module with 6 push-buttons, 2 row. Mody series 130
GN30 Electronic ringing generator with 3 different sounds 144 MD228 Button module with 8 push-buttons, 2 row. Mody series 130
KM810W Intercom with 1 expandable button to 2. Compact series 102 PL10P Module with door speaker and without buttons. Profilo series 114
KM8100CW Colour LCD videointercom. Compact series 100 PL11P Module with door speaker and with 1 button. Profilo series 114
KM8100W White Flat videointercom Compact series 100 PL12P Module with door speaker and with 2 buttons. Profilo series 114
KM8600W White videointercom Compact series 100 PL20 Blank module Profilo series 114
KM8800W White Reflex videointercom Compact series 100 PL21 Module without door speaker and with 1 button. Profilo series114
MAS10P Module with door speaker, without buttons. Matrix series 123 PL22 Module without door speaker and with 2 buttons. Profilo s. 114
MAS11P Module with door speaker and with 1 button. Matrix series 123 PL23 Module without door speaker and with 3 buttons. Profilo s. 114
MAS12P Module with door speaker and with 2 buttons. Matrix series 123 PL24 Module without door speaker and with 4 buttons. Profilo s. 114
MAS20 Blank module Matrix series 122 PL40P Camera module with door speaker, without buttons. Profilo 115
MAS22 Module without door speaker, with 2 buttons. Matrix series 122 PL40PC Colour camera module with speaker, without buttons. Profilo 115
MAS24 Module without door speaker, with 4 buttons. Matrix series 122 PL41P Camera module with door speaker and 1 button. Profilo s. 115
MAS42 Camera module with speaker without buttons. Matrix 123 PL41PC Colour camera module with speaker and 1 button. Profilo s. 115
MAS42C Colour camera module with speaker without buttons. Matrix 123 PL42P Colour camera module with speaker and 2 buttons. Profilo s.115
MAS43 Camera module with door speaker and 1 button. Matrix s. 123 PL42PC Camera module with door speaker and 2 buttons. Profilo s. 115
MAS43C Colour camera module, door speaker and 1 button. Matrix 123 PL50 Number module. Profilo series 114
MA61 Front frame for 1 module. Matrix series 122 PL71 Back box with frames for 1 module. Profilo series 113
MAS61 Front frame for 1 module. Matrix series 122 PL72 Back box with frames for 2 modules. Profilo series 113
MA62 Front frame for 2 modules. Matrix series 122 PL73 Back box with frames for 3 modules. Profilo series 113
MAS62 Front frame for 2 modules. Matrix series 122 PL81 Hood cover for 1 module. Profilo series 113
MA63 Front frame for 3 modules. Matrix series 122 PL82 Hood cover for 2 modules. Profilo series 113
MAS63 Front frame for 3 modules. Matrix series 122 PL83 Hood cover for 3 modules. Profilo series 113
MA71 Back box with frames for 1 module. Matrix series 122 PL84 Hood cover for 4 modules. Profilo series 113
MA72 Back box with frames for 2 modules. Matrix series 122 PL86 Hood cover for 6 modules. Profilo series 113
MA73 Back box with frames for 3 modules. Matrix series 122 PL89 Hood cover for 9 modules. Profilo series 113
MA91 Rain shelter with frames for 1 module. Matrix series 122 PL91 Rain shelter for 1 module. Profilo series 113
MA92 Rain shelter with frames for 2 modules. Matrix series 122 PL92 Rain shelter for 2 modules. Profilo series 113
MA93 Rain shelter with frames for 3 modules. Matrix series 122 PL93 Rain shelter for 3 modules. Profilo series 113
MD10 Module for door speaker without push-buttons. Mody series 130 PL94 Rain shelter for 4 modules. Profilo series 113
MD11 Module for door speaker with 1 push-button. Mody series 130 PL96 Rain shelter for 6 modules. Profilo series 113
MD12 Module for door speaker with 2 push-buttons. Mody series 130 PL99 Rain shelter for 9 modules. Profilo series 113
MD20 Blank module. Mody series 130 PL122P Module door speaker with 2 push-buttons, 2 row. Profilo 114
MD21 Button module with 1 push-button. Mody series 130 PL124P Module door speaker with 4 push-buttons, 2 row. Profilo 114
MD22 Button module with 2 push-buttons. Mody series 130 PL226 Module with 6 buttons, 2 row. Profilo series. 114
231
(MT11 - Gb2012)
4+1
Article Description Page ref.

INTERCOMS
PL228 Module with 8 buttons, 2 row. Profilo series. 114

PRS210 Transformer 13Vac - 15VA 141
PRS220 Intercom power supply 6Vdc/13Vac - 15VA 141
PRS226E Power supply-switcher for intercommunicating 18VA 141
PRS240 Power supply with electronic ringing 7Vdc/13Vac - 18VA 141
PT510EW White intercom Project series 102
RL36 Relay module for intercoms 99
RL37 Relay module 144
*
R8÷R14 Push-button panels. ErreP/R series 140

RP1÷RP12 Push-button panels. ErreP/R series 140
7+1
RP100 Amplified door station with 1 push-button 140

RP200 Amplified door station with 2 push-buttons 140
SM50E Private conversation module for intercoms 106
VIDEOINTERCOMS
SR41 Electronic buzzer module for intercoms 106

ST701 Single button module for intercom Studio and Compact 104
series 104
ST702W LED module for intercom Studio series 99
ST703 Ringing volume adjustment for Studio intercom 105
ST704 Additional loudspeaker for Studio intercom 105
ST715 Switch module for intercom Studio series 105
ST716 Switch module with LED for intercom Studio series 104
ST720W White extendable intercom Studio series 107
ST7100CW Colour Flat monitor Studio series. White colour 107
ST7100W White Flat monitor Studio series 99
TA320 Desk adapter for EX320 intercom 97
TA3160 Desk adapter for Exhito videointercoms 108
TA700W Desk adapter for Studio intercoms 106
TA720W Desk adapter for ST720W intercom Studio series 108
TA7100W Desk adapter for Studio monitors 94
TA9160 Desk adapter for Echos videointercoms 139
UP11 Amplified door station with 1 button, flush mounted UP series139
UP12 Amplified door station with 2 buttons, flush mounted UP series 139
UP100 Amplified door station with 1 button, surface mounted UP s. 139
UP200 Amplified door station with 1 button, surface mounted UP s. 94
WA9100T Wall adaptor for the EH9160CT videointercom 94
WA9100W Wall adaptor for the EH9160CW videointercom 97
WB3160 Wall bracket for Exhito videointercoms 108
WB700 Wall bracket for Studio intercoms 107
WB7100 Wall bracket for Studio monitors 100
WB8600 Wall bracket for videointercoms Compact series
232
(MT11 - Gb2012)
Due to continuous technological evolution ACI FARFISA reserves the right to modify the products, technical specifications and installation diagrams contained in this
manual at any time without prior notice.
The diagrams and information contained in this manual have been carefully verified and are to be considered as reliable. However, ACI FARFISA is not responsible for
any errors, inaccuracies or infringements to patents and third-party rights that may arise from using this manual.

Electronic Call Systems

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Electronic Call Systems

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

9 8 7 5 3

Before connecting the unit, make sure its data correspond to

The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.

For correct operation make sure that ventilation or heat dissipa-

Do not open or tamper with power supply or video intercom

Avoid bumping and hitting the video intercom apparatus, it

For installation or maintenance refer only to qualified person-

Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC89/336 and Telecommunication Terminals 00

Italian Association of Electrotechnical and

Intercom/videointercom systems with reduced wires technology 3

Traditional intercoms and videointercoms 93

Product List 230

Graphic symbols VIDEO-

Speaker Electric door lock Internal stations

External door stations 16

VIDEOINTERCOMS How to select the function for buttons from 1 to 6

least only two of the three possible different operations described

8 3/16” 1” the terminals 1C and 2C must remain unconnected.

EH9161CT. Hands Free Colour Videointercom with audio-video

Closed contact the orange LED is ON.

9083. Back-box for video intercoms 46

2 - Unplug the terminal block from the video intercom.

TA9160 . Table adapter for Echos videointercoms. Complete with

7 - Re-insert the two frontal plastic frames to the video intercom.

Surface mounted version

WA9100T. Wall adaptor for the EH9161CT videointercom.

- Fix the wall adaptor

-If required the communication the audio is OPERATIONS

to the door station, but continuing hearing the

up continuously. To restore the audio to the

Assembling of extra buttons to the

Taking out of button caps

Mounting of the additional buttons

Choosing the private conversation or intercommunicating service

1-2 = Video intercom with-

* terminals to be used when installing the pri-

EX301. Single button module for Exhito

EX304. Additional loudspeaker module

(*) for the connections and the characteristics

EX321. White colour intercom for 1+1 inter-

EX301. Single button module for Exhito in-

L1, L2, L3 EX311 + SM50

Fix the wall bracket by using 4 expansion plugs

WB8111. Wall-bracket for the KM8111W

P A1 Floor call input

P 2-3 = Videointercom with

* terminals to be used when installing the private

Surface mounting Door Stations

surface mounting features make holder.

AG222. Double button unit with name plate

AGL222. Light grey version.

AG100V. Video Door Station composed of an

AGL100V. Light grey version. Technical data

AGL100T. Light grey version. Terminals

3a AG100V 3b AG100A 3c AG100T

The wires of connection

cable must be connected

to the common terminal).

Cut and keep insulated not

Adjustments AG30ED and AG40CED

À by adjusting the horizontal and vertical levers in the de-

ASSEMBLY MODULE SEQUENCE 7a 8a

ASSEMBLING DOOR STATIONS SIDE BY SIDE